Contents

BMW X5 xDrive35d X5 Series 2013 Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 345
1 of 345

Summary of Content for BMW X5 xDrive35d X5 Series 2013 Owner's Manual PDF

Owner's Manual for Vehicle

The Ultimate Driving Machine

THE BMW X5. OWNER'S MANUAL.

Contents A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

X5 X5 M

X6 X6 M

Owner's Manual for Vehicle Thank you for choosing a BMW. The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest: Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW. It contains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW. Please also note the additional items of onboard literature, for instance the BMW X5 M / BMW X6 M Supplementary Owner's Manual. We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive. BMW AG

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

2012 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English III/13, 04 13 500 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Contents The fastest way to find information on a partic ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to page 330.

6 Notes

At a glance 12 Cockpit 18 iDrive 25 Voice activation system

Controls 30 Opening and closing 49 Adjusting 61 Transporting children safely 67 Driving 79 Displays 90 Lamps 95 Safety 105 Driving stability control systems 111 Driving comfort 130 Climate 139 Interior equipment 147 Storage compartments

Driving tips 156 Things to remember when driving 160 Loading 164 Saving fuel

Navigation 168 Navigation system 170 Destination entry 179 Destination guidance 187 What to do if...

Entertainment 190 Tone 192 Radio 200 CD/multimedia 220 DVD system in rear

Communication 236 Telephone 249 Office 258 Contacts 261 ConnectedDrive

Mobility 268 Refueling 270 Fuel 275 Wheels and tires 288 Engine compartment 293 Maintenance 295 Replacing components 307 Breakdown assistance 312 Care

Reference 318 Technical data 322 Short commands for voice activation

system 330 Everything from A to Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Notes Using this Owner's Manual The fastest way to find information on a partic ular topic is by using the index. An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in the first chapter.

Additional sources of information Should you have any questions, your service center will be glad to advise you at any time. Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is available on the Internet: bmwusa.com

Symbols Indicates precautions that must be followed

precisely in order to avoid the possibility of personal injury and serious damage to the ve hicle. Marks the end of a specific item of informa tion. "..." Identifies Control Display texts used to se lect individual functions. ... Verbal instructions to use with the voice ac tivation system. ... Identifies the answers generated by the voice activation system.

Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.

Symbols on vehicle components Indicates that you should consult the rele

vant section of this Owner's Manual for infor mation on a particular part or assembly.

Vehicle equipment This Owner's Manual describes all models, all series equipment, as well as country-specific and special equipment offered in the model

series.Therefore, this Owner's Manual also de scribes and depicts equipment that may not be contained in your vehicle because of the se lected special equipment or country version, for example. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. For options and equipment not described in this Owner's Manual, please refer to the Sup plementary Owner's Manuals. On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are arranged differently than shown in the illus trations.

Status of this Owner's Manual at time of printing The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a policy of constant development that is con ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety stan dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from those in your vehicle.

Updates made after the editorial deadline Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the Owner's Manuals are located in the ap pendix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle.

For your own safety Maintenance and repairs Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern materials and high-performance electronics, requires suitable maintenance and repair methods.

Seite 6

Notes

6 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Therefore, have this work performed only by a BMW center or a workshop that works accord ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri ately trained personnel.

If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.

Parts and accessories For your own safety, use genuine parts and ac cessories approved by BMW. When you pur chase accessories tested and approved by BMW and Genuine BMW Parts, you simultane ously acquire the assurance that they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure op timum performance when installed on your ve hicle. BMW warrants these parts to be free from defects in material and workmanship. BMW will not accept any liability for damage resulting from installation of parts and acces sories not approved by BMW. BMW cannot test every product made by other manufactur ers to verify if it can be used on a BMW safely and without risk to either the vehicle, its opera tion, or its occupants. Genuine BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and other products ap proved by BMW, together with professional advice on using these items, are available from all BMW centers. Installation and operation of non-BMW approved accessories such as alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension components, brake dust shields, telephones, including operation of any mobile phone from within the vehicle without using an externally mounted antenna, or trans ceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie- talkies, ham radios or similar accessories, may cause extensive damage to the vehicle, com promise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's electrical system or affect the validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW center for additional information. Maintenance, re placement, or repair of the emission control devices and systems may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any certified automotive part.

California Proposition 65 Warning California laws require us to state the following warning: Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo bile components and parts, including compo nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other repro ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re lated accessories contain lead and lead com pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.

Service and warranty We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol lowing warranties: New Vehicle Limited Warranty Rust Perforation Limited Warranty Federal Emissions System Defect War

ranty Federal Emissions Performance Warranty California Emission Control System Lim

ited Warranty Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating con ditions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to de liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or region, you may be required to adapt your ve

Seite 7

Notes

7 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

hicle to meet different prevailing operating conditions and homologation requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region. In such case, please contact Customer Relations for further information.

Maintenance Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Specifications for required maintenance meas ures: BMW Maintenance system Service and Warranty Information Booklet

for US models Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for

Canadian models If the vehicle is not maintained according to these specifications, this could result in seri ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Data memory Numerous electronic components in your vehi cle contain data memories that store technical information on the vehicle condition, events and faults, either temporarily or permanently. This technical information generally docu ments the state of a component, a module, a system or the environment. Operating conditions of system compo

nents, such as filling levels. Status messages from the vehicle and its

individual components, such as wheel rpm/ speed, motion delay, transverse accelera tion.

Malfunctions and defects in important sys tem components, such as lights and brakes.

Vehicle responses to special driving situa tions, such as airbag deployment, use of the stability control systems.

Ambient conditions, such as the tempera ture.

These data are of a technical nature only and are used to detect and eliminate faults and to optimize vehicle functions. Travel profiles of routes driven with the vehicle cannot be cre ated from these data. If services are used, for instance in the event of repairs, service proc esses, warranty cases, quality assurance, etc., this technical information can be read out from the event and fault data memories by service personnel, including the manufacturer, using special diagnosis tools. This service personnel can provide you with more information if needed. After troubleshooting, the information in the fault memory is cleared or overwritten continuously. Situations are conceivable during the use of the vehicle in which these technical data could become associated with a specific person in combination with other information, such as an accident report, damage to the vehicle, wit ness accounts, etc., possibly with the involve ment of an authorized expert. Additional functions that are contractually agreed with the customer, such as vehicle lo calization in the event of an emergency, permit the transfer of certain vehicle data out of the vehicle.

Reporting safety defects For US customers The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause in jury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West

Seite 8

Notes

8 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of North America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in formation about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov

For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety- related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may tele phone the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety.

Seite 9

Notes

9 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

At a glance These overviews of buttons, switches and

displays are intended to familiarize you with your vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted with the available control concepts and options.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Cockpit Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

All around the steering wheel

1 Rear window safety switch44 2 Power windows43 3 Exterior mirror operation58 4 Lamps

Instrument lighting94

Front fog lamps93

Seite 12

At a glance Cockpit

12 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Parking lamps90

Low beams90

Automatic headlamp con trol91 Adaptive light control91 High-beam Assistant92

5 Head-up Display127

6 Steering column stalk, left Turn signal72

High beams, head lamp flasher92

High-beam Assistant92

Roadside parking lamps92

Computer81

Settings and information about the vehicle79

7 BMW X6: shifting up or down with auto matic transmission75

8 Instrument cluster14 9 Steering column stalk, right

Windshield wipers73

Rain sensor74

BMW X5: rear window wip ers74

10 Start/stop the engine and switch the ignition on/off67

11 Ignition lock67 12 Steering wheel buttons, right

Change the radio station Stopping a traffic announcement Select a music track Scrolling through the redial list

Next entertainment source

Recirculated-air mode133

Steering wheel heating60

Lane departure warning102

13 Horn, the entire surface 14

15 Cruise control lever Cruise control118

Active cruise control111

16 Steering wheel buttons, left

Seite 13

Cockpit At a glance

13 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Telephone236

Volume

Activate/deactivate the voice acti vation system25

17 Releasing the hood289

Instrument cluster

1 Turn signal indicator lamp 2 Speedometer 3 Indicator/warning lamps15 4 Active Cruise Control111 5 Tachometer80 6 BMW X5: current fuel consumption80

BMW X6: engine oil temperature80 or current fuel consumption80

7 Display for Clock79 External temperature79

Indicator/warning lamps15 Cruise control118 Active Cruise Control111 BMW X5: reserve display for diesel ex

haust fluid271 8 Display for

Automatic transmission position75 HDC Hill Descent Control108 Computer81 Date of next scheduled service, and re

maining distance to be driven83

Seite 14

At a glance Cockpit

14 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Odometer and trip odometer79 High-beam Assistant92 Check Control message

present85

Adaptive Drive: sport chassis and sus pension tuning109

9 Fuel gauge81 10 Resetting the trip odometer79

Viewing service requirement display80

Indicator/warning lamps The concept

The indicator and warning lamps can light up in a variety of combinations and colors. Several of the lamps are checked for proper functioning when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on, and light up briefly.

Text messages Text messages at the upper edge of the Con trol Display explain the meaning of the dis played indicator and warning lamps.

Supplementary text messages You can call up more information, e.g., on the cause of a malfunction and on how to respond, via Check Control, refer to page 85. In urgent cases, this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.

Indicator lamps without text messages The following indicator lamps notify you that certain functions are active:

Symbol Function or system

Parking brake set, refer to page 69

Canada: parking brake set, refer to page 69.

High beams/headlamp flasher, refer to page 92

Front fog lamps, refer to page 93

Lamp flashes: DSC or DTC controls the drive and braking forces for maintaining vehi cle stability, refer to page 105

Engine malfunction with adverse ef fect on emissions, refer to page 294

Seite 15

Cockpit At a glance

15 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

All around the center console

1 Headliner17 2 Control Display19 3 Hazard warning system307

Central locking system35

4 Opening glove compartment147 5 Automatic climate control with 2-zone con

trol131 Automatic climate control with 4-zone con trol135

6 Radio and CD/DVD drive192

7 Open the tailgate3838

Active seat54

Park Distance Control PDC120 Top View124 Backup camera122 HDC Hill Descent Control106

Seite 16

At a glance Cockpit

16 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

DSC Dynamic Stability Con trol105 DTC Dynamic Traction Con trol106 Side View126

8 Controller with buttons18 9 Automatic Hold70

10 Parking brake69

11 Adaptive Drive109 12 Selector lever for automatic transmis

sion76

All around the headliner

1 Emergency Request307

2 Glass sunroof4546

3 Indicator lamp for the front pas senger airbags97

4 Reading lamps94

5 Interior lamps94

Seite 17

Cockpit At a glance

17 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

iDrive Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

The concept The iDrive combines the functions of a multi tude of switches. Thus, these functions can be operated from a central location.

Using the iDrive during a trip To avoid becoming distracted and pos

ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occupants and to other road users, never at tempt to use the controls or enter information unless traffic and road conditions allow this.

Controls at a glance Controls

1 Control Display 2 Controller with buttons

Seite 18

At a glance iDrive

18 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

The buttons can be used to open the me nus directly. The controller can be used to select menu items and create the settings. The buttons can be used to open the me nus directly. The controller can be used to select menu items and create the settings.

Move in four directions, arrow 3 Turn, arrow 4 Push, arrow 5

Buttons on controller

Press the but ton

Function

MENU Opens the main menu.

RADIO Opens the Radio menu.

MEDIA Opens the CD/Multimedia menu.

NAV Opens the Navigation menu.

TEL Opens the Telephone menu.

BACK Displays the previous panel.

OPTION Opens the Options menu.

Control Display

Notes To clean the Control Display, follow the

care instructions, refer to page 315. Do not place objects close to the Control

Display; otherwise, the Control Display can be damaged.

Switching off

1. Press the button.

2. "Switch off control display"

Switching on Press the controller again to switch the screen back on.

Operating concept Opening the main menu

Press the button.

The main menu is displayed. All iDrive functions can be called up via the main menu.

Seite 19

iDrive At a glance

19 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Selecting menu items Menu items shown in white can be selected.

1. Turn the controller until the desired menu item is highlighted.

2. Press the controller.

Menu items in the Owner's Manual In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be selected are set in quotation marks, e.g., "Settings".

Changing between panels After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap. Move the controller to the left.

The current panel is closed and the previ ous panel is displayed. The previous panel is opened again by pressing the BACK button. In this case, the current panel is not closed.

Move the controller to the right. A new panel is opened on top of the previ ous display.

White arrows pointing to the left or right indi cate that additional panels can be opened.

View of an opened menu When a menu is opened, it generally opens with the panel that was last selected in that menu. To display the first panel of a menu: Move the controller to the left repeatedly

until the first panel is displayed. Press the menu button on the controller

twice.

Opening the Options menu Press the button.

The "Options" menu is displayed.

Additional options: move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed.

Options menu The "Options" menu consists of various areas: Screen settings, e.g., "Switch off control

display".

Seite 20

At a glance iDrive

20 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Control options for the selected main menu, e.g., for "Radio".

If applicable, further operating options for the selected menu, for instance "Store station".

Changing settings 1. Select a field. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is displayed.

3. Press the controller.

Activating/deactivating the functions Several menu items are preceded by a check box. It indicates whether the function is acti vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function.

The function is activated. The function is deactivated.

Example: setting the clock Setting the clock

1. Press the button. The main menu is displayed.

2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high lighted, and then press the controller.

3. If necessary, move the controller to the left to display "Time/Date".

4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is highlighted, and then press the controller.

5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high lighted, and then press the controller.

Seite 21

iDrive At a glance

21 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

6. Turn the controller to set the hours and press the controller.

7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller.

Status information Status field The following information is displayed in the status field at the top right: Time. Current entertainment source. Sound output, on/off. Wireless network reception strength. Telephone status. Traffic bulletin reception.

Status field symbols The symbols are grouped into various catego ries.

Radio symbols

Symbol Meaning

HD Radio is switched on.

Satellite radio is switched on.

Telephone symbols

Symbol Meaning

Incoming or outgoing call.

Missed call.

Wireless network reception strength Symbol flashes: searching for network.

Wireless network is not available.

Bluetooth is switched on.

Symbol Meaning

Roaming is active.

Text message, e-mail was received.

Check the SIM card.

SIM card is blocked.

SIM card is missing.

Enter the PIN.

Entertainment symbols

Symbol Meaning

CD/DVD player.

Music collection.

Gracenote database.

AUX-IN port.

USB audio interface.

Music interface for smartphones.

Additional symbols

Symbol Meaning

Spoken instructions are switched off.

Request of the current vehicle posi tion.

Split screen General information Additional information can be displayed on the right side of the split screen, e.g., information from the computer. In the divided screen view, the so-called split screen, this information remains visible even when you change to another menu.

Seite 22

At a glance iDrive

22 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Switching the split screen on and off

1. Press the button. 2. "Split screen"

Selecting the display

1. Press the button. 2. "Split screen" 3. Move the controller until the split screen is

selected. 4. Press the controller or select "Split screen

content". 5. Select the desired menu item.

Programmable memory buttons General information The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons and called up di rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina tions, phone numbers and entry points into the menu. The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Saving a function 1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.

2. Press the desired button for more than two seconds.

Running a function Press the button. The function will run immediately. This

means, for example, that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected.

Displaying the button assignment Use a finger to touch the buttons. Do not wear gloves or use objects. The key assignment is displayed at the top edge of the screen.

To display short information: touch the button.

To display detailed information: touch the button for an extended period.

Entering letters and numbers 1. Turn the controller: select letters or num

bers. 2. Select additional letters or numbers if

needed. 3. "OK": confirm the entry.

Symbol Function

Press the controller: delete the let ter or number.

Press the controller for an extended period: delete all letters or numbers.

Enter a blank space.

Seite 23

iDrive At a glance

23 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Switching between letters and numbers Depending on the menu, you can switch be tween entering letters and numbers.

Symbol Function

Enter the letters.

Enter the numbers.

Switching between upper and lower case letters Depending on the menu, you can switch be tween entering uppercase and lowercase let ters.

Symbol Function

Move the controller forward: switch from upper to lower case letters.

Move the controller forward: switch from lower to upper case letters.

Entry comparison Entry of names and addresses: the selection is narrowed down every time a letter is entered and letters may be added automatically. The entries are continuously compared to the data stored in the vehicle. Only those letters are offered during the

entry for which data is available. Destination search: town/city names can

be entered using the spelling of language available on the Control Display.

Seite 24

At a glance iDrive

24 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Voice activation system Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

The concept Most functions that are displayed on the

Control Display can be operated with the voice activation system using spoken com mands. The system prompts you to make your entries.

Functions that can only be used when the vehicle is stationary cannot be operated using the voice activation system.

The system uses a special microphone lo cated in the area of the interior rearview mirror.

... Verbal instructions in the Owner's Manual to use with the voice activation system.

Requirements Via the Control Display, set a language that is also supported by the voice activation system so that the spoken commands can be identi fied. Set the language, refer to page 88.

Using voice activation Activating the voice activation system

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. Wait for the signal. 3. Say the command.

The command appears on the Control Dis play.

The symbol on the Control Display indi cates that the voice activation system is active. If no other commands are available, operate the function via iDrive in this case.

Terminating the voice activation system

Briefly press the button on the steer ing wheel or Cancel.

Possible commands Most menu items on the Control Display can be voiced as commands. The available commands depend on the menu that is currently displayed on the Control Dis play. The functions of the main menu have short commands. Some list items, such as the phone book en tries, can also be selected via the voice activa tion system. Say the list items exactly as they are displayed on the list.

Having possible commands read aloud You can have the system read possible com mands aloud: Voice commands.

Seite 25

Voice activation system At a glance

25 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

For example, if the "Settings" menu is dis played, the commands for the settings are read out loud.

Executing functions using short commands Functions on the main menu can be performed directly by means of short commands, usually irrespective of which menu item is currently selected, for instance Vehicle status. List of short commands of the voice activation system, refer to page 322.

Help dialog for the voice activation system Calling up help dialog: Help Additional commands for the help dialog: Help with examples: information about the

current operating options and the most im portant commands for them are an nounced.

Help with voice activation: information about the principle of operation for the voice activation system is announced.

Example: playing back a CD Via the main menu The commands of the menu items are spoken out loud, in the same way as they are selected via the controller.

1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output if necessary.

2. Press the button on the steering wheel.

3. C D and multimedia The medium last played is played back.

4. C D 5. C D drive

The CD is played back.

6. Press the button on the steering wheel again to select a specific track.

7. Track ... e.g., CD track 4.

Via short commands Playback of the CD can also be started using a short command.

1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output if necessary.

2. Press the button on the steering wheel.

3. C D drive Track ... e.g., CD track 4.

Setting the voice dialog You can set whether the system should use the standard dialog or a shorter version. In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the announcements from the system are issued in an abbreviated form. On the Control Display:

1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units" 3. "Speech mode:" 4. Select the setting.

Adjusting the volume Turn the volume knob while giving an instruc tion until the desired volume is set.

Seite 26

At a glance Voice activation system

26 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

The volume remains constant even if the volume of other audio sources is changed.

The volume is stored for the remote con trol currently in use.

Notes on Emergency Requests Do not use the voice activation system to ini tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establish ment of a telephone connection. Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 307, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.

Environmental conditions Say the commands, numbers, and letters

smoothly and with normal volume, empha sis, and speed.

Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system.

Keep doors, windows and /panoramic glass sunroof closed to prevent noise in terference.

Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking.

Seite 27

Voice activation system At a glance

27 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Controls This chapter is intended to provide you with

information that will give you complete control of your vehicle. All features and accessories that are useful for driving and your safety, comfort

and convenience are described here.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Opening and closing Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Remote control/key Buttons on the remote control

1 Unlocking 2 Locking 3 Opening tailgate

General information The vehicle is supplied with two remote con trols with keys. Each remote control contains a rechargeable battery that is automatically recharged when it is in the ignition lock while the car is being driven. Use each remote control at least twice a year for longer road trips in order to maintain the batteries' charge status. In vehicles equipped with Comfort Access, the remote control contains a replaceable battery, refer to page 42.

The settings called up and implemented when the vehicle is unlocked depend on which re mote control is used to unlock the vehicle, re fer to Personal Profile. In addition, information about service require ments is stored in the remote control, Service data in the remote control, refer to page 293.

Integrated key

Press button 1 and pull out the key.

The integrated key fits the following locks: Driver's door, refer to page 34. Cargo floor cover in cargo area, refer to

page 150.

New remote controls You can obtain new remote controls from your service center.

Loss of the remote controls Lost remote controls can be blocked by your service center.

Personal Profile The concept You can set several of your vehicle's functions to suit your personal needs and preferences.

Seite 30

Controls Opening and closing

30 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

The settings are automatically saved in the profile currently activated in the remote control.

The remote control used is detected when the vehicle is unlocked and the stored pro file is called up.

Your personal settings will be recognized and called up again even if the vehicle has been used in the meantime by someone else with another remote control.

The individual settings are stored for a maxi mum of four remote controls. They are stored for two remote controls if Comfort Access is in use.

Personal Profile settings The following functions and settings can be stored in a profile. More information on the settings can be found under: Assigning the programmable memory but

tons, refer to page 23. Response of the central locking system

when the car is being unlocked, refer to page 32.

Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to page 35.

Driver's seat, exterior mirror and steering wheel positions, refer to page 57.

Settings for the display on the Control Dis play and in the instrument cluster: 12h/24h clock format, refer to

page 87. Date format, refer to page 88. Brightness of the Control Display, refer

to page 88. Language on the Control Display, refer

to page 88. Units of measure for fuel consumption,

distance covered/remaining distances, and temperature, refer to page 88.

Show visual warning for the Park Distance Control PDC, refer to page 121.

Show visual warning for Top View, refer to page 124.

Show Side View, refer to page 126. Backup camera:

Function selection, refer to page 123. Type of display, refer to page 124.

Lane departure warning: last setting, on/ off, refer to page 102.

Head-up Display: selection, brightness and position of the display, refer to page 127.

Adaptive Drive: selected chassis and sus pension tuning, refer to page 109.

Light settings: Triple turn signal activation, refer to

page 73. Welcome lamps, refer to page 90. Headlamp courtesy delay feature, refer

to page 91. Daytime running lights, refer to

page 91. High-beam Assistant, refer to

page 92. Automatic climate control with 2-zone con

trol: settings, refer to page 131. Navigation:

Voice activation, refer to page 181. Route criteria, refer to page 179. Map view settings, refer to page 183.

Entertainment: Tone control, refer to page 190. Radio, stored stations, refer to

page 198. CD/multimedia, audio source listened

to last, refer to page 200. Telephone: volume, refer to page 240.

Seite 31

Opening and closing Controls

31 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Central locking system The concept The central locking system becomes active when the driver's door is closed. The system simultaneously engages and re leases the locks on the following: Doors. Tailgate. Fuel filler flap.

Operating from the outside Via the remote control. Via the door lock. In cars with Comfort Access, via the door

handles. The following takes place simultaneously when locking/unlocking the vehicle via the re mote control: The welcome lamps, interior lamps and

courtesy lamps are switched on and off. The alarm system is armed or disarmed,

refer to page 42.

Operating from the inside Via the button for the central locking system, refer to page 35. If the vehicle is locked from the inside, the fuel filler flap remains unlocked. If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the central locking system unlocks automatically. The hazard warning system and interior lamps come on.

Opening and closing: from the outside Using the remote control

General information Take the remote control with you People or animals left unattended in a

parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in side. Always take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside.

Unlocking Press the button. The vehicle is unlocked.

The welcome lamps, interior lamps, and cour tesy lamps are switched on. You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

1. "Settings" 2. "Door locks" 3. "Unlock button:"

4. Select the desired function: "All doors"

The entire vehicle is unlocked. "Driver's door only"

Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. Pressing again unlocks the entire vehicle.

Seite 32

Controls Opening and closing

32 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Convenient opening Press and hold the button on the remote

control. The windows and the glass sunroof/panoramic glass sunroof open.

Locking Press the button on the remote con

trol. Locking from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside

if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowl edge.

Switching on the interior lamps and courtesy lamps

Press the button on the remote con trol with the vehicle locked.

Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button on the remote control for at least 3 seconds. To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Unlocking tailgate Press the button on the remote control for

approx. 1 second and release. The tailgate will open slightly, regardless of whether it was previously locked or unlocked. With automatic tailgate operation: the tailgate opens automatically. The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens. Ensure that adequate clearance is available before opening. To avoid locking yourself out of the vehicle, do not place the remote control into the cargo area. The tailgate is locked again as soon as it is pushed closed.

Before and after each trip, check that the tail gate has not been inadvertently unlocked.

Provide edge protection Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear

window while driving and damage the heating wires of the rear window. Provide edge protec tion.

Confirmation signals from the vehicle 1. "Settings" 2. "Door locks" 3. "Flash when lock/unlock"

Retrieving the seat, mirror, and steering wheel settings The driver's seat, exterior mirror, and steering wheel positions selected last are stored for the currently used remote control. When the vehicle is being unlocked, these po sitions are automatically retrieved if the setting is activated.

Pinch hazard when moving back the seat If this function is used, first make sure

that the footwell behind the driver's seat is empty. Failure to do so could cause injury to persons or damage to objects behind the seat as a result of a rearward movement of the seat.

The adjustment procedure is interrupted: When a seat position switch is pressed. When a button of the seat and mirror mem

ory is pressed.

Seite 33

Opening and closing Controls

33 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Selecting automatic activation 1. "Settings" 2. "Door locks" 3. "Last seat position auto."

Malfunctions Local radio waves may interfere with the re mote control. In this case, unlock and lock the car at the door lock with the integrated key. If the car can no longer be locked with a re mote control, the battery in the remote control is discharged. Use the remote control during an extended drive in order to recharge the bat tery, refer to page 30. The remote control for Comfort Access contains a battery that may need to be replaced, refer to page 42.

For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is gov erned by the following: FCC ID: LX8766S LX8766E LX8CAS LX8CAS2 Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful inter ference, and

this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

Using the door lock

General information Locking from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside

if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowl edge.

When unlocking:

1. Turning the key once unlocks the driver's door and the fuel filler flap.

2. Turning the key a second time unlocks the remaining doors and the tailgate.

Manual operation If an electrical malfunction occurs, unlock or lock the driver's door using the integrated key in the door lock.

Seite 34

Controls Opening and closing

34 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Opening and closing: from the inside

Locking and unlocking Press the button in the vehicle.

The doors and the tailgate are locked or un locked when the front doors are closed, but they are not secured against theft. The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

Automatic locking The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

1. "Settings" 2. "Door locks" 3. Select the desired function:

"Lock if no door is opened" The vehicle locks automatically after a short period of time if a door is not opened.

"Lock after start. to drive" The vehicle locks automatically after you drive away.

Unlocking and opening Press the button. The doors are

unlocked. To open, pull the door handle above the armrest.

Pull the door handle above the armrest twice: the door is unlocked the first time and opened the second time.

Locking Press the button. The doors are

locked. Press the lock button of a door. To prevent

you from being locked out, the opened driver's door cannot be locked using the lock button.

Take the remote control with you People or animals left unattended in a

parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in side. Always take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside.

Doors Automatic soft closing To close the doors, push lightly. It is closed au tomatically.

Danger of pinching Make sure that the closing path of the

doors is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Seite 35

Opening and closing Controls

35 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

BMW X5: upper tailgate Opening The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens. Ensure that adequate clearance is available before opening.

Provide edge protection Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear

window while driving and damage the heating wires of the rear window. Provide edge protec tion.

Opening from the inside

Press the button. The tailgate opens some what unless it has been locked.

Opening from the outside

Press the button, see arrow, or the button of the remote control for approx. 1 second. The tailgate opens slightly. It can be swung upward.

Opening manually In case of an electrical malfunction:

1. From the cargo area, press out the handle in the tailgate, refer to arrow, with a screw driver and pull. The tailgate is unlocked.

2. Open the tailgate from the outside and press in the handle.

The tailgate is locked again as soon as it is closed.

Closing

Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tail gate can be used to conveniently pull down the tailgate.

Keep the closing area clear Make sure that the closing area of the

tailgate is clear; otherwise, injuries or damage may result.

Automatic soft closing To close the tailgate fully, press down lightly only. It is closed automatically.

Seite 36

Controls Opening and closing

36 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Keep the closing area clear Make sure that the closing area of the

tailgate is clear; otherwise, injuries or damage may result.

Automatic tailgate operation

Adjusting opening height You can set how far the tailgate should open.

Adjusting the opening height When adjusting the opening height, en

sure that there is a clearance of at least 4 in/10 cm above the tailgate. Otherwise, the ceiling may not be high enough for the open tailgate if the load situation changes.

1. "Settings" 2. "Tailgate" 3. Turn the controller until the desired open

ing height is selected.

Opening The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens. Ensure that adequate clearance is available before opening. The tailgate opens automatically to the ad justed opening height.

Press the button on the outside of the tail gate when the vehicle is unlocked.

Press the button in the center console.

Press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second and release.

The opening procedure is interrupted: When the engine starts. When the vehicle starts moving. By pressing the button in the cen

ter console again. By pressing the button on the remote

control for a longer period. By pressing the button on the outside of

the tailgate. By pressing the button on the inside of the

tailgate.

Closing Keep the closing area clear Make sure that the closing area of the

tailgate is clear; otherwise, injuries or damage may result.

Function requirement: The lower tailgate is closed and must be locked on both sides.

Seite 37

Opening and closing Controls

37 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

The tailgate closes automatically when the button on the inside of the tailgate is pressed. To stop the closing procedure: Press the button on the inside of the tail

gate. Press the button on the exterior of the tail

gate. The closing procedure is also stopped: When the engine starts. If the vehicle jerks while driving away. The closing procedure is not interrupted when the vehicle starts moving.

Manually opening or closing In case of an electrical defect of the automatic tailgate operation function:

1. Manually release the tailgate, refer to page 36.

2. Open or close the tailgate slowly and with out making sudden movements.

Do not use force to open or close If the tailgate offers increased resistance,

do not forcefully open or close the tailgate; otherwise, injury or damage may result.

BMW X5: lower tailgate Opening

Pull the lever and swing the tailgate downward.

The opened tailgate can be loaded with up to 550 lbs/250 kg.

Closing Fold the tailgate up and press closed.

BMW X6: tailgate Automatic tailgate operation

Adjusting opening height You can set how far the tailgate should open.

Adjusting the opening height When adjusting the opening height, en

sure that there is a clearance of at least 4 in/10 cm above the tailgate. Otherwise, the ceiling may not be high enough for the open tailgate if the load situation changes.

1. "Settings" 2. "Tailgate"

Seite 38

Controls Opening and closing

38 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

3. Turn the controller until the desired open ing height is selected.

Opening The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens. Ensure that adequate clearance is available before opening. The tailgate opens automatically to the ad justed opening height.

Press the button on the outside of the tail gate when the vehicle is unlocked.

Press the button in the center console.

Press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second and release.

The opening procedure is interrupted: When the engine starts. When the vehicle starts moving. By pressing the button in the cen

ter console again. By pressing the button on the remote

control for a longer period.

By pressing the button on the outside of the tailgate.

By pressing the button on the inside of the tailgate.

Closing Keep the closing area clear Make sure that the closing area of the

tailgate is clear; otherwise, injuries or damage may result.

The tailgate closes automatically when the button on the inside of the tailgate is pressed. To stop the closing procedure: Press the button on the inside of the tail

gate. Press the button on the exterior of the tail

gate. The closing procedure is also stopped: When the engine starts. If the vehicle jerks while driving away. Closing is not canceled when you put the vehi cle into motion.

Automatic closing The tailgate closes automatically without

button operation if it is weighed down by an additional weight of approx. 11 lbs/5 kg, such as snow or ice.

Seite 39

Opening and closing Controls

39 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Manually opening or closing In case of an electrical malfunction:

1. Push out cover 1 on the tailgate with a screwdriver.

2. Push the catch 2 in the direction of the ar row.

3. Open or close the tailgate slowly and with out making sudden movements.

Do not use force to open or close If the tailgate offers increased resistance,

do not forcefully open or close the tailgate; otherwise, injury or damage may result.

Comfort Access The concept The vehicle can be accessed without activat ing the remote control. All you need to do is to have the remote con trol with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the remote control when it is nearby or in the passenger compartment. Comfort Access supports the following func tions: Unlocking/locking of the vehicle. Unlocking of the tailgate separately. Starting the engine. Convenient closing.

Functional requirement To lock the vehicle, the remote control

must be located outside of the vehicle. The next unlocking and locking cycle is not

possible until after approx. 2 seconds. The engine can only be started if the re

mote control is inside the vehicle.

Comparison with ordinary remote control The functions can be controlled by pressing the buttons or via Comfort Access. Should a short delay occur when opening or closing the windows or the glass sunroof/ panoramic glass sunroof, the system checks whether a remote control is located in the vehi cle. Please repeat opening or closing if neces sary.

Unlocking

Fully grasp a door handle, arrow 1. This corresponds to pressing the button.

Seite 40

Controls Opening and closing

40 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Locking

Touch the area on the door handle, arrow 2, with your finger for approx. 1 second. This corresponds to pressing the but ton.

To save battery power, ensure that the ignition and all electronic systems and/or power con sumers are switched off before locking the ve hicle. If a remote control is detected within the vehi cle, the vehicle does not lock or is unlocked again.

Convenient closing Press the area, arrow 2, with your finger and hold. In addition, the windows and the glass sunroof/ panoramic glass sunroof close.

Monitor the closing process Watch during the closing process to be

sure that no one is injured. Removing the hand from the door handle immediately stops the closing process.

Unlocking the tailgate separately Press the button on the exterior of the tailgate. This corresponds to pressing the button. If a remote control accidentally left in the cargo area is detected in the locked vehicle, the tail gate opens again. The hazard warning flashers flash and a signal sounds.

Ignition on Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ignition on. When doing so, do not depress the brake pedal, otherwise the engine will start.

Starting the engine The engine can be started or the ignition can be switched on when a remote control is inside the vehicle. It is not necessary to insert a re mote control into the ignition lock, refer to page 67. As long as no remote control is detected in the vehicle, it is only possible to restart the engine within approx. 10 seconds after it is switched off if no door has been opened.

Switching off the engine Remote control not in ignition lock:

After switching off the engine, the trans mission is automatically switched into transmission position P.

Remote control in ignition lock: If transmission position N is engaged, the transmission remains in this position after the engine is switched off.

Malfunction The Comfort Access functions can be distur bed by local radio waves, such as by a mobile phone in the immediate vicinity of the remote control or when a mobile phone is being charged in the vehicle. If this occurs, open or close the vehicle using the buttons on the remote control or use the integrated key in the door lock. To start the engine afterward, insert the re mote control into the ignition switch.

Warning lamps The warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when you attempt to

Seite 41

Opening and closing Controls

41 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

start the engine: the engine cannot be started. The remote control is not in the vehicle or has a malfunction. Take the remote control with you inside the vehicle or have it checked. If necessary, insert another remote control into the ignition switch.

The warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up while the engine is running: the remote control is no lon

ger inside the vehicle. After switching off the engine, the engine can only be started again within approx. 10 sec onds if no door has been opened.

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on and a message ap pears on the Control Display: replace

the remote control battery.

Replacing the battery The remote control for Comfort Access con tains a battery that will need to be replaced from time to time.

1. Take the integrated key out of the remote control, refer to page 30.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Insert a new battery of the same type with the positive side facing upwards.

4. Press the cover closed. Return used battery to a recycling collec tion point or to your service center.

Alarm system The concept The vehicle alarm system responds to: Opening of a door, the hood or the tailgate. Movements in the vehicle: interior motion

sensor, refer to page 43. Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at

tempts to steal a wheel or tow the car. Interruptions in battery voltage. The alarm system briefly indicates tampering: By sounding an acoustic alarm. By switching on the hazard warning sys

tem. By flashing the high beams.

Arming and disarming the alarm system

General information When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same time.

Door lock and armed alarm system Unlocking via the door lock will trigger the alarm on some market-specific versions. To stop this alarm, unlock the vehicle with the remote control or switch on the ignition.

Tailgate and armed alarm system The tailgate can be opened using the remote control, even if the alarm system is armed.

Press the button on the remote control. After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and monitored again by the alarm system. The haz ard warning system flashes once. In some market-specific versions, the tailgate can only be opened using the remote control if the vehicle was unlocked first.

Seite 42

Controls Opening and closing

42 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Switching off the alarm Unlock the vehicle using the remote con

trol, refer to page 32. Insert the remote control all the way into

the ignition lock.

Indicator lamp on the interior rearview mirror

The indicator lamp flashes continuously: The system is armed.

The indicator lamp flashes after locking: The doors, hood or tailgate is not closed properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se cured. The indicator lamp flashes continuously af ter approx. 10 seconds. The interior motion sensor is not active.

The indicator lamp goes out after unlock ing: The vehicle has not been tampered with.

If the indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the remote control is inserted in the ignition, but for no longer than approx. 5 minutes: An alarm has been triggered.

Panic mode In dangerous situations, trigger the alarm sys tem:

Press the button on the remote control for at least 3 seconds. To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Tilt alarm sensor The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.

Interior motion sensor For the sensor to function properly, the win dows and glass sunroof/panoramic glass sun roof must be closed.

Avoiding unintentional alarms The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen sor can be switched off together, such as in the following situations: In duplex garages. During transport on car-carrying trains, at

sea or on a trailer. When animals are to remain in the vehicle.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor

Press the remote control button again within 10 seconds after the vehicle is locked. The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec onds and then flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen sor remain switched off until the vehicle is locked again.

Power windows General information

Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam ple, cannot operate the power windows and in jure themselves.

Seite 43

Opening and closing Controls

43 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Opening

Press the switch to the resistance point. The window opens while the switch is held.

Press the switch beyond the resist ance point. The window opens automatically.

Pressing again stops the motion.

Closing Danger of pinching Monitor the closing process and make

sure that the closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Pull the switch to the resistance point. The window closes while the switch is held.

Pull the switch beyond the resistance point. The window closes automatically.

Pressing the switch stops the motion. Convenient operation, refer to page 32, via the remote control or the door lock. Convenient closing, refer to page 41, with Comfort Access.

After the ignition is switched off When the remote control is removed or the ig nition is switched off, the windows can con tinue to be operated for approx. 1 minute as long as no door is opened.

Pinch protection system If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a window closes, the closing action is inter rupted. The window reopens slightly.

Danger of pinching even with pinch pro tection

Even with the pinch protection system, check that the window's closing path is clear; other wise, the closing action may not stop in certain situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.

Do not use window accessories Do not install any accessories in the

range of movement of the windows; otherwise, the pinch protection system will be impaired.

Closing without the pinch protection system For example, if there is an external danger or if ice on the windows prevents a window from closing normally, proceed as follows:

1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there. Pinch protection is limited and the window reopens slightly if the closing force ex ceeds a certain value.

2. Pull the switch past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there. The window closes without pinch protec tion.

Safety switch With the safety switch, the rear windows are prevented from being opened or closed via the

Seite 44

Controls Opening and closing

44 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

switches in the rear passenger area, such as by children.

Press the button. The LED lights up if the safety function is switched on.

Safety switch for rear operation Press the safety switch when transport

ing children in the rear; otherwise, injury may result if the windows are closed without super vision.

Roller sunblinds for the rear side windows Pull the loop of the roller sun blind and hook onto bracket.

Do not open the window while the roller sunblind is tilted

Do not open the window while the roller sun blind is tilted; otherwise, there is a risk of dam age at high speeds that may result in personal injury.

X5: panoramic glass sunroof General information The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be operated together or separately using the switch.

Danger of pinching Monitor the closing process and make

sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam ple, cannot operate the roof and injure them selves.

Tilting the glass sunroof Press the switch. The closed sunroof is tilted and the sliding visor opens slightly.

Do not use force to close the sliding visor Do not use force to close the sliding visor

with the glass sunroof in its tilted position, oth erwise the mechanism will be damaged.

Opening/closing the sliding visor You can move the sliding visor independently with the sunroof closed or tilted.

Press the switch in the de sired direction to the resist ance point and hold it there. The sliding visor moves while the switch is being held.

Press the switch in the desired direction past the resistance point. The sliding visor moves automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the mo tion.

Opening/closing the glass sunroof With the sliding visor open, proceed as descri bed under Sliding visor.

Seite 45

Opening and closing Controls

45 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Opening/closing the glass sunroof and sliding visor together

Press the switch twice in the de sired direction past the resist ance point. The glass sunroof and sliding vi sor move together. Pressing the

switch again stops the motion.

Convenient operation, refer to page 32, via the remote control or the door lock. Convenient closing, refer to page 41, with Comfort Access.

Comfort function Press the switch twice with

the sunroof open: The sunroof is raised.

When the sunroof is raised, briefly press the switch twice in the opening direc tion: The sunroof is opened all the way.

Comfort position In the comfort position, the roof is not fully open. This reduces wind noise in the passen ger compartment. Each time the glass sunroof is opened or closed all the way, it stops in the comfort posi tion. If desired, continue the motion following this with the switch.

After the ignition is switched off The roof can still be operated for approx. 1 mi nute, as long as no door has been opened.

Pinch protection system If the closing force when closing the glass sun roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move ment is stopped, beginning at approximately

one-third of the opening in the roof, or from the tilted position during closing. The roof and the sliding visor open a short dis tance.

Danger of pinching even with pinch pro tection

Despite the pinch protection system, check that the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise, the closing action may not be interrupted in certain extreme situations, such as when thin objects are present.

Closing without the pinch protection system For example, if there is an external danger, pro ceed as follows: Press the switch forward beyond the resist ance point and hold. The roof closes without the pinch protection system.

Initialization after a power failure After a power failure, it is only possible to raise the roof, if necessary. Have the system initialized by your service center.

BMW X6: glass sunroof, electric General information

Danger of pinching Monitor the closing process and make

sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam ple, cannot operate the roof and injure them selves.

Seite 46

Controls Opening and closing

46 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Tilting the glass sunroof Press the switch. The closed sunroof is tilted and the sliding visor opens slightly.

Do not use force to close the sliding visor Do not use force to close the sliding visor

with the glass sunroof in its tilted position, oth erwise the mechanism will be damaged.

Opening/closing the glass sunroof Press the switch in the de

sired direction to the resist ance point and hold it there. The glass sunroof moves while the switch is being held.

Press the switch in the desired direction past the resistance point. The glass sunroof moves automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the mo tion.

The glass sunroof and sliding visor can be opened together. Close the sliding visor man ually. Convenient operation, refer to page 33, via the remote control or the door lock. Convenient closing, refer to page 41, with Comfort Access.

Opening/closing the glass sunroof automatically Press the switch beyond the resistance point. The following movements are also automatic: Pressing the switch with the sunroof open:

the sunroof is tilted fully. Pressing the switch in the Open direction

with the sunroof tilted: the sunroof is opened fully.

Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

Comfort position In the comfort position, the roof is not fully open. This reduces wind noise in the passen ger compartment. Each time the glass sunroof is opened or closed all the way, it stops in the comfort posi tion. If desired, continue the motion following this with the switch.

After the ignition is switched off The roof can still be operated for approx. 1 mi nute, as long as no door has been opened.

Pinch protection system If the closing force when closing the glass sun roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move ment is stopped, beginning at approximately the middle of the opening in the roof, or from the tilted position during closing. The glass sunroof opens again fully.

Danger of pinching even with pinch pro tection

Despite the pinch protection system, check that the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise, the closing action may not be interrupted in certain extreme situations, such as when thin objects are present.

Seite 47

Opening and closing Controls

47 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Closing without the pinch protection system For example, if there is an external danger, pro ceed as follows:

1. Press the switch forward beyond the re sistance point and hold. The pinch protec tion system is limited and the sunroof opens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value.

2. Within about 4 seconds, slide the switch forward again beyond the resistance point and hold it there. The roof closes without the pinch protection system.

Initialization after a power failure After a power failure, it is only possible to raise the roof, if necessary. Have the system initialized by your service center.

Seite 48

Controls Opening and closing

48 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Adjusting Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Sitting safely The ideal seating position can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. The seating position plays an important role in an accident in combination with: Safety belts, refer to page 54. Head restraints, refer to page 55. Airbags, refer to page 95.

Seats Note before adjusting

Do not adjust the seat while driving Never attempt to adjust the driver's seat

while driving. The seat could respond with un expected movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.

Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear

Do not incline the backrest on the front pas senger side too far to the rear during driving. Otherwise, there is the danger of sliding under the safety belt in an accident. This would elimi nate the protection normally provided by the belt.

Adjusting manually

Forward/backward

Pull the lever and slide the seat into the de sired position. After releasing the lever, move the seat forward or back slightly to make sure it engages properly.

Thigh support

Pull the lever and move the thigh support for ward or back.

Seite 49

Adjusting Controls

49 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Adjusting electrically

1 Forward/backward 2 Height 3 Seat tilt

4 Backrest

Differs depending on seat:

1 Backrest 2 Height

Additional depending on seat:

1 Backrest width 2 Shoulder support 3 Thigh support 4 Lumbar support

Backrest width The width of the backrest can be changed with the side wings to adjust the side support to your own needs.

Shoulder support This also supports the back in the shoulder area, This creates a relaxed sitting position and helps relieve stress on the shoulder muscles. The shoulder support is also used to adjust the distance of the head restraint from the back of the seat occupant's head.

Lumbar support

You can also adjust the contour of the backrest to obtain additional support in the lumbar re gion. The upper hips and spinal column receive sup plementary support to help you maintain a re laxed, upright sitting position.

Seite 50

Controls Adjusting

50 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Increase or decrease curvature: Press front or rear section of switch.

Shift curvature up or down: Press upper or lower section of switch.

BMW X5: rear seats 2nd row seats If the row of seats is divided, each side can be adjusted separately.

Do not adjust the seat while driving Never adjust the 2nd row seats while the

vehicle is moving, as otherwise the passengers on the 3rd row seats could be injured. Make sure that the locking devices of the 2nd row seats engage properly. Otherwise the re straining effect of the safety belts during an ac cident could be reduced.

Longitudinal direction

1. Pull the lever and slide the seat into the de sired position.

2. Release the lever and move the seat slightly forward or back so that it engages properly.

Backrest The backrests can be adjusted in four steps.

Pull the lever and apply weight to or remove weight from the backrest as needed.

Access to 3rd row seats

Pull the lever and fold the seat forward.

The handle recess on the interior trim of the door pillar makes climbing in easier.

Keep the footwell under the 2nd row seats clear

When folding back the 2nd row seats, make sure that the footwell under the 2nd row seats is clear. Otherwise persons in the 3rd row seats could be injured or objects damaged.

Warning lamp for the 2nd row seats: lights up if the 2nd row seats are not locked. A message also appears on

the Control Display.

3rd row seats The 3rd row seats are divided and offer space for two persons.

Seite 51

Adjusting Controls

51 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Folding up backrest Before folding up the backrest, remove the luggage compartment roller cover, refer to page 145, and, if necessary, slide the 2nd row seats slightly forward.

1. Pull the lever, refer to arrow. The backrest is unlocked.

2. Fold up and engage the backrest. Ensure that the lock is securely en gaged

Make sure that the catch engages se curely. If it is not properly engaged, trans ported cargo could enter the passenger compartment during braking or evasive maneuvers and endanger the vehicle occu pants.

3. Push the head restraints into the top posi tion.

Folding backrest down 1. Push the head restraints down, refer to

page 57. 2. Pull the lever, refer to arrows. The back

rests are released.

3. Fold the backrest down.

Seat heating Front

The temperature setting progresses one step through its control sequence each time you press the button. The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit. If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi nutes, the seat heating is activated automati cally with the temperature set last. To switch off: press and hold the button. The temperature is reduced, if need be, down to no heat in order to reduce the load on the battery. The LEDs remain lit.

Rear

Operation similar to front seat heating, without temperature distribution.

Seite 52

Controls Adjusting

52 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Active seat ventilation and seat heating Front

1 Seat heating 2 Active seat ventilation

Press button 1 or 2 once depending on the temperature or ventilation position. The LED in the respective button lights up. The temperature and ventilation levels are dis played in bar form on the Control Display. A display of three bars indicates the highest level of seat heating or seat ventilation. The air flow rate may be reduced or the blower may be switched off entirely to save on battery power. The LEDs remain lit. If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi nutes, the seat heating is activated automati cally with the temperature set last. To switch off: press and hold button 1 or 2.

Temperature distribution without active seat ventilation The heat output can be distributed variously in the seat cushion and the backrest.

1. Press button 1.

2. "Seat heating distribution"

3. Turn the controller to adjust the distribu tion. The setting is applied.

Temperature distribution with active seat ventilation The heat output can be distributed variously in the seat cushion and the backrest.

1. Press button 1. 2. "Seat heating distribution"

3. Turn the controller to adjust the distribu tion. The setting is applied.

Heated rear seats Operation similar to front seat heating, without temperature distribution, refer to page 52.

Seite 53

Adjusting Controls

53 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Active seat

The seat cushion is actively varied by alter nately raising and lowering the right and left half of the seat cushion. This reduces muscu lar tension and fatigue to help prevent lower back pain. Press the button to switch on; the LED lights up. The action of the system is reduced and if need be, switched off in order to reduce the load on the battery. The LED remains lit. When the active seat is switched off, it can take up to 1 minute before the two halves of the seat cushion have returned to their initial position.

Safety belts General information Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by all occupants before driving away. Although airbags enhance safety by providing added protection, they are not a substitute for safety belts.

Number of safety belts Your vehicle has been fitted with safety belts for the safety of you and your passengers. BMW X5: five or seven safety belts. BMW X6: four or five safety belts.

Notes One person per safety belt Never allow more than one person to

wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or small children to ride on a passenger's lap.

Putting on the belt Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly

across the lap and shoulders, as close to the body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies low around the hips in the lap area and does not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt can slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal impact and injure the abdomen. The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rub on sharp edges, be routed over solid or breakable objects, or be pinched.

Reduction of restraining effect Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the

belt from fitting properly, and pull the shoulder belt periodically to readjust the tension across your lap; otherwise, the retention effect of the safety belt may be reduced.

Using the middle safety belt If the middle safety belt in the rear is

used, the larger section of the backrest must be locked. Otherwise, the safety belt will not have a restraining effect.

Buckling the belt

Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle.

Seite 54

Controls Adjusting

54 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Unbuckling the belt 1. Hold the belt firmly. 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. 3. Guide the belt back into its reel. The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be correct for adult seat occupants of every build if the seat is correctly adjusted, refer to page 49. The two rear safety belt buckles integrated into the rear seat are for passengers sitting on the left and right. The belt buckle embossed with the word CENTER is intended exclusively for use by passengers riding in the center posi tion.

Safety belt reminder for the driver's and front passenger seat

The indicator lamp lights up and a signal sounds. In addition, a message appears on the Control Display.

Check whether the safety belt has been fas tened correctly.

The safety belt reminder is active at speeds above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be ac tivated if objects are placed on the front pas senger seat.

Damage to safety belts In the case of strain caused by accidents or damage: Have the safety belts, including the safety belt tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors checked.

Checking and replacing safety belts Have the work performed only by your

service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured that this safety feature will function properly.

Belt-force limiter The effect of the belt-force limiter on the driv er's seat is dependent on the position of the driver's seat.

To maintain the long-term accuracy of this function, the driver's seat must be calibrated if a corresponding message is displayed on the Control Display.

Calibrating driver's seat The warning lamp lights up. A mes sage also appears on the Control Dis play. Please calibrate the driver's

seat.

1. Move the driver's seat forward until it stops.

2. Move the driver's seat forward again. It briefly moves toward the front in the proc ess.

3. Set the desired seating position again. The calibration is completed when the mes sage on the Control Display disappears. Should this message continue to be displayed, repeat the calibration. If the message does not disappear even after repeated calibration, have the system checked as soon as possible.

Do not carry out calibration while the ve hicle is moving

Never carry out calibration while the vehicle is moving, as this can cause accidents. Make sure that no persons or objects become wedged during the calibration process, as this can cause injuries or damage.

Head restraints Correctly adjusted head restraints A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.

Adjusting the head restraint Correctly adjust the head restraints of all

occupied seats; otherwise, there is an in creased risk of injury in an accident.

Seite 55

Adjusting Controls

55 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

BMW X5: push the head restraints of the 3rd row seats into the top position.

Height Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approx. at ear level.

Distance Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head.

Active front head restraints In the event of a rear-end collision of sufficient severity, the active head restraint reduces the distance to the head.

Reduced protective function Do not use seat or head restraint

covers. Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,

directly on the head restraints. Only attach accessories approved by BMW

to the seat or head restraint. Otherwise, the protective function of the active head restraint will be impaired and the per sonal safety of the occupants will be endan gered. Have the active head restraints reset after they are triggered in a rear-end collision. Have this work performed by the service center only; otherwise, this safety feature with not be op erational.

Please contact the service center if the front head restraints need to be removed or instal led.

Front seats: adjusting the height Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approx. at ear level.

Electrical

Adjusting electrically.

Front seats: adjusting the distance from the back of the head

Press the button and pull the headrest cushion forward or push it back.

Compromised performance Do not place any objects behind the

headrest cushion. Otherwise, you can impair the proper function of the head restraint.

Comfort seat The distance from the back of the seat occu pant's head can be adjusted using the shoulder support, refer to page 50.

Seite 56

Controls Adjusting

56 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Adjusting side extensions

You can fold the side extensions on the head restraint forward for increased lateral support in the resting position.

BMW X5: rear seats and 3rd row seats Adjusting the height

To raise: pull. To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and

push the head restraint down.

In vehicles equipped with 3rd row seats, the height of the middle head restraint is not ad justable.

Removing 1. Pull the head restraint upward to the stop. 2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the

head restraint out completely.

BMW X6: rear seats The head restraints in the rear cannot be ad justed and cannot be removed.

Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory General information Two different driver's seat and front passenger seat positions, exterior mirror positions and steering wheel positions can be stored and re trieved. The adjustment of the backrest width and the lumbar support is not stored in the memory.

Storing

1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni tion, refer to page 67.

2. Set the desired seat, exterior mirror and steering wheel positions.

3. Press the button. The LED in the button lights up.

4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2. The LED goes out.

If the M button is pressed accidentally:

Press the button again. The LED goes out.

Calling up settings Do not retrieve the memory setting while driving

Do not retrieve the memory setting while driv ing, as an unexpected seat movement could result in an accident.

Seite 57

Adjusting Controls

57 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Comfort function 1. Open the driver's door after unlocking or

switch on the radio ready state, refer to page 67.

2. Briefly press the desired memory but ton 1 or 2.

The seat is automatically moved to the stored position. The procedure stops when a switch for setting the seat or one of the memory buttons is pressed.

Safety mode 1. Close the driver's door and switch the igni

tion on or off, refer to page 67. 2. Press and hold the desired memory button

1 or 2 until the setting procedure is com pleted.

Mirrors Exterior mirrors

General information The mirror on the passenger side is more curved than the driver's mirror.

Estimating distances correctly Objects reflected in the mirror are closer

than they appear. Do not estimate the distance to the traffic behind you based on what you see in the mirror, as this will increase your risk of an accident.

At a glance

1 Adjusting 2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor 3 Fold in and out

Selecting a mirror

To change over to the other mirror: Slide the mirror changeover switch.

Adjusting electrically The setting corresponds to the direc tion in which the button is pressed.

Saving positions Seat and mirror memory, refer to page 57.

Adjusting manually If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example, press the edges of the mirror glass.

Automatic Curb Monitor When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas senger side. This improves your view of the curb and other low-lying obstacles when park ing, for example.

Activating

1. Slide the mirror changeover switch to the driver's side mirror position.

Seite 58

Controls Adjusting

58 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

2. Shift into reverse or engage transmission position R.

Deactivating Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas senger's side mirror position.

Fold in and out Press button 3. Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h. For example, this is advantageous In car washes. In narrow streets. For folding back mirrors that were folded

away manually. Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.

Fold in the mirror in a car wash Before entering an automatic car wash,

fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the button; otherwise, they could be damaged, de pending on the width of the vehicle.

Automatic heating Depending on the external temperature, both exterior mirrors are automatically heated when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.

Interior rearview mirror

Reducing the blinding effect

From behind when driving at night: turn the knob.

Interior and exterior mirrors, automatic dimming feature

Two photocells are used for control: In the mirror glass, see arrow. On the back of the mirror.

For proper operation: Keep the photocells clean. Do not cover the area between the inside

rearview mirror and the windshield.

Seite 59

Adjusting Controls

59 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Steering wheel General information

Do not adjust while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement could result in an accident.

Adjusting

Mechanical

1. Fold the lever down. 2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred

height and angle to suit your seating posi tion.

3. Fold the lever back. Do not use force to swing the lever back. Do not use force to swing the lever back

up; otherwise, the mechanism will be dam aged.

Electric

The steering wheel can be adjusted in four di rections.

Storing steering wheel positions, refer to Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer to page 57.

Easy entry/exit To facilitate entry and exit, the steering wheel temporarily moves into the uppermost posi tion.

Steering wheel heating

Switching on/off

Press the button.

On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out.

Seite 60

Controls Adjusting

60 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Transporting children safely Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

The right place for children Note

Children in the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the

vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the doors.

Children should always be in the rear Accident research shows that the safest place for children is on the rear seat.

Transporting children in the rear Transport children younger than

13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm on the 2nd row seats only, using child restraint fix ing systems suitable for the age, weight, and height of the child. Otherwise, there is the in creased danger of injury in an accident. Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint fixing system can no longer be used, due to their age, weight and size.

Children on the front passenger seat Should it be necessary to use a child restraint fixing system on the front passenger seat, make sure that the front and side airbags on

the front passenger side are deactivated. Auto matic deactivation of front passenger airbags, refer to page 96.

Deactivating the front passenger airbags If a child restraint fixing system is used in

the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury to the child when the airbags are triggered, even with a child re straint fixing system.

Installing child restraint fixing systems Notes

Manufacturer's information for child re straint fixing systems

To select, mount and use child restraint fixing systems, observe the information provided by the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro tective effect can be impaired.

Note the following in vehicles equipped with 3rd row seats

BMW X5: in vehicles with 3rd row seats, make sure that the seat of the 2nd row seats on which the child restraint fixing system is mounted is properly locked. Otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury for the child in an accident. Do not mount child restraint fixing systems on the 3rd row seats, as otherwise the protection provided by these child restraint fixing systems may be reduced.

BMW X5: before mounting a child restraint fix ing system in the center seat of the 2nd row seats, move the outer seat cushions and back rests into the rearmost positions.

Seite 61

Transporting children safely Controls

61 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

On the front passenger seat After installing a child restraint fixing system on the front passenger seat, ensure that the front and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated.

Deactivating the front passenger airbags If a child restraint fixing system is used in

the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury to the child when the airbags are triggered, even with a child re straint fixing system.

Seat position and height Before installing a child restraint fixing system, move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and adjust its height to the highest position to obtain the best possible position for the belt and to offer optimal protection in the event of an accident. Do not change the seat position and height af ter this.

Backrest width Before mounting a child restraint fixing system on the front passenger seat, open the backrest width, refer to page 50, completely. Do not change the backrest width after this.

Backrest width for the child seat Before installing a child restraint fixing

system in the front passenger seat, the back rest width must be opened completely. Do not change the adjustment after this; otherwise, the stability of the child seat will be reduced.

Child seat security

The rear safety belts BMW X5: all safety belts of the 2nd and 3rd

row seats BMW X6: all safety belts of the 2nd row

seats And the safety belt for the front passenger can be locked to prevent extension in order to per mit attachment of child restraint fixing sys tems.

Locking the safety belt 1. Pull out the belt webbing completely. 2. Secure the child restraint fixing system

with the belt. 3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and

pull it taut against the child restraint fixing system. The safety belt is locked.

Unlocking the safety belt 1. Open the belt buckle. 2. Remove the child restraint fixing system. 3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com

pletely.

LATCH child restraint fixing system LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil dren.

Seite 62

Controls Transporting children safely

62 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Note Manufacturer's information for LATCH child restraint fixing systems

To mount and use the LATCH child restraint fixing systems, observe the operating and safety information from the system manufac turer; otherwise, the level of protection may be reduced.

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors The lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child is restrained by the internal harnesses.

Correctly engage the lower LATCH an chors

Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have properly engaged and that the child restraint fixing system is resting snugly against the backrest; otherwise, the degree of protection offered may be reduced.

The mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are located at the points indicated by the arrows.

Mounting LATCH child restraint fixing systems 1. Mount the child restraint fixing system; re

fer to the operating instructions of the sys tem.

2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop erly connected.

Child restraint fixing system with a tether strap

Mounting points LATCH mounting eyes Only use the mounting eyes for the up

per LATCH retaining strap to secure child re straint fixing systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes could be damaged.

BMW X5

There are additional mounting points for child restraint fixing systems with a tether strap on the 2nd row seats, refer to arrows. Fold out be fore using the center mounting point.

BMW X6

For child restraint fixing systems with tether strap, there are additional mounting points on the back of the rear seat backrests, see arrows.

Seite 63

Transporting children safely Controls

63 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Retaining strap guide Retaining strap Make sure the upper retaining strap does

not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the strap will not properly secure the child restraint fixing system in the event of an accident.

BMW X5

1 Direction of travel 2 Head restraint 3 Hook for upper retaining strap 4 Mounting point 5 Backrest 6 Upper retaining strap of child restraint fix

ing system

When using the cargo cover, pass the upper retaining strap between the backrest of the 2nd row seats and the cargo cover.

BMW X6: outer rear seats

1 Direction of travel 2 Head restraint 3 Hook for upper retaining strap 4 Mounting point 5 Backrest 6 Upper retaining strap of child restraint fix

ing system

When using the cargo cover, pass the upper retaining strap between the rear seat backrest and the cargo cover.

Seite 64

Controls Transporting children safely

64 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

BMW X6: center rear seat

1 Direction of travel 2 Head restraint 3 Strap guide 4 Hook for upper retaining strap 5 Mounting point 6 Backrest 7 Upper retaining strap of child restraint fix

ing system

When using the cargo cover, pass the upper retaining strap between the rear seat backrest and the cargo cover.

Attaching the retaining strap to the backrest of the 2nd row seats

BMW X5 On outer seats:

1. Slide the head restraint upward. 2. Guide the upper retaining strap between

the supports of the head restraint. 3. Attach the upper retaining strap to the

mounting point with the hook. 4. Slide the head restraint into the bottom po

sition. 5. Pull the upper retaining strap taut. On the center seat when equipped with two rows of seats:

1. Fold the center armrest somewhat toward the front.

2. Guide the tether strap through the opening in the center armrest.

3. Fold back and engage the center armrest. 4. Hook in tether strap on mounting point. 5. Pull tether strap taut.

Seite 65

Transporting children safely Controls

65 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

On the center seat when equipped with three rows of seats:

1. Slide the head restraint upward. 2. Guide the tether strap between the head

restraint brackets. 3. Hook in the tether strap on the mounting

point with the hook. 4. Slide the head restraint into the bottom po

sition. 5. Pull tether strap taut.

BMW X6 1. Route the upper retaining strap over the

middle of the head restraint. 2. Attach the upper retaining strap to the

mounting point with the hook. 3. Pull the retaining strap taut until it com

presses the cushion of the head restraint, thus preventing the strap from sliding off.

Locking the doors and windows Rear doors

Push the locking lever on the rear doors down. The door can now be opened from the outside only.

Safety switch for the rear Press the button on the driver's door if children are being transported in the

rear.

This locks the rear window switches so that the windows cannot be operated from the rear: safety switch, refer to page 44.

Seite 66

Controls Transporting children safely

66 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Driving Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Ignition lock Insert the remote control into the ignition lock

Insert the remote control all the way into the ignition lock. Radio ready state is switched on. Individual electrical consumers can operate.

Comfort Access If the car is equipped with Comfort Access, only insert the remote control into the ignition lock, refer to page 40, under special circum stances.

Removing the remote control from the ignition lock

Do not forcibly pull the remote control out of the ignition lock

Do not forcibly pull the remote control out of the ignition lock as this may cause damage.

Before removing the remote control, push it all the way in to release the locking mechanism. The ignition is switched off if it was on.

Start/Stop button

Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ignition on or off and starts the engine.

The engine starts if the brake pedal is pressed when you press the Start/Stop button.

Radio ready state Individual electrical consumers can operate. The time and the external temperature are dis played in the instrument cluster. Radio ready state is switched off automatically: When the remote control is removed from

the ignition lock. In cars with Comfort Access, refer to

page 40, by touching the surface above the door lock.

Seite 67

Driving Controls

67 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Ignition on All electrical consumers can operate. The od ometer and trip odometer are displayed in the instrument cluster. To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers.

Radio ready state and ignition off All indicator and warning lamps as well as dis plays in the instrument cluster go out.

Transmission position P with the ignition off

When the ignition is switched off, position P is engaged automatically. When in an automatic car wash, for example, ensure that the ignition is not switched off accidentally.

For example, the ignition is not switched off in the following situations: The brake is applied. The low beams are switched on

Starting the engine General information

Enclosed areas Do not let the engine run in enclosed

areas; otherwise, breathing of exhaust fumes may lead to loss of consciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.

Unattended vehicle Do not leave the car unattended with the

engine running; otherwise, it presents a poten tial source of danger. Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run ning, set the parking brake and engage trans mission position P; otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.

Frequent starting in quick succession Avoid repeated futile attempts at starting

the car and avoid starting the car frequently in quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned, and there is the danger of overheating and damaging the catalytic converter.

Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds.

Starting the engine

Remote control in the ignition lock or, with Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to page 40.

1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter operates automatically for a certain time, and stops automatically as soon as the engine has started.

Diesel engine If the engine is cold and temperatures are be low approx. 32 /0 , the start process may be delayed somewhat due to automatic pre heating. A message is displayed.

Seite 68

Controls Driving

68 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Engine stop General information

Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam ple, cannot operate the windows and injure themselves.

Set the parking brake and further secure the vehicle as required

Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward and downward inclines, further secure the ve hicle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in the direction of the curb.

Before driving into a car wash To make it possible for the vehicle to roll in an automatic car wash, follow the information on Washing in automatic car washes, refer to page 312.

Switching off the engine

Procedure 1. Engage transmission position P with the

vehicle stopped. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. 3. Set the parking brake. 4. Remove the remote control from the igni

tion lock, refer to page 67.

Parking brake The concept The parking brake is primarily intended to pre vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it brakes the rear wheels. The parking brake can be set manually or auto matically: Manual: by pulling and pushing the switch.

Automatic: by activating Automatic Hold.

Setting manually

Pull the button. The parking brake is set.

The indicator lamp lights up in red. The parking brake is set.

Indicator lamp in Canadian models.

To set the parking brake, the remote control does not need to be in the ignition lock.

Set the parking brake and further secure the vehicle as required

Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward and downward inclines, further secure the ve hicle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in the direction of the curb.

While driving Use while driving: Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes hard while the button is being pulled.

The indicator lamp lights up in red, a signal sounds and the brake lamps light up.

Indicator lamp in Canadian models.

If the vehicle is braked to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/h, the parking brake remains set.

Seite 69

Driving Controls

69 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Releasing manually

Press the button with the brake depressed.

The LED and indicator lamp go out.

Indicator lamp in Canadian models.

Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam ple, cannot release the parking brake.

Automatic Hold

The concept This system assists the driver by automatically setting and releasing the brake, such as when moving in stop-and-go traffic. The vehicle is automatically held in place when it is stationary. On inclines, the system prevents the vehicle from rolling backward when driving away.

For your safety Automatic Hold is deactivated automatically and the parking brake is set when: The engine is switched off. A door is opened and the driver's safety

belt is unbuckled. The vehicle is braked to a standstill with

the parking brake while driving.

The indicator lamp switches from green to red and the letters AUTO H go out.

Indicator lamp in Canadian models.

Before driving away: Release the parking brake manually. Reactivate Automatic Hold.

Leaving the vehicle with the engine run ning

Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run ning, engage position P of the automatic trans mission and ensure that the parking brake is set. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.

Activating

Press the button. The LED in the button lights up and the indication AUTO H appears in the instrument panel. Automatic Hold is activated.

If the vehicle is being held by Auto matic Hold, the indicator light in the in strument panel also lights up in green.

Indicator lamp in Canadian models.

Deactivating Press the button again, the LED in the button and the indication AUTO H in the instrument panel go out.

Seite 70

Controls Driving

70 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Automatic Hold is deactivated. If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold, then press on the brake pedal to deactivate it. When the parking brake is set manually, refer to page 69, Automatic Hold is deactivated au tomatically.

Driving Automatic Hold is activated: the vehicle is au tomatically secured against rolling when it stops.

The indicator lamp lights up in green.

Indicator lamp in Canadian models.

Step on the accelerator pedal to drive off. The brake is released automatically. The indicator lamp goes out.

Before driving into a car wash Deactivate Automatic Hold; otherwise,

the parking brake will be set when the vehicle is stationary and the vehicle will no longer be able to roll.

Parking The parking brake is automatically set if the engine is switched off while the vehicle is be ing held by Automatic Hold.

The indicator lamp changes from green to red.

Indicator lamp in Canadian models.

The parking brake is not set if the engine is switched off while the vehicle is coasting to a halt. Automatic Hold is deactivated.

Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam ple, cannot release the parking brake.

Malfunction In the event of a failure or malfunction of the parking brake, secure the vehicle against roll ing using a wheel chock, for example, when leaving it.

Releasing the parking brake manually In the event of an electrical power loss or elec trical malfunction, you can release the parking brake manually.

Secure the vehicle against rolling Before releasing the parking brake man

ually, and whenever you park the vehicle with the parking brake released, ensure that posi tion P of the automatic transmission is en gaged. Note the display in the instrument clus ter. In addition, secure the vehicle against rolling, e.g. with a wheel chock. Otherwise there is a danger that the vehicle could roll if parked on a steep slope.

Jump-starting and towing, refer to page 309.

Unlocking 1. Open the left-hand side panel in the cargo

area. 2. Remove the first aid kit and the warning tri

angle. Close the bracket of the warning tri angle.

3. Insert the screwdriver, which is contained in the onboard vehicle tool kit under the

Seite 71

Driving Controls

71 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

cargo floor panel, refer to page 295, into the loop of the release point, see arrow.

4. Forcefully pull the screwdriver up against the mechanical resistance until there is a marked increase in resistance and the parking brake can be heard to unlock.

5. Stow the screwdriver, warning triangle, and first aid kit and close the left side panel in the cargo area.

Have the malfunction corrected Have the malfunction corrected at the

nearest service center or at a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If the parking brake has been released manually in response to a malfunction, only technicians can return it to operation.

Following manual release, the actual status of the parking brake may deviate from that dis played by the indicator lamp.

Putting into operation after a power failure

Putting the parking brake into operation The parking brake should only be put

into operation again if it was manually released due to an interruption in the supply of electrical power. Otherwise the operation of the parking brake is not ensured and there is a danger of the vehicle rolling despite the parking brake being set.

Procedure 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Press the button with the brake depressed.

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out as soon as the parking brake is ready for operation.

Indicator lamp in Canadian models.

Any noises which occur are normal. Startup may take several seconds.

Turn signal, high beams, headlamp flasher At a glance

1 High beams 2 Headlamp flasher 3 Turn signal

Turn signal Press the lever beyond the resistance point. To switch off manually, press the lever to the resistance point. Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.

Signaling a turn briefly Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.

Seite 72

Controls Driving

72 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Triple turn signal activation Press the lever to the resistance point. The turn signal flashes three times. This function can be activated or deactivated:

1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Triple turn signal"

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Washer/wiper system Notes

Do not switch on the wipers if frozen Do not switch on the wipers if they are

frozen onto the windshield; otherwise, the wiper blades and the windshield wiper motor may be damaged.

Do not use the wipers on a dry wind shield

Do not use the wipers on a dry windshield; oth erwise, the wiper blades may wear more rap idly or become damaged.

At a glance

1 Switching on wipers 2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe 3 Activating/deactivating the rain sensor 4 Cleaning the windshield and headlamps 5 Setting the sensitivity of the rain sensor

Switching on wipers Press the wiper lever upward, arrow 1. The lever automatically returns to its initial po sition when released.

Normal wiper speed Press up once. The system switches to operation in the inter mittent mode when the vehicle is stationary.

Fast wiper speed Press up twice or press once beyond the re sistance point. The system switches to normal speed when the vehicle is stationary.

Switching off wipers or brief wipe Press the wiper lever down, arrow 2. The lever automatically returns to its initial po sition when released. Brief wipe: press down once. To switch off normal wipe: press down

once. To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.

Seite 73

Driving Controls

73 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Rain sensor If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the time between wipes is controlled automatically and depends on the intensity of the rainfall. The rain sensor is mounted on the windshield, directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.

Activating the rain sensor

Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the steering wheel stalk lights up and a wiping cycle is started. At temperatures below 32 /0 , a wiping cy cle is not started before driving away. Release frozen wipers before driving away.

Rain sensor sensitivity Turn thumbwheel 5 up or down.

Deactivating the rain sensor Press the button again, arrow 3. The LED goes out.

Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes Deactivate the rain sensor when passing

through an automatic car wash; otherwise, damage could be caused by undesired wiper activation.

Cleaning the windshield and headlamps Pull the lever, arrow 4. The system sprays washer fluid on the wind shield and activates the wipers briefly.

When the vehicle lighting system is switched on, the headlamps are cleaned at regular and appropriate intervals.

Do not use the washer system at freezing temperatures

Do not use the washers if there is any danger that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this reason, use antifreeze. Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is empty; otherwise, you could damage the pump.

Windshield washer nozzles The windshield washer nozzles are heated au tomatically while the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.

BMW X5: rear window wiper

1 Intermittent wipe When reverse gear is engaged, the system switches to continuous operation.

2 Cleaning the rear window

Do not use the washing mechanisms when the washer fluid reservoir is empty

Do not use washing mechanisms when the washer fluid reservoir is empty, otherwise you will damage the washer pump.

Seite 74

Controls Driving

74 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Washer fluid General information

Antifreeze for washer fluid Antifreeze is flammable and can cause

injuries if used improperly. Therefore, keep it away from sources of igni tion. Only keep it in the closed original container and inaccessible to children. Follow the notes and instructions on the con tainer. United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid con tainer. Use BMW's Windshield Washer Con centrate or the equivalent.

Washer fluid reservoir Adding washer fluid Only add washer fluid when the engine is

cool, and then close the cover completely to avoid contact between the washer fluid and hot engine parts. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.

All washer nozzles are supplied from one res ervoir. Fill with a mixture of window washing concen trate and tap water; if needed, add antifreeze according to the manufacturer instructions.

Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain the correct mixing ratio. Do not fill in undiluted window washing con centrate and antifreeze and do not fill in pure water; this could damage the washer system. Do not mix window washing concentrate from different manufacturers; this could cause the washer nozzles to clog.

Capacity Approx. 6.3 US quarts/6 liters.

Automatic transmission with Steptronic Transmission positions

D Drive, automatic position Position for normal vehicle operation. All for ward gears are available. Under normal operating conditions, fuel con sumption is lowest when you are driving in po sition D.

Kickdown Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance. Press on the accelerator beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position.

R is Reverse Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

N is Neutral The vehicle can roll. N remains engaged after the engine is switched off if the remote control remains in the ignition lock. This function can be used in an automatic car wash, refer to page 312, for example. P is automatically engaged after ap prox. 30 minutes.

Seite 75

Driving Controls

75 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

P Park The drive wheels are blocked. P is engaged automatically when the following conditions are met: The driver's door is opened while the en

gine is running, the safety belt is not fas tened and neither the brake pedal nor the accelerator is activated.

The engine is switched off unless N is en gaged and the remote control is in the igni tion lock.

The remote control is removed from the ig nition lock.

Before leaving the vehicle, ensure that the transmission position P is engaged; otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.

Engaging transmission position Transmission position P can only be disen

gaged if the engine is running and the brake pedal is pressed.

With the vehicle stationary, press on the brake pedal before shifting out of P or N; otherwise, the shift command will not be executed: shift lock.

Press on the brake pedal until you start driving

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a driving position, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.

Engaging transmission positions D, R, N

Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di rection, beyond a resistance point if necessary. When shifting out of P or into R, simultane ously push the unlock button 1. The engaged transmission position is dis played on the selector lever. After releasing the selector lever, it returns to its center position.

Engaging transmission position P Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

Press button P.

Seite 76

Controls Driving

76 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Sport program and manual mode M/S

Activating the Sport program

Push the selector lever to the left out of trans mission position D.

The Sport program is activated and DS or the engaged gear is displayed in the instrument cluster, for example S4. This position is recommended for a perform ance-oriented driving style.

Activating manual mode Push the selector lever to the left out of trans mission position D. Push the selector lever forward or backward. Manual mode becomes active and the gear is changed. The engaged gear is displayed in the instru ment cluster, e.g., M1. To shift down: press the selector lever for

ward. To shift up: press the selector lever back

ward. The transmission only shifts up or down if the rpm and vehicle speed are appropriate. If the engine speed is too high, the transmission does not shift down. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in strument panel, followed by the current gear.

Ending the Sport program/manual mode Push the selector lever to the right.

D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Shifting gears using the shift paddles on the steering wheel The shifting paddles make it possible to quickly change gears since both hands can re main on the steering wheel. If the shift paddles on the steering wheel

are used to shift gears while in automatic mode D, the transmission temporarily switches to manual mode.

If the shift paddles are not used to acceler ate or shift gears for a certain amount of time, the transmission switches back to automatic mode D.

With the transmission position M/S selected, the manual mode remains active.

Shift up: pull right shift paddle. Shift down: pull left shift paddle. The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropri ate engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not shift down if the engine speed is too high. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in strument cluster, followed by the current gear.

Seite 77

Driving Controls

77 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Displays in the instrument cluster

The transmission position is displayed and the engaged gear, such as M4, is displayed in manual mode.

Seite 78

Controls Driving

78 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Displays Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Odometer, external temperature display, clock

1 Knob in the instrument cluster 2 Time, external temperature, and date 3 Odometer and trip odometer

Knob in the instrument cluster Press the knob. When the ignition is switched on, the trip

odometer is reset. Press the knob for approx. 5 seconds: View service requirement display, refer to page 83

When the ignition is switched off, the time, external temperature and odometer are displayed.

Units of measure To set the respective units of measure, miles or km for the odometer and or for the ex ternal temperature, refer to page 88. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Time, date, external temperature From radio readiness the external temperature and the time are displayed. Set the time, refer to page 87.

Retrieving date

Press the button on turn signal lever upward; the date appears.

Set the date, refer to page 87. Pressing the button upward or downward sev eral times changes the display between clock, external temperature, date, and Check Control messages, refer to page 85.

External temperature warning If the display drops to +37 /+3 , a signal sounds and a warning lamp lights up. There is the increased danger of ice.

Ice on roads Even at temperatures above

+37 /+3 , there can be a risk of ice on roads.

Seite 79

Displays Controls

79 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shady roads, for example, to avoid the increased dan ger of an accident.

Odometer and trip odometer Resetting trip odometer: With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in the instrument cluster.

When the vehicle is parked If you still want to view the time, external tem perature and odometer reading briefly after the remote control has been taken out of the igni tion lock: Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.

Tachometer

Never force the engine speed up into the red warning field, see arrow. In this range, the fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine.

Coolant temperature A warning lamp will come on if the coolant, and therefore the engine, becomes too hot. In addi tion, a message will appear on the Control Dis play. Check the coolant level, refer to page 292.

Current fuel consumption

Displays the current fuel consumption. You can check whether you are currently driving in an efficient and environmentally-friendly man ner.

Engine oil temperature

Cold engine: the pointer is at the low tem perature end. Drive at moderate engine and vehicle speeds.

Normal operating temperature: the pointer is in the middle or in the right half of the temperature display.

Seite 80

Controls Displays

80 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Hot engine: the pointer is at the high tem perature end. Switch off the engine imme diately and allow it to cool down.

If the engine oil temperature is too high, a mes sage appears on the Control Display. Check the oil level, refer to page 290.

Fuel gauge

The vehicle inclination may cause the display to vary.

Notes on refueling, refer to page 268.

Range After the reserve range is reached: A message is briefly displayed on the Con

trol Display. The remaining range is shown on the com

puter. When a dynamic driving style is used, such

as when corners are taken rapidly, engine functions are not ensured.

The message appears continuously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.

Refuel promptly At the latest, refuel at a range below

30 miles/50 km; otherwise, the engine function is not ensured and damage may occur.

Computer Displaying information on the instrument panel

Press the computer button on the turn signal lever.

Information is displayed in the instrument clus ter.

Overview of the information Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn signal lever displays the information on the in strument cluster in the following order: Range. Average speed. Average fuel consumption. To set the corresponding units of measure, re fer to page 88.

Information in detail

Range Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel. It is calculated based on your driving style over the last 18 miles/30 km.

Average speed Periods in which the vehicle was parked and the engine was switched off manually are not included in the average speed calculations.

Seite 81

Displays Controls

81 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

With the trip computer, refer to page 82, you can have the average speed displayed for an additional distance. To reset the average speed: press the button on the turn indicator lever for approx. 2 sec onds.

Average fuel consumption This is calculated for the period during which the engine is running. The average consumption is computed based on the distance traveled since the last time the computer was reset. You can have the average consumption for an other trip displayed, refer to Displays on the Control Display below. To reset the average consumption: press the button on the turn indicator lever for ap prox. 2 seconds.

Displays on the Control Display Display the computer or trip computer on the Control Display.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Displays on the "Onboard info":

Range. Distance to destination. Estimated time of arrival if a destination

was entered in the navigation system, refer to page 170.

Displays on the "Trip computer":

Departure time. Trip duration. Trip distance. Both displays show: Average fuel consumption and Average speed.

Resetting the fuel consumption and speed Resetting the values for average speed and average fuel consumption:

1. Select the respective menu item and press the controller.

2. Press the controller again to confirm your selection.

Seite 82

Controls Displays

82 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Resetting the trip computer Resetting all values:

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Trip computer" 3. "Reset"

Service requirements

The remaining driving distance and the date of the next scheduled service are displayed briefly immediately after you start the engine or switch on the ignition.

The current service requirements can be read out from the remote control by the service specialist. For certain maintenance operations, you can view the distance remaining or the due date for that operation in the instrument cluster.

1. With the ignition switched on, press the knob in the instrument cluster, refer to page 79, for approx. 5 seconds until the service requirements are displayed.

2. Press the knob repeatedly to display the individual service requirement items.

Displays

Symbol Function

Service requirements

Engine oil

Roadworthiness test

Front brake pads

Rear brake pads

Brake fluid

The sequence of displayed service items may vary. First the data for the next maintenance are displayed.

Seite 83

Displays Controls

83 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Detailed information on service requirements More information on the scope of service re quired can be displayed on the Control Dis play.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Service required" Required maintenance procedures and legally mandated inspections are displayed. Additional information can be displayed on each entry: Select the entry and press the controller. To exit from the menu: Move the controller to the left.

Symbols

Symbols Description

No service is currently re quired.

The deadline for service or a legally mandated inspection is approaching.

The service deadline has al ready passed.

Entering dates Enter the dates for the required inspections.

Make sure the date on the Control Display is set correctly, refer to page 87.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Service required" 4. " Vehicle inspection"

5. Open the menu for entering the deadline. 6. "Date:" 7. Create the settings. 8. Press the controller to apply the setting.

The year is highlighted. 9. Turn the controller to make the adjust

ment. 10. Press the controller to apply the setting.

The date entry is stored. To exit from the menu: Move the controller to the left.

Automatic Service Request Data regarding the maintenance status or le gally mandated inspections of the vehicle are automatically transmitted to your service cen ter before a service due date. You can check when your service center was notified.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Last Service Request"

Seite 84

Controls Displays

84 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Check Control The concept The Check Control monitors vehicle functions and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys tems monitored. A Check Control message consists of indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster and, in some circumstances, an acoustic signal and text messages at the top of the Control Display.

Indicator/warning lamps

The indicator and warning lamps can light up in a variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lamps are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

The symbol indicates that Check Control messages have been stored. The Check Con trol messages can be displayed later.

Text messages Text messages at the upper edge of the Con trol Display in combination with a symbol in the

instrument cluster explain a Check Control message and the meaning of the indicator and warning lamps.

Supplementary text messages Addition information, such as on the cause of a fault or the required action, can be called up via Check Control. In urgent cases, this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.

Symbols The following functions can be selected within the supplementary text message, depending on the Check Control message. "Service request"

Contact the service partner. "Roadside Assistance"

Contact Roadside Assistance.

Hiding Check Control messages

Press the button in the turn signal lever up or down.

Some Check Control messages are dis played continuously and are not cleared until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes sages are displayed consecutively. These messages can be hidden for approx. 8 seconds. After this time, they are dis played again automatically.

Other Check Control messages are hidden automatically after approx. 20 seconds.

Seite 85

Displays Controls

85 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

They are stored and can be displayed again later.

Viewing stored Check Control messages

1. Press the button on the turn signal lever downward. "CHECK OK" or the stored Check Control messages appear on the display. CHECK OK is shown if no messages are present. Check Control messages are accompanied by text messages on the Control Display.

2. Press the button to display additional mes sages, the time and external temperature, or the date.

Displaying stored Check Control messages 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Check Control" 4. Select the text message.

Messages after trip completion Special messages that were displayed during a trip are displayed again after the ignition is switched off.

Speed limit Entry of a speed limit which, when reached, should cause a Check Control message to be issued.

Renewed warning if the vehicle speed drops below the set speed limit once by at least 3 mph/5 km/h.

Displaying, setting or changing the limit 1. "Settings" 2. "Speed" 3. "Warning at:"

4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is displayed.

5. Press the controller. The speed limit is stored.

Applying your current speed as the limit 1. "Settings" 2. "Speed" 3. "Select current speed" The system adopts your current speed as the limit.

Activating/deactivating the limit 1. "Settings" 2. "Speed" 3. "Warning"

Seite 86

Controls Displays

86 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Settings on the Control Display Time The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Setting the time zone 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date"

3. "Time zone:" 4. Select the desired time zone. The time zone is stored.

Setting the time 1. "Settings"

2. "Time/Date"

3. "Time:"

4. Turn the controller until the desired hours are displayed.

5. Press the controller. 6. Turn the controller until the desired mi

nutes are displayed. 7. Press the controller. The time is stored.

Setting the time format 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Format:" 4. Select the desired format. The time format is stored.

Date The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Setting the date 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Date:" 4. Turn the controller until the desired day is

displayed. 5. Press the controller. 6. Make the necessary settings for the month

and year. The date is stored.

Seite 87

Displays Controls

87 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Setting the date format 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Format:" 4. Select the desired format.

The date format is stored.

Language

Setting the language To set the language on the Control Display:

1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units" 3. "Language:"

4. Select the desired language. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Setting the voice dialog Voice dialog for the voice activation system, refer to page 26.

Units of measure

Setting the units of measure To set the units for fuel consumption, route/ distance, temperature, and pressure:

1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units"

3. Select the desired menu item. 4. Select the desired unit. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Brightness

Setting the brightness To set the brightness of the Control Display:

1. "Settings" 2. "Control display" 3. "Brightness"

4. Turn the controller until the desired bright ness is set.

5. Press the controller.

Seite 88

Controls Displays

88 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. Depending on the light conditions, the bright ness control may not be clearly visible.

Seite 89

Displays Controls

89 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Lamps Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

At a glance

0 Lamps off and daytime running lights 1 Parking lamps and daytime running lights 2 Low-beam headlamps and welcome lamps 3 Automatic headlamp control, daytime run

ning lights, welcome lamps, adaptive light control, and High-beam Assistant

Parking lamps/low beams, headlamp control General information If the driver's door is opened while the ignition is switched off, the exterior lighting is switched off automatically in the following switch set tings: 0, ,

Parking lamps Switch position : the vehicle lamps light up on all sides, e.g., for parking. Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe riods; otherwise, the battery may become dis charged and it would then be impossible to start the engine. When parking, it is preferable to switch on the one-sided roadside parking lamps, refer to page 92.

Low beams Switch position with the ignition switched on: the low beams light up.

Welcome lamps When parking the vehicle, leave the switch in position or : the parking and interior lamps light up briefly when the vehicle is un locked.

Activating/deactivating the welcome lamps 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Welcome light"

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Seite 90

Controls Lamps

90 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Headlamp courtesy delay feature The low beams stay lit for a short while after the ignition is switched off, if the lamps are switched off and the headlamp flasher is switched on.

Setting the duration 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Pathway light.: s"

4. Set the duration. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Automatic headlamp control Switch position : the low beams are switched on and off automatically, e.g., in tun nels, in twilight or if there is precipitation. The LED next to the symbol lights up. A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on. The low beams remain switched on independ ent of the ambient lighting conditions when you switch on the front fog lamps.

Personal responsibility The automatic headlamp control cannot

serve as a substitute for your personal judg ment in determining when the lamps should be switched on in response to ambient lighting conditions.

For example, the sensors are unable to detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you should always switch on the lamps manually under these conditions.

Daytime running lights The daytime running lights light up in posi tion 0, and . After the ignition is switched off, the parking lamps light up in po sition .

Activating/deactivating 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Daytime running lamps"

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Adaptive Light Control The concept Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp control system that enables dynamic illumina tion of the road surface. Depending on the steering angle and other pa rameters, the light from the headlamp follows the course of the road. In sharp curves, e.g. serpentines, or during turning, up to a certain speed one of the two front fog lamps is switched on as a turning lamp. This provides improved illumination of the area inside the curve.

Seite 91

Lamps Controls

91 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Controls

Activating Switch position with the ignition switched on. The turning lamps are automatically switched on depending on the steering angle or the use of turn signals. To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill. When driving in reverse, both turning lamps are active.

Malfunction A message is displayed. Adaptive Light Control is malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

High beams/roadside parking lamps

1 High beams 2 Headlamp flasher 3 Roadside parking lamps

Left and right roadside parking lamps The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.

Switching on After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or down beyond the resistance point for ap prox. 2 seconds, arrow 3. The roadside parking lamps drain the battery. Therefore, do not leave them on for unduly long periods of time; otherwise, the battery might not have enough power to start the en gine.

Switching off Briefly press the lever in the opposite direction to the pressure point, arrow 3.

High-beam Assistant The concept When the lights are switched on, this system automatically switches the high beams on and off. The procedure is controlled by a sensor on the front of the interior rearview mirror. The as sistant ensures that the high beams are switched on whenever the traffic situation al lows. The driver can intervene at any time and switch the high beams on and off as usual.

Activating the High-beam Assistant 1. Turn the light switch to . 2. With the low beams switched on, briefly

push the turn indicator lever in the direc tion of the high beam.

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The high beams are switched on and off automatically.

Seite 92

Controls Lamps

92 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

The system responds to light from oncoming traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.

Switching the high beams on and off manually

High beams on, arrow 1. High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2.

To reactivate the High-beam Assistant, briefly push the turn indicator lever toward the high beams.

Activating/deactivating via iDrive 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "High beam assistant"

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

System limits Personal responsibility The High-beam Assistant cannot serve

as a substitute for the driver's personal judg ment of when to use the high beams. There

fore, manually switch off the high beams in sit uations where this is required to avoid a safety risk.

The system is not fully functional in situations such as the following, and driver intervention may be necessary: In very unfavorable weather conditions,

such as fog or heavy precipitation. In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as

pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; and at animal crossings.

In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on coming traffic on freeways.

In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the presence of highly reflective signs.

At low speeds. When the windshield in front of the interior

rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov ered with stickers, etc.

If the sensor view field is dirty. The view field of the sensor is located on the front of the interior rearview mirror. Do not cover this area with stickers, etc. Clean the sensor view field with a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass cleaner.

Front fog lamps The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on.

Press the button. The green indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights

up.

If the automatic headlamp control, refer to page 91, is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the fog lamps.

Seite 93

Lamps Controls

93 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Instrument lighting

Adjust the brightness using the thumbwheel.

Interior lamps General information The interior lamps, footwell lamps, exit lamps, cargo area lamps, and courtesy lamps are con trolled automatically. The LEDs for the courtesy lamps are set in the door handles and illuminate the ground in front of the doors. To avoid draining the battery, all lamps inside the car are switched off about 8 minutes after the ignition is switched off, Start/Stop button, refer to page 67.

Switching the interior lamps on and off

Press the button.

To switch off permanently: press the button for approx. 3 seconds. To clear this setting: briefly press the button.

Reading lamps

Press the button.

Reading lamps are located at the front and rear next to the interior lamps.

Danger of burns Do not reach into the opening of the

lamps; otherwise, there is a risk of burns.

Seite 94

Controls Lamps

94 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Safety Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Airbags

1 Front airbags 2 Head airbags

3 Side airbags

Front airbags Front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone cannot provide ade quate restraint.

Side airbags In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the side of the body in the chest and lap area.

Head airbags In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the head.

Protective action Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end collisions.

Information on how to ensure the optimal protective effect of the airbags

Keep at a distance from the airbags. Always grasp the steering wheel on the

steering wheel rim, holding your hands at the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the danger of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible if the airbag is trig gered.

There should be no people, animals, or ob jects between an airbag and a person.

Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area.

Keep the dashboard and window on the front passenger side clear, i.e., do not cover with adhesive labels or coverings, and do not attach holders such as for navi gation instruments and mobile phones.

Seite 95

Safety Controls

95 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Make sure that the front passenger is sit ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries can occur if the front airbag is triggered.

Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or other objects on the front passenger seat that are not approved specifically for seats with integrated side airbags.

Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jackets, over the backrests.

Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag and do not rest against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries can occur if the airbags are triggered.

Do not remove the airbag restraint system. Do not remove the steering wheel. Do not apply adhesive materials to the air

bag cover panels, cover them or modify them in any way.

Never modify either the individual compo nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This also applies to steering wheel covers, the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars and the sides of the headliner.

Even when all instructions are followed closely, injury from contact with the airbags cannot be ruled out in certain situations. The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short-term and, in most cases, temporary hearing impairment in sensitive individuals.

In the case of a malfunction, deactivation and after triggering of the airbags

Do not touch the individual components imme diately after the system has been triggered; otherwise, there is the danger of burns. Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by your service center or a workshop that has the necessary authorization for handling explo sives.

Non-professional attempts to service the sys tem could lead to failure in an emergency or undesired triggering of the airbag, either of which could result in injury.

Warnings and information on the airbags are also found on the sun visors.

Automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags The occupation of the seat is detected by eval uating the impression on the occupied seat surface of the front passenger seat. The front and side airbags on the front passen ger side are activated or deactivated accord ingly by the system. The indicator lamp above the interior rearview mirror shows the current status of the front passenger airbags, deactivated or activated, refer to Front passenger airbag indicator lamp below.

Leave feet in the footwell Make sure that the front passenger

keeps his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, the front passenger airbags may not function properly.

Child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat

Before transporting a child on the front pas senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in structions under Children on the front passen ger seat, refer to page 61.

Malfunction of the automatic deactivation system When transporting older children and adults, the front passenger airbags may be deacti vated in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indicator lamp for the front passenger air bags lights up. In this case, change the sitting position so that the front passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out.

Seite 96

Controls Safety

96 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person sit in the rear. To make sure that occupation of the seat cushion can be detected correctly: Do not attach seat covers, seat cushion

padding, ball mats or other items to the passenger seat unless they are specifically recommended by BMW.

Do not place objects under the seat that could press against the seat from below.

Indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the ar rangement of the switches and indicator lamps may differ somewhat. The indicator lamp for the front passenger air bags indicates the operating state of the front passenger airbags. The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac tivated or deactivated. The indicator lamp lights up when a child in

a child restraint fixing system intended for the purpose is properly detected on the seat. The airbags on the front passenger side are not activated.

The indicator lamp does not light up when, for example, a correctly seated person of sufficient size is detected on the seat. The airbags on the front passenger side are ac tivated.

The indicator lamp does not light up when the seat is empty. However, the airbags on the front passenger side are not activated.

Most child seats are detected by the system, Especially the child seats required by NHTSA at the time that the vehicle was manufactured. After installing a child seat, make sure that the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child seat has been detected and the front passenger airbags are not activated.

Operational readiness of airbag system

When the ignition is switched on,, refer to page 68, the warning lamp comes on briefly to indicate that the entire airbag system and the belt tensioners are operational.

Airbag system malfunction The warning lamp does not light up after

the ignition is switched on. Warning lamp remains permanently on.

Have the airbag system checked without delay if there is a malfunction

In the event of a malfunction in the airbag sys tem, have it checked without delay; otherwise, there is the risk that the system will not func tion as intended even if a sufficiently severe accident occurs.

FTM Flat Tire Monitor The concept The system does not measure the actual infla tion pressure in the tires.

Seite 97

Safety Controls

97 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

It detects a pressure loss in a tire by comparing the rotational speeds of the individual wheels while moving. In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corre sponding wheel change. This is detected and reported as a flat tire.

Functional requirements The system must have been initialized when the tire inflation pressure was correct; other wise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not en sured. Initialize the system after each correc tion of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.

System limits Sudden tire damage Sudden serious tire damage caused by

external influences cannot be indicated in ad vance.

A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires cannot be detected. Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure regularly. The system could be delayed or malfunction in the following situations: When the system has not been initialized. When driving on a snowy or slippery road

surface. Sporty driving style: slip in the drive

wheels, high lateral acceleration. When driving with snow chains. When driving with a compact wheel, the Flat Tire Monitor is unable to function.

Status display The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., whether or not the FTM is active.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Flat Tire Monitor"

The status is displayed.

Initialization The initialization process adopts the set infla tion tire pressures as reference values for the detection of a flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming the inflation pressures. Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains or with a compact wheel.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Reset" 4. Start the engine - do not drive away. 5. Start the initialization with "Reset". 6. Drive away. The initialization is completed while driving, which can be interrupted at any time. The initialization automatically continues when driving resumes.

Indication of a flat tire The warning lamp lights up red. A message appears on the Control Dis play. In addition, a signal sounds.

There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.

Do not continue driving without run-flat tires

If the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires as provided at the factory, do not continue driving. Continuing to drive could cause severe accidents.

When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta bility Control is switched on if necessary.

Seite 98

Controls Safety

98 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Run-flat tires

Maximum speed You can continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. If the defective tire continues to lose pres sure, its position will be indicated to you on the Control Display.

3. At the next opportunity, check the inflation pressure in all four tires. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure: The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on the cargo load and the driving style and conditions. For a vehicle containing an average load, the possible driving distance is ap prox. 50 miles/80 km. When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire, its handling characteristics change, e.g., re duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance, and altered self-steering properties. Adjust your driving style accord ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv ing over obstacles, e. g., curbs, potholes, etc. Because the possible driving distance de pends on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the actual distance may be smaller or greater depending on the driving speed, road conditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.

Continued driving with a flat tire Drive moderately and do not exceed a

speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and altered self-steering properties.

Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving

can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do not continue driving, and contact your service center.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM The concept The tire inflation pressure is measured in the four mounted tires. The system notifies you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires.

Functional requirements The system must have been reset while the in flation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. Always use wheels with TPM electronics to ensure that the system will operate properly. Reset the system after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.

System limits Sudden tire damage Sudden serious tire damage caused by

external influences cannot be indicated in ad vance.

The system does not operate correctly if it has not been reset. For example, a flat tire may be

Seite 99

Safety Controls

99 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

indicated despite correct tire inflation pres sures. The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat tire: If a wheel without TPM electronics is

mounted, e.g., compact wheel. When the TPM is disturbed by other sys

tems or devices with the same radio fre quency.

Status display 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "TPM" The status is displayed.

Status indicator on the Control Display The tire and system status is indicated by the color of the tires. A change in the tire inflation pressure during driving is taken into account. A correction is only necessary if this is indi cated by the TPM

Wheels, green The tire inflation pressure is equal to the target state.

One wheel is yellow A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in the indicated tire.

All wheels are yellow A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure

in several tires. The system was not reset after a wheel

change and thus issues a warning based on the inflation pressures initialized last.

A flat tire in one or more tires while the sys tem is being reset.

Wheels, gray The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons for this may be: TPM is being reset. Disturbance by systems or devices with

the same radio frequency. Malfunction.

Resetting the system Reset the system after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Reset" 4. Start the engine - do not drive away. 5. Reset the tire pressure using "Reset". 6. Drive away.

The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting TPM..." is displayed.

After driving for a few minutes, the set tire in flation pressures are applied as set values. The resetting process is completed automatically as you drive. The tires are shown in green and "TPM active" is shown on the Control Display. The trip can be interrupted at any time. If you drive away again, the process resumes auto matically. Do not reset the system when driv ing with a compact wheel. If a flat tire is detected while the system is re setting, all tires on the Control Display are dis played in yellow. The message "Low tire!" is shown.

Low tire pressure message The small warning lamp lights up yel low and the large warning lamp lights up red. A message appears on the Control Display. In addition, a signal

sounds.

Seite 100

Controls Safety

100 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire in flation pressure.

The system was not reset after a wheel change and thus issues warnings based on the inflation pressures initialized last.

Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.

Do not continue driving without run-flat tires

If the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires as provided at the factory, do not continue driving. Continuing to drive could cause severe accidents.

When a low inflation pressure is indicated, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on if necessary.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Run-flat tires

Maximum speed You can continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at

the next opportunity. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset. Reset the system.

Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure: The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on the cargo load and the driving style and conditions.

For a vehicle containing an average load, the possible driving distance is ap prox. 50 miles/80 km. When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire, its handling characteristics change, e.g., re duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance, and altered self-steering properties. Adjust your driving style accord ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv ing over obstacles, e. g., curbs, potholes, etc. Because the possible driving distance de pends on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the actual distance may be smaller or greater depending on the driving speed, road conditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.

Continued driving with a flat tire Drive moderately and do not exceed a

speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and altered self-steering properties.

Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving

can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do not continue driving, and contact your service center.

Message when the system was not reset

The yellow warning lamp lights up. A message appears on the Control Dis play.

The system detected a wheel change but was not reset. Warnings regarding the current tire inflation pressure are not reliable.

Seite 101

Safety Controls

101 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the system.

Malfunction The small warning lamp flashes in yellow and then lights up continu ously; the larger warning lamp comes on in yellow. On the Control Display,

the tires are shown in gray and a message ap pears. No flat tire can be detected.

Display in the following situations: If a wheel without TPM electronics is fitted,

for instance a compact wheel: have the service center check it if necessary.

Malfunction: have the system checked by your service center.

TPM could not be fully reset. Reset the system again.

Disturbance by systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the disturbance, the system auto matically becomes active again.

Declaration according to NHTSA/ FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should be checked monthly when cold and in flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.). As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres sure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pres sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated

tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv er's responsibility to maintain correct tire pres sure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the malfunction exists. When the mal function indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the in stallation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to en sure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Lane departure warning The concept This system issues a warning at speeds above approx. 40 mph/65 km/h if the vehicle is about to leave the lane on roads with lane markings. The steering wheel begins vibrating lightly. The time when the warning is issued may vary with the current driving situation. The system does not issue a warning if the turn signal is set before leaving the lane.

Seite 102

Controls Safety

102 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Switching on/off

Press button 1 on the steering wheel.

On: lane markings 2 are lit. Off: lane markings 2 go out. The system can issue warnings at speeds above approx. 40 mph/65 km/h. The state is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Display

1 The system is activated. 2 Arrows: at least one lane marking was de

tected and warnings can be issued.

Issuing a warning If the vehicle begins leaving the lane and a lane marking has been detected, the steering wheel begins vibrating. If the turn signal is set before the lane is changed, a warning is not issued.

Canceling a warning The warning is canceled:

Automatically after approx. 3 seconds. After the vehicle returns to its lane. During heavy brake application. When the turn signal flashes.

System limits Personal responsibility The system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver's personal judgment of the course of the road and the traffic situation. In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steer ing wheel; otherwise, you may lose control over the vehicle.

The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. In the event of worn, poorly visible, merg

ing, diverging, or multiple lane markings such as in construction areas.

When the demarcation lines are covered by snow, ice, dirt or water.

In tight curves or on narrow lanes. When the demarcation lines are covered by

objects. When driving very close to the vehicle in

front of you. When driving toward bright lights. When the windshield is fogged over, dirty

or covered by a sticker, etc., in front of the interior rearview mirror.

Malfunctions

Steering wheel vibration Frequent activation of the steering wheel vi bration causes the system to overheat. The lane departure warning system is deacti vated. Let the system cool and reactivate it by press ing the button.

Seite 103

Safety Controls

103 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Camera

The camera is located on the front of the inte rior rearview mirror. Keep the area in front of the interior rearview mirror clear.

Brake force display The concept

BMW X5

During normal brake application, the outer brake lamps light up.

During heavy brake application, the inner brake lamps light up in addition.

BMW X6

During normal brake application, the outer brake lamps light up.

During heavy brake application, the inner brake lamps light up in addition.

Seite 104

Controls Safety

104 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Driving stability control systems Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Antilock Brake System ABS ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking. The vehicle remains steerable even during full brake applications, thus increasing active safety. ABS is operational every time you start the en gine.

CBC Cornering Brake Control When braking during curves or when braking during a lane change, driving stability and steering response are improved further.

Electronic brake-force distribution The system controls the brake pressure in the rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.

Brake assistant When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically produces the maximum braking force boost. It thus helps to achieve the short est possible braking distance during full brak

ing. This system utilizes all of the benefits pro vided by ABS. Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the full braking.

Dynamic Stability Control DSC The concept DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels when driving away and accelerating. DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Sub ject to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine speed and by applying brakes to the individual wheels.

Adjust your driving style to the situation An appropriate driving style is always the

responsibility of the driver. The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even with DSC. Do not reduce the additional safety margin with a risky driving style, as otherwise there is a risk of an accident.

Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is reduced during acceleration and when driving in bends. To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.

Seite 105

Driving stability control systems Controls

105 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Deactivating DSC

Press and hold the button, but not longer than approx. 10 seconds, until the indicator lamp for DSC lights up in the instrument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed. DTC Dynamic Traction Control and DSC are deactivated together.

A message appears on the Control Display. Please note any supplementary information that appears there.

Activating DSC Press the button. DSC OFF and the indicator lamp in the instru ment cluster go out.

For better control The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con trols the drive forces and brake forces. The indicator lamp lights up: DSC and

DTC has failed.

DSC deactivated: The indicator lamp lights up and DSC OFF appears in the instrument cluster.

DSC and DTC deactivated.

Dynamic Traction Control DTC The concept The DTC system is a version of the DSC in which forward momentum is optimized. The system ensures maximum forward mo mentum on special road conditions, e.g., unp lowed snowy roads, but driving stability is lim ited. It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri ate caution. You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances: When driving in sand, on snowy inclines, in

slush, or on unplowed, snow-covered road surfaces

When rocking a vehicle free or starting off in deep snow, sand, or on loose ground

When driving with snow chains.

Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic Traction Control Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC provides maximum traction on loose ground. Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in bends.

Seite 106

Controls Driving stability control systems

106 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Activating DTC

Press the button. TRACTION is displayed in the instrument clus ter and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up.

Deactivating DTC Press the button again. TRACTION and the indicator lamp in the in strument cluster go out.

For better control The indicator lamp flashes: DTC con trols the drive forces and brake forces. The indicator lamp lights up: DSC and

DTC has failed.

DTC activated: The indicator lamp lights up and TRACTION appears in the instrument cluster.

DTC is activated.

xDrive xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve hicle. The combined effects of xDrive and DSC further optimize the traction and dynamic driv ing characteristics. The 4-wheel drive system xDrive variably distributes the drive forces to the front and rear axle depending on the driv ing situation and prevailing road conditions.

Dynamic Performance Control The concept Dynamic Performance Control optimizes the handling characteristics of your vehicle when starting off, cornering, and during evasive ma neuvers. To achieve this, the system variably distributes the drive torque of the rear axle to the two rear wheels. This further increases the steering precision and tracking stability of your vehicle.

Display The Control Display shows how xDrive and Dy namic Performance Control are distributing the drive forces.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Torque distribution"

The current distribution of drive forces is indi cated by arrows pointing to all four wheels. The highlighted arrows show the drive forces currently present. The longer an arrow is, the

Seite 107

Driving stability control systems Controls

107 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

greater the drive forces in the associated wheel. The transparent arrows indicate the maximum value the drive forces over the last 10 seconds.

Malfunction Malfunctions are displayed via Check Control, refer to page 85.

Hill Descent Control HDC The concept HDC is a downhill driving assistant that auto matically controls vehicle speed on steep downhill gradients. The vehicle moves at ap proximately walking speed without braking in tervention by the driver. You can activate the Hill Descent Control at speeds below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When moving downhill at speeds below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h, the vehicle reduces its speed to approximately walking speed, approx. 5 mph/8 km/h and keeps it constant. Only use HDC in transmission positions D or R.

Increasing or reducing speed The speed can be changed in the range from approx. 4 mph/6 km/h to ap prox. 15 mph/25 km/h by pressing the acceler ator or brake pedal lightly. A target speed within the same range can be specified using the lever of the cruise control. On inclines over 10 %, you can reduce the speed to approx. 3 mph/4 km/h. Pull the lever of the cruise control beyond the resistance point, arrow 3.

1 Increasing speed 2 Pull to the resistance point: reduce the

speed to approx. 4 mph/6 km/h 3 Pull beyond the resistance point: on in

clines over 10 %, reduce the speed to ap prox. 3 mph/4 km/h

Activating HDC

Press the button; the LED above the button lights up.

The LED flashes when the brakes are applied automatically.

Deactivating HDC Press the button again; the LED goes out. HDC is automatically deactivated above ap prox. 37 mph/60 km/h.

Seite 108

Controls Driving stability control systems

108 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Displays in the instrument cluster

1 Display for target speed 2 HDC display

Malfunction HDC is temporarily unavailable in the following situations due to a high brake temperature: The LED in the button and the display HDC

go out during HDC operation. The LED in the button and the HDC display

do not light up when the button is pressed.

Malfunction of driving stability control systems

Adapting your driving style When driving on poor roads, avoid using

full throttle or pressing the accelerator beyond the kickdown point and also avoid heavy brak ing. Otherwise, the drive train may be damaged or accidents can occur.

Adaptive Drive The concept Adaptive Drive reduces the body roll which oc curs when cornering quickly or during fast eva sive maneuvers. In addition, Adaptive Drive re duces the steering angle requirement, improves the running comfort, and enhances the dynamic driving characteristics of your ve hicle.

Chassis and suspension tuning Two chassis and suspension tunings are avail able for selection. Normal:

The comfortable basic setting offers opti mum comfort when traveling.

Sport: The sporty basic setting offers increased driving agility.

Selecting chassis and suspension tuning

Press the button.

The system switches between the two chassis and suspension tuning settings. Sport:

The LED in the button lights up and SPORT is displayed in the instrument panel.

Normal: The LED in the button goes out.

The selection of the chassis and suspension tuning setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Drive-off assistant This system supports driving away on gradi ents. The parking brake is not required.

1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.

Seite 109

Driving stability control systems Controls

109 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

2. Release the foot brake and drive away without delay.

Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle may roll back slightly.

Driving off without delay After releasing the foot brake, start driv

ing without delay, since the drive-off assistant will not hold the vehicle in place for more than approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin rolling back.

Self-leveling suspension The concept The self-leveling suspension on the rear axle assures a continuous ground clearance. To do so, the height of the vehicle is measured by sensors at both rear wheels. If the actual height deviates from the defined height, such as due to cargo in the vehicle, this difference is compensated very quickly. In ad dition, spring motions resulting from cornering or irregularities in the road surface are reduced to a minimum. The system works automatically.

Malfunctions Malfunctions are displayed via Check Control, refer to page 85.

Active steering The concept The active steering actively varies the steering angle of the front wheels in relation to the steering wheel movements. In addition, it also varies the steering force required for steering depending on the vehicle's speed. When you are driving in the low speed range, for instance in a town or when parking, the steering angle increases, i.e., steering be

comes very direct. In the higher speed range, on the other hand, the steering angle is re duced more and more. This improves the han dling of your vehicle over the entire speed range. In critical situations, the system can make tar geted corrections to the steering angle pro vided by the driver and thus stabilize the vehi cle before the driver intervenes.

Malfunction The warning lamp lights up yellow and a message is shown on the Con trol Display. The active steering is de fective or has been temporarily deac

tivated. At low speeds, greater steering wheel movements are required, whereas at higher speeds, the vehicle reacts more sensitively to steering wheel movements. The stability-pro moting intervention can also be deactivated. Proceed cautiously and drive defensively.

Deactivation Active steering deactivates in order to carry out an initialization. This deactivation is dis played by means of a message. The initializa tion can take several minutes. If the message does not disappear during the current trip, have the system checked.

Defect In the event of a defect, a corresponding text message is displayed. Have the system checked.

Seite 110

Controls Driving stability control systems

110 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Driving comfort Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Active cruise control With active cruise control you can select a de sired speed which is then automatically main tained when driving on open roadways and is varied to maintain a selected distance setting to slower moving vehicles ahead. Active cruise control represents a technologi cal advance over the familiar cruise control and is a welcome relief from the constant adjust ment of speed that can accompany driving in traffic on highways or other high-speed thor oughfares. Especially on longer trips and in traffic congestion, the system can reduce fati gue and tension, while increasing your enjoy ment of driving. Please use it safely and re sponsibly. In addition to holding a steady cruising speed, if you encounter slower vehicles ahead, active cruise control will, within limits, adjust your ve hicle's speed automatically so that you can flow with the traffic without having to make constant adjustments. If, for example, while cruising at the selected speed, you begin to approach a slower vehicle ahead of you in the same lane, the system will reduce your vehi cle's speed to the same as that of the vehicle ahead to maintain your selected distance set ting. You can vary the following distance, which will vary with speed. Based on your se lected distance setting, the system automati

cally decreases the throttle setting and lightly applies the brakes if necessary. In addition, if the vehicle ahead of you slows to a complete stop, the system can follow this action within the given scope and can also accelerate from a complete stop if the vehicle ahead of you drives off again shortly thereafter. During brak ing, your vehicle brake lamps will automatically illuminate to alert a following driver to take ac tion. In addition, it may be necessary for your vehicle to downshift the automatic transmis sion to maintain the distance setting selected. As soon as the road in front of you has no mov ing vehicles, the system will accelerate to your desired speed. This set speed is also main tained on downhill grades, however the vehicle speed can drop below the set speed when driving uphill if the engine output is not suffi cient.

Personal responsibility Active cruise control cannot detect stop

signs, red lights, or any object that is stopped or is blocking the road. Active cruise control is not and must not be used as a collision avoid ance/warning system. Since this active cruise control system is a new technology and oper ates differently from conventional cruise con trol systems to which you may be accustomed, it is necessary that you read all of the pages re lating to this system before use. Carefully read and observe the information on the system limitations, refer to page 116, to obtain a good command of the system and its range of appli cations.

Brake pedal feel When the system brakes and you also depress the brake pedal, a somewhat different braking feel results.

Seite 111

Driving comfort Controls

111 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Professional navigation system If the vehicle is equipped with a Professional navigation system, the system adapts the ac celeration and deceleration behavior of the ve hicle to the road on which you are currently driving. To ensure that the system has the latest infor mation on the course of the road, use the most recent version of the navigation data. If the vehicle position is unknown, e.g., if you have left the region covered by the map, the navigation system ceases to influence vehicle behavior.

Applications Please try the system first during sparse traffic and clear road conditions so that you can get used to the system. After you have experience and understand the system, only then use it during normal traffic. As with conventional cruise control systems, active cruise control in no way reduces or sub stitutes for the driver's own personal experi ence, responsibility, alertness and awareness in adjusting speed, braking or otherwise con trolling the vehicle. The driver should decide when to use the system on the basis of road, traffic, visibility, and weather conditions. Active cruise control is intended for use on highway- type roadways where traffic is moving rela tively smoothly as well as in slow-moving traf fic congestion. Do not use the system in city driving; in complex driving situations; heavy traffic such as during rush hour; on curvy, winding roads, slippery roads or roads with sharp curves such as highway off-ramps; dur ing inclement weather such as snow, strong rain or fog; or when entering interchanges, service/parking areas or toll booths. It is also important to regulate your vehicle's speed and distance setting within applicable legal limits. Always be ready to take action or apply the brakes if necessary, especially when the sys tem is actively following a vehicle in front of you. Otherwise, driving conditions can result

which lead to a violation of the law or elevated risk of an accident. The minimum initial activation speed is 20 mph/ 30 km/h, and the maximum speed is 110 mph/ 180 km/h. The system can also be activated while the vehicle is stationary, refer to page 114.

One lever for all functions

1 Storing and increasing the desired speed112

2 Storing and reducing the desired speed112

3 Interrupting114 or deactivating114 the system

4 Retrieving the stored desired speed and distance114 or driving away114

5 Selecting the distance to the vehicle ahead113

Storing the current speed Push the lever, arrow 1, or pull it briefly, ar row 2.

Seite 112

Controls Driving comfort

112 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

The system stores the current vehicle speed. It is indicated on the speedometer and briefly in the instrument panel.

Increasing desired speed Press or briefly push the lever up to or beyond the resistance point, arrow 1, until the desired speed is displayed. The displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is clear. With each activation to the resistance

point, the desired speed increases by ap prox. 1 mph/1 km/h.

With each activation beyond the resistance point, the desired speed increases by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.

Reducing the desired speed Pull the lever, arrow 2, until the desired speed is displayed. The functions are the same as those when in creasing the desired speed.

Selecting the distance

Press the rocker down briefly:

Increase the distance. Press the rocker up briefly:

Decrease the distance.

The selected distance is displayed in the in strument panel.

Distance display

Distance 1, closest

Distance 2

Distance 3

Distance 4, furthest This distance is set when you activate the system.

Selecting an appropriate distance Use good judgement to select the appro

priate following distance given road conditions, traffic, applicable laws and State driving rec ommendations for safe following distance. Otherwise, a violation of the law or risk of an accident could result.

Seite 113

Driving comfort Controls

113 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Interrupting the system

Press the lever up or down and additionally de press the brake if the vehicle is stationary. The mark in the speedometer changes color and the distance indicator goes out. In addition, the system is interrupted: When the brakes are applied. When the transmission position D is disen

gaged. When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti

vated. When DSC is activated When the safety belt and the driver's door

are opened while the vehicle is stationary. When the system has not detected objects

for an extended period, e.g., on a road with very little traffic without road edge line markings.

The radar sensor is dirty.

Active intervention if the system is inter rupted

If the system is interrupted, actively intervene by braking and, if necessary, with evasive ma neuvers; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.

Calling up the stored desired speed and distance

While driving Press button 4, refer to page 112. All of the displays in the instrument panel lights up.

While standing Before leaving the vehicle Before leaving the vehicle with the en

gine running, engage position P of the auto matic transmission and apply the parking brake. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.

If a vehicle detected ahead of you slows to a halt and your vehicle is also brought to a halt by the system: If the vehicle ahead of you drives away,

your vehicle accelerates automatically as long as mark 1 for the desired speed in the speedometer is green.

If the vehicle ahead of you drives away when mark 1 is orange, depress the accel erator briefly or press button 4.Rolling bars in the distance indicator 3 mean that the vehicle ahead of you has driven away.

If you are standing behind a vehicle with your brake pedal depressed and the system is de activated or interrupted:

1. Select the desired speed using the lever, arrow 1 or arrow 2, or press button 4 to re trieve a stored speed.

2. Release the brake pedal. 3. When the vehicle ahead of you drives

away, press on the accelerator briefly or press button 4.

Deactivating the system When driving, press the lever up or down

twice. When stationary, do the same while de

pressing the brake pedal. Switch off the ignition. The displays go out, and the stored desired speed and distance are deleted.

Seite 114

Controls Driving comfort

114 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Displays in instrument cluster

1 Stored desired speed Green: the system is active. Orange: the system is interrupted.

2 Lights up yellow: vehicle detected ahead Display also used for warnings, please read all information on warnings.

3 Selected distance to vehicle ahead The in dicator lights up as soon as the system is activated. The indicator lights up as soon as the sys tem is activated. The bars roll: the vehicle in front of you has driven off

4 Brief display of stored desired speed

If the display --- mph/---km/h appears briefly, the conditions necessary for operation may currently not be met.

Warning lamps Display 2 flashes red and a signal sounds. The system requests that the you intervene by braking and carrying

out evasive maneuvers, if necessary. The sys tem cannot independently restore the distance to the vehicle ahead. This display does not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her desired driv ing speed and style to the traffic conditions.

Display 2 flashes yellow. The conditions necessary for op eration of the system are no lon ger met, e.g., due to ABS or DSC

intervention. The system applies the brakes until you actively assume control.

Radar sensor

Position

The radar sensor is integrated in the bumper.

Dirty or covered sensor A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the de tection of vehicles. If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re

move layers of snow and ice carefully. Do not cover the view field of the radar

sensor.

Malfunction The system cannot be activated if the radar sensor is not aligned correctly. Misalignment may be caused by damage incurred during parking, for example.

For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is gov erned by the following: FCC ID: OAYARS3-A

Seite 115

Driving comfort Controls

115 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: This device may not cause harmful inter

ference, and This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

System limits

Speed range Best results are achieved when using the sys tem on well-developed roads and highways. The desired speed can be selected between 20 mph/30 km/h and 110 mph/180 km/h. The system can also be activated when sta tionary. Comply with the legal speed limit in every sit uation when using the system.

Detection range

The detection capacity of the system and the automatic braking capacity are limited. Two- wheeled vehicles driving ahead of you for in stance might not be detected.

Limited detection capacity Because of the limits to the detection ca

pacity, you should be alert at all times so that you can intervene actively, if necessary; other wise, there is the danger of an accident occur ring.

Deceleration The system does not decelerate when a sta tionary obstacle is located in the same lane, e.g., a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the end of traffic congestion. The system also does not respond to: Pedestrians or similarly slow road users. Red traffic lights. Stationary objects. Cross traffic. Approaching traffic.

No warnings A warning may not be issued when ap

proaching a stationary or very slow-moving ob stacle. Take action yourself, otherwise there is a risk of an accident.

Swerving vehicles

A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected until it is completely within the same lane as your vehicle.

Swerving vehicles If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly

swerves into your lane, the system may not be able to automatically restore the selected dis

Seite 116

Controls Driving comfort

116 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

tance. This also applies to major speed differ ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g., when rapidly approaching a truck. When a ve hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out evasive maneu vers, if necessary. Take action yourself, other wise there is a risk of an accident.

Unexpected lane change

If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly moves into another lane from behind a stopped vehi cle, you yourself must react, as the system does not react to stopped vehicles.

Cornering

If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the speed is reduced slightly in the curve, although curves cannot be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed. In tight curves, situations may result due to the restricted detection range of the system in which a vehicle driving ahead of you may not

be detected at all, or not until after a consider able delay.

When approaching a curve, the system may react briefly to the vehicles in the next lane due to the bend of the curve. Any deceleration of the vehicle by the system can be compensated for by briefly accelerating. After the accelerator pedal is released, the system becomes active again and independently controls the speed.

Driving away In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive away automatically, e.g., on steep inclines, with a heavy trailer or behind bumps in the road.

Driver interventions and your responsibility Your actions have priority at all times. When you press on the accelerator pedal while driv ing, automatic braking is not performed and the bars in the distance display go out until you lift your foot from the accelerator pedal. Once you release the accelerator pedal, the desired speed is achieved again on clear roads or the selected distance to the vehicle ahead is main tained.

Making braking possible Anytime the driver presses down on the

accelerator pedal, any braking action by the system is interrupted and the distance indica tor goes out until the pedal is fully released. As soon as you fully release the accelerator, the system will again control your cruising speed and distance setting. While driving with the

Seite 117

Driving comfort Controls

117 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

system activated, resting your foot on the acel erator pedal will cause the system not to brake even if necessary. Be certain that floormats or other objects on the vehicle floor do not inter fere with movement of the acccelerator pedal.

Limits of automatic braking While active cruise control is capable of

braking your vehicle automatically when you approach a slower vehicle ahead, it is impor tant to be aware that the ability of the system to apply the brakes is also limited, e.g. when you reduce your desired speed sharply. lt uses only a portion of braking system capacity and does not utilize the full capacity of the vehicle braking system. Therefore, the system cannot decrease your speed for large differences in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Examples: when you approach a vehicle traveling at a much lower speed than your own speed such as approaching a toll booth or when a much slower vehicle cuts in front of you at close range.

Cruise control The concept The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. The speed specified using the lever on the steering column is maintained. The system brakes on downhill gradients if en gine braking action is insufficient.

Do not use cruise control Do not use the system if unfavorable

conditions make it impossible to drive at a con stant speed, for instance: On curvy roads. In heavy traffic. On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or

on a loose road surface.

Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehi cle and cause an accident.

One lever for all functions

1 Storing and maintaining speed or acceler ating

2 Storing and maintaining speed or deceler ating

3 Interrupting and deactivating the system 4 Resuming a speed stored beforehand

Maintaining current speed Push, arrow 1, or pull, arrow 2, the lever to the resistance point. The car's current speed is stored and main tained. It is displayed on the speedometer and briefly in the instrument cluster. On uphill gradients, it may prove impossible to maintain the set speed if current engine power output is insufficient. If the engine braking ef fect is insufficient on downhill slopes, the sys tem will brake the vehicle slightly.

Increasing desired speed Repeatedly press the lever to the resistance point or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached. Each time the lever is pressed to the point

of resistance, the desired speed increases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.

Each time the lever is pressed beyond the resistance point, the desired speed is in creased by up to 5 mph/10 km/h.

Seite 118

Controls Driving comfort

118 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

The system stores and maintains the speed.

Accelerating using the lever Accelerating slightly: Press the lever to the resistance point, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached. Accelerating significantly: Press the lever beyond the resistance point, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached. The vehicle accelerates without pressure on the accelerator pedal. The system stores and maintains the speed.

Decreasing speed Repeatedly pull the lever to the resistance point or beyond, arrow 2, until the desired speed is displayed. Each time the lever is pulled to the resist

ance point, the desired speed is decreased by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.

Each time the lever is pulled beyond the resistance point, the desired speed is re duced by up to 5 mph/10 km/h until the minimum speed of 20 mph/30 km/h is ach ieved.

The system stores and maintains the speed.

Interrupting the system Press the lever up or down, arrow 3: dis play 1 in the speedometer changes color, refer to page 119. In addition, the system is interrupted: When the brakes are applied. When the transmission position D is disen

gaged. When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti

vated. When DSC or ABS is intervening.

Warning lamp The warning lamp lights up if cruise control has been deactivated auto

matically, e.g., by a control intervention of the DSC. A message appears on the Control Dis play.

Resuming cruising speed Press button 4: The stored speed is resumed and maintained.

Deactivating the system Press the lever upward or downward twice,

arrow 3. Switch off the ignition. The stored speed is cleared.

Displays in the instrument cluster

1 Stored desired speed Green: the system is active. Orange: the system is interrupted.

2 Selected desired speed appears briefly

If the display --- mph or --- km/h appears briefly, conditions may not be adequate to op erate the system. Call up Check Control messages, refer to page 86.

Malfunction The warning lamp lights up. The sys tem is malfunctioning or has failed. A message appears on the Control

Display. More information, refer to page 85.

Seite 119

Driving comfort Controls

119 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Park Distance Control PDC The concept In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control, the backup camera, refer to page 122, can be switched on. PDC supports you when parking. A slow ap proach to an object in front of or behind your vehicle is announced by: Signal tones. Visual display.

Measurement Measurements are made by ultrasound sen sors in the bumpers. The range is approx. 6 ft/2 m. An acoustic warning is first given: By the front sensors and two rear corner

sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm. By the rear middle sensors at approx.

5 ft/1.50 m.

System limits Check the traffic situation as well PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the

driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa tion. Check the traffic situation around the ve hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci dent could result from road users or objects located outside of the PDC detection range. Loud noises from outside and inside the vehi cle may prevent you from hearing the PDC's signal tone.

Avoid driving quickly with PDC Avoid approaching an object quickly.

Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet active. For technical reasons, the system may other wise be too late in issuing a warning.

Limits of ultrasonic measurement The detection of objects can reach the physi cal limits of ultrasonic measurement, for in stance: With tow bars and trailer hitches. With thin or wedge-shaped objects. With low objects. With objects with corners and sharp edges. Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. High, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected.

False warnings PDC may issue a warning under the following conditions even though there is no obstacle within the detection range: In heavy rain. When sensors are very dirty or covered in

ice. When sensors are covered in snow. On rough road surfaces. In large buildings with right angles and

smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga rages.

In heavy exhaust. Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,

sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners or neon lights.

Switching on automatically With the engine running or the ignition switched on, shift the selector lever into posi tion R.

Switching off automatically when driving forward The system switches off when a certain dis tance or speed is exceeded. Switch on the system again if necessary.

Seite 120

Controls Driving comfort

120 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Switching on/off manually

Press the button. On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out.

Signal tones When approaching an object, an intermittent tone is sounded that indicates the position of the object. For example, if an object is de tected behind the vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the rear speakers. The shorter the distance to the object be comes, the shorter the intervals. If the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 12 in/30 cm, a continuous tone is sounded. If objects are located both in front of and be hind the vehicle, an alternating continuous sig nal is sounded. The intermittent tone is interrupted after ap prox. 3 seconds: If the vehicle stops in front of an object that

is detected by only one of the corner sen sors.

If moving parallel to a wall. The signal tone is switched off: When the vehicle moves away from an ob

ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm. When transmission position P is engaged.

Volume You can set the volume of the PDC signal tone, refer to page 191.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Visual warning The approach to an object can be shown on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are displayed on the Control Display be fore a signal tone sounds.

The display appears as soon as PDC is acti vated.

If the last image selected was the rear view camera, this is displayed again. To switch to PDC:

"Switch off rear view camera" The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Image on the Control Display

Switching on the rear view camera using iDrive With PDC activated:

"Rear view camera" The image of the rear view camera is dis played. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Seite 121

Driving comfort Controls

121 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Malfunction

A Check Control message, refer to page 85, is displayed in the instrument cluster.

The areas in front of and behind the vehicle ap pear in shaded form on the Control Display. PDC has failed. Have the system checked. To ensure full operability: Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. When using high-pressure washers, do not

spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.

Surround View The concept Surround View encompasses the following systems: Backup camera, refer to page 122. Top View, refer to page 124. Side View, refer to page 126. It provides assistance when parking and ma neuvering and at blind driveways and intersec tions.

Rear view camera The concept The rear view camera assists you when park ing and maneuvering in reverse. To accom plish this, the region behind your vehicle is shown on the Control Display.

System limits Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve

hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci dent could result from road users or objects lo cated outside the picture area of the backup camera.

Detection of objects High, protruding objects such as ledges

may not be detected by the backup camera.

Switching on automatically With the engine running or the ignition switched on, shift the selector lever into posi tion R. The image of the rear view camera is displayed when the system has been switched on using iDrive.

Switching off automatically when driving forward The system switches off when a certain dis tance or speed is exceeded. Switch on the system again if necessary.

Switching on/off manually

Press the button. Press the button.

On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out. If PDC is displayed, switch on the backup cam era via the iDrive, refer to page 121.

Seite 122

Controls Driving comfort

122 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Assistance functions

Functional requirement Rear view camera is switched on. Tailgate is completely closed.

Pathway lines

Can be displayed in the image of the rear view camera when the transmission is in reverse.

Help estimate the required amount of space when parking and maneuvering on a flat road surface.

Depend on the current steering angle and are continuously adapted to movements of the steering wheel.

Show the parking aid lines via the iDrive, refer to page 124.

Turning lines

Can be displayed in the image of the rear view camera.

Show the path of the smallest turning cir cle on a flat road surface.

When the steering wheel is turned, only one turning line is displayed.

Show the parking aid lines via the iDrive, refer to page 124.

Parking using pathway and turning lines 1. Position the vehicle so that the turning

lines lead into the margins of the parking space.

2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where the pathway line covers the corresponding turning circle line.

Seite 123

Driving comfort Controls

123 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Obstacle marking

Three-dimensionally shaped markings can be displayed in the image of the rear view camera.

Their color gradation corresponds to the mark ings in PDC. This helps estimate the distance to the object pictured. Show the obstacle marking via the iDrive, refer to page 124.

Activating assistance functions Several assistance functions can be active at the same time.

Showing the parking aid lines "Parking aid lines"

Pathway and turning lines are displayed.

Showing the obstacle marking "Obstacle marking"

Three-dimensionally-shaped markings are dis played.

Image on the Control Display

Switching on the rear view camera using iDrive With PDC activated:

"Rear view camera" The image of the rear view camera is dis played. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Brightness With the rear view camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached and press the controller.

Contrast With the rear view camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached and press the controller.

Camera

The lens of the rear view camera is under the grasping lip of the tailgate.

The presence of dirt can impair image quality. Clean the lens with a moist, nonabrasive cloth.

Top View The concept Top View assists you when parking and ma neuvering. To accomplish this, the door region and road surface region are shown on the Con trol Display.

Detection Detection is carried out by two cameras integrated into the exterior mirror and the rear view camera. The range is:

Seite 124

Controls Driving comfort

124 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Approx. 7 ft/2 m to the side. Approx. 7 ft/2 m to the rear. Obstacles up to the height of the exterior mir rors are thus detected in a timely fashion.

System limits Top View cannot be used in the following sit uations: With a door open. With the tailgate open. With an exterior mirror folded in. In poor light. The arrows next to the vehicle are displayed in a shaded form on the Control Display and a symbol appears at the corresponding location on the vehicle.

Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve

hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci dent could result from road users or objects lo cated outside the picture area of the cameras.

Switching on automatically Select transmission position R with the engine running. The images from Top View and PDC are dis played when the system has been switched on using iDrive.

Switching off automatically when driving forward The system switches off when a certain dis tance or speed is exceeded. Switch on the system again if necessary.

Switching on/off manually

Press the button.

On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out. If Top View is displayed, switch on the backup camera via the iDrive, refer to page 124.

Visual warning The approach to an object can be shown on the Control Display. When the distance to an object is small, the PDC display correspondingly shows a red bar in front of the vehicle.

The display appears as soon as Top View is activated.

If the last image selected was the rear view camera, this is displayed again. To switch to Top View:

"Rear view camera" Select the symbol on the Control Display. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Seite 125

Driving comfort Controls

125 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Image on the Control Display

Switching on the rear view camera using iDrive With Top View activated:

"Rear view camera" The image of the rear view camera is dis played. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Brightness With Top View switched on:

1. "Brightness" 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached and press the controller.

Contrast With Top View switched on:

1. "Contrast" 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached and press the controller.

Displaying turning lines and pathway lines The static, red turning line shows the lat

eral space required when the wheel is fully turned.

The variable, green pathway lines assist you in estimating the amount of lateral space actually required. The pathway lines depend on the current steering angle and are continuously adapted to movements of the steering wheel.

"Parking aid lines" Turning lines and pathway lines are displayed.

Cameras

The lenses of the Top View cameras are on the undersides of the exterior mirror housings.

The presence of dirt can impair image quality. Clean the lens with a moist, nonabrasive cloth.

Side View The concept Side View provides an early look at cross traffic at blind driveways and intersections. Road users concealed by obstacles to the left and right of the vehicle can only be detected from the driver's seat at the last minute. To improve visibility, two cameras in the front of the vehi cle record the traffic situation on each side.

System limits The cameras capture a maximum range of 330 ft/100 m.

Display The images from both cameras are shown si multaneously on the Control Display.

Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve

hicle on blind driveways and intersections with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could result from road users or objects located out side the picture area of the Side View cam eras.

Seite 126

Controls Driving comfort

126 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Switching off automatically when driving forward The system switches off when a certain dis tance or speed is exceeded. Switch on the system again if necessary.

Switching on/off manually

Press the button.

Image on the Control Display The traffic area to the left and right is displayed on the Control Display.

Guidelines at the bottom of the image show the position of the front of the vehicle.

Brightness With the Side View switched on:

1. "Brightness" 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached and press the controller.

Contrast With the Side View switched on:

1. "Contrast" 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached and press the controller.

Cameras

The two camera lenses are located on the sides of the bumper. The presence of dirt can impair image quality. Clean the lens, refer to page 315.

Head-up Display The concept This system projects important information into the driver's field of vision, e.g., navigation instructions. In this way, the driver can get information with out averting his or her eyes from the road.

Seite 127

Driving comfort Controls

127 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Switching on/off Press the button.

Display visibility The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Display is influenced by: Certain sitting positions. Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis

play. Sunglasses with certain polarization filters. Wet roads. Unfavorable light conditions. If the image is distorted, check the basic set tings.

Display

1 Navigation instructions 2 Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go func

tion 3 Lane departure warning 4 Cruise control/desired speed 5 Current speed

The Check Control messages are displayed briefly if needed.

Selecting displays in the Head-up Display 1. "Settings" 2. "Head-up display" 3. "Displayed information" 4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up

Display.

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Setting the brightness The brightness is automatically adjusted to the ambient light.

Seite 128

Controls Driving comfort

128 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

The basic setting can be adjusted manually.

1. "Settings" 2. "Head-up display" 3. "Brightness" 4. Turn the controller.

The brightness is adjusted. With the low beams switched on, the bright ness can also be adjusted with the thumb wheel of the instrument lighting. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Height adjustment 1. "Settings" 2. "Head-up display" 3. "Height" 4. Turn the controller.

The height is adjusted. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Special windshield The windshield is part of the system. The shape of the windshield makes it possible to display a precise image. A film in the windshield prevents double im ages from being displayed. Therefore, have the special windshield re placed by a service center only.

Seite 129

Driving comfort Controls

129 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Climate Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

At a glance

1 Air toward the windshield and side win dows

2 Air for the upper body

3 Air to footwell 4 Automatic climate control with 2-zone con

trol131

Seite 130

Controls Climate

130 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Automatic climate control with 4-zone con trol135

Automatic climate control with 2-zone control

1 Seat heating and ventilation, driver's side53

2 Temperature, left side of passenger com partment

3 AUTO program 4 Temperature, right side of passenger com

partment 5 Maximum cooling 6 Seat heating and ventilation, front passen

ger side53 7 Passenger side

Manual air distribution

Accessing setting for ventilation tem perature on the Control Display

8 Switching cooling function on/off manually 9 Automatic recirculated air control/recircu

lated air mode 10 Manual air volume, switching off automatic

climate control, residual heat 11 Rear window defroster 12 Defrosting windows and removing conden

sation 13 Air grill for interior temperature sensor,

please keep clear and unobstructed 14 Driver's side

Manual air distribution Accessing setting for ventilation tem

perature on the Control Display

The current setting for manual air distribution is displayed on the Control Display.

Comfortable interior climate The AUTO program offers the optimum air dis tribution and air volume for virtually all condi tions, refer to AUTO program below. Select a comfortable interior temperature only. The following sections contain more detailed information on the available setting options.

Most of these settings are stored for the re mote control currently in use, Personal Profile settings, refer to page 31.

AUTO program Press the button. Air volume, air distribution, and temperature are controlled auto matically.

Seite 131

Climate Controls

131 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air is directed to the windshield, side windows, upper body, and into the footwell. The cooling function is switched on automati cally with the AUTO program. At the same time, a condensation sensor con trols the program in such a way that window condensation is prevented as much as possi ble. To switch off the program: press the button again or manually adjust the air distribution.

Intensity of the AUTO program Pressing the AUTO button repeatedly adjusts the intensity of the AUTO program. The se lected intensity, SOFT, MEDIUM or INTEN SIVE, appears on the display of the automatic climate control.

Temperature Turn the wheel to set the desired temperature. The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as

quickly as possible, if necessary with the maxi mum cooling or heating capacity, and then keeps it constant.

Avoid rapidly switching between different tem perature settings. The automatic climate con trol will not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature. Maximum heating power can be obtained with the highest setting, regardless of the external temperature. At the lowest setting, cooling is continuous, re gardless of the external temperature.

Adjusting the ventilation temperature This function can be used to adjust the air temperature for the upper body region.

1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Driver ventilation" or "Front passenger

ventilation" 4. Turn the controller to adjust the tempera

ture. Blue: colder Red: warmer

Defrosting and defogging windows Press the button. Ice and condensation are quickly re

moved from the windshield and the front side windows.

For this purpose, also switch on the cooling function.

Rear window defroster Press the button. The rear window defroster switches

off automatically after a certain period of time. Depending on the vehicle equipment, upper wires are used as an antenna and are not part of the rear window defroster.

Air volume, manual You can vary the air volume by press ing on the corresponding side. You

Seite 132

Controls Climate

132 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

can reactivate the automatic mode for the air volume with the AUTO button.

Manual air distribution The air flow can be guided into the vehicle in terior, separately for the driver's and front pas senger side, using one of the following pro grams: Upper body region. Upper body region and footwell. Footwell. Driver's side: in addition, the windshield,

side windows, and footwell.

Selecting program Press the button repeatedly until the desired program is shown on the Control Display.

1 Air toward the windshield and side win dows

2 Air for the upper body 3 Air to footwell

Pressing the AUTO button cancels the manual air distribution settings. The automatic mode for the air volume re mains effective with manual air distribution.

Cooling function The passenger compartment can only be cooled with the engine running.

Press the button.

The air is cooled and dehumidified and de pending on the temperature setting warmed again.

The cooling function helps to prevent conden sation on the windows or to remove it quickly. Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started. The cooling function is switched on automati cally with the AUTO program. When using the automatic climate control, condensation water, refer to page 158, devel ops that exits underneath the vehicle.

Maximum cooling Press the button. The system is set to the lowest temperature, maximum air volume and recirculated-air mode.

Air flows out of the vents for the upper body region. Open them for this purpose. Air is cooled as quickly as possible: At an external temperature of approx.

32 /0 . When the engine is running.

Automatic recirculated air mode/ recirculated air mode You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu tants in the immediate environment by tempo rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle.

Press the button repeatedly to select an operating mode:

LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously. Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air

control: a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and controls the shutoff auto matically.

Seite 133

Climate Controls

133 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Right LED on, recirculated air mode: the supply of outside air into the vehicle is per manently blocked.

If the windows are fogged over, switch off the recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO button to utilize the condensation sensor. Make sure that air can flow onto the wind shield.

Continuous recirculated-air mode The recirculated air mode should not be

used for an extended period of time, as the air quality inside the vehicle deteriorates stead ily.

Residual heat The heat stored in the engine is used to heat the interior.

Functional requirement Up to 15 minutes after the engine has been

switched off. Warm engine. The battery is sufficiently charged. External temperature below 77 /25 .

Switching on 1. Switch off the ignition. 2. Press the right-hand button.

REST appears on the display of the automatic climate control when the residual heat utiliza tion is switched on. From radio readiness the interior temperature, the air volume and the air distribution can be set.

Switching off You can select the lowest blower speed by pressing and holding the left side. Pressing again switches off the residual heat utilization.

REST disappears from the display of the auto matic climate control.

Switching on/off the automatic climate control

Switching off With the blower at its lowest setting, press the left side of the button to

switch off the automatic climate control.

Switching on Press any button to switch the automatic cli mate control back on.

Front ventilation

1 Use the thumbwheels to smoothly open and close the air vents

2 Use the lever to change the direction of the air flow

Avoiding injury Do not drop any foreign objects into the

air vents, otherwise these could be catapulted outwards and lead to injuries.

Ventilation for cooling Adjust the vents to direct the flow of cool air in your direction, for instance if the interior has become too warm.

Draft-free ventilation Set the air vents so that the air flows past you and is not directed straight at you.

Seite 134

Controls Climate

134 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Ventilation in rear

1 Use the thumbwheels to smoothly open and close the air vents

2 Use the lever to change the direction of the air flow

BMW X5: heating and ventilation, 3rd row seats The air in the area of the 3rd row seats can be heated or recirculated. Air vents are located in the storage compartment area between the seats and in the footwell of the 3rd row seats.

1 Thumbwheel Activating heating and distributing air

in footwell: Turn toward front

Distributing air in storage compartment area between seats: Turn toward rear

2 Button for switching on the blower: LED is lit

The heating is not ready for operation without switching on the blower. After the heating is switched off, the blower can be used to recir

culate the air within the vehicle, for instance at high temperatures. To do this, turn thumb wheel 1 toward the rear and switch on the blower, button 2.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the in coming air. The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous pollutants from the outside air that enters the vehicle. The service center replaces this combined fil ter during routine maintenance. More information can be found in the service requirements display, refer to page 83.

Automatic climate control with 4-zone control Front operation Corresponds to the operation of automatic cli mate control with 2-zone control, refer to page 131.

Rear operation The control unit is located in the center con sole in the rear.

1 Temperature, left rear seating area 2 AUTO program 3 Display 4 Temperature, right rear seating area 5 Seat heating, right rear seat

Seite 135

Climate Controls

135 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

6 Air volume, manual 7 Seat heating, left rear seat

The current setting for the temperature and the air flow rate is shown on display 3.

Activation/deactivation 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Rear climate control" 4. Select the desired settings.

The rear automatic climate control cannot be operated if the front automatic climate control is switched off. With the defrost windows and eliminate condensation function activated, the rear automatic climate control is also not ready for operation.

AUTO program The AUTO program automatically sets the air distribution toward the upper body and in the footwell, as well as the air flow rate. It also adapts your instructions for the

temperature to outside influences throughout the year.

Temperature Set the desired temperature indi vidually on the left and right side.

The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as quickly as possible regardless of the season, using maximum cooling or heat ing power if necessary, and then maintains it. When switching between different tempera ture settings in rapid succession, the auto matic climate control does not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature.

Air volume, manual The air flow rate can be varied by pressing on the corresponding side.

The automatic mode for the air flow rate can be switched on again using the AUTO button.

Switching off rear automatic climate control

With the blower at its lowest setting, press the left side of the button to

switch off the automatic climate control.

The automatic climate control can also be switched off with iDrive. To switch on the auto matic climate control again, the system must first be reactivated, refer to Activating/deacti vating. The system is switched on again by pressing any button of the rear automatic climate con trol.

Seite 136

Controls Climate

136 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Ventilation in rear

1 Use the thumbwheels to smoothly open and close the air vents

2 Thumbwheels to adjust temperature in up per body region; can be adjusted sepa rately for left and right: Blue: colder Red: warmer

3 Use the lever to change the direction of the air flow

BMW X5

1 Use the lever to change the direction of the air flow

2 Thumbwheel to smoothly open and close air vents

For ventilation of the 3rd row seats, refer to page 135.

Parked-car ventilation The concept The parked-car ventilation blows air into the passenger compartment to lower interior tem peratures. The system can be switched on and off at any external temperature, either directly or by us ing a preset switch-on time. It remains switched on for 30 minutes. Since the system uses a substantial amount of electrical current, refrain from activating it twice in succession without allowing the bat tery to be recharged in normal operation be tween use. Open the vents to allow air to flow out. They can be operated via iDrive.

Switching on/off directly 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Activate parked-car vent."

The symbol on the automatic climate con trol flashes if the system is switched on.

Preselecting activation times 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2"

Seite 137

Climate Controls

137 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

4. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"

5. Set the desired time. The symbol on the automatic climate con

trol lights up when the switch-on time is acti vated.

The symbol on the automatic climate con trol flashes when the system has been switched on. The system will only be switched on within the next 24 hours. After that, it needs to reacti vated.

Seite 138

Controls Climate

138 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Interior equipment Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Universal Garage Door Opener The concept The Universal Garage Door Opener can be used to operate up to 3 functions in remote- controlled systems, such as garage door drives or lighting systems. The Universal Garage Door Opener replaces up to 3 different hand- held transmitters. To operate it, the buttons on the interior rearview mirror must be program med for the desired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the system is needed for the programming procedure.

During programming During programming and before activat

ing a device using the Universal Garage Door Opener, ensure that there are no people, ani mals, or objects in the range of movement of the remote-controlled device; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or damage. Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- held transmitter.

Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored functions for security reasons.

Compatibility If this symbol is printed on the packag ing or in the operating instructions of

the system being operated, the system is gen erally compatible with the Universal Garage Door Opener. If you have any questions, please contact: Your service center. www.homelink.com on the Internet. HomeLink is a registered trademark of John son Controls, Inc.

Controls on the interior rearview mirror

1 LED 2 Buttons 3 Hand-held transmitter, required for pro

gramming.

Programming

General information 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Initial setup:

Press the right and left buttons on the inte rior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap prox. 20 seconds until the LED on the inte rior rearview mirror begins to flash. All programmed settings of the buttons on the interior rearview mirror are deleted.

3. Hold the hand-held transmitter of the sys tem to be operated a distance of approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons

Seite 139

Interior equipment Controls

139 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

on the interior rearview mirror. The re quired distance depends on the particular hand-held transmitter.

4. Press the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter and the button being programmed on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously and hold. The LED on the interior rearview mirror flashes slowly at first.

5. When the LED flashes more rapidly, re lease both buttons. Rapid flashing indi cates that the button on the interior rear view mirror has been programmed. If the LED does not flash faster after 60 seconds, change the distance between the interior rearview mirror and the hand- held transmitter and repeat the step. Multi ple trials at different distances may be nec essary. Wait at least 15 seconds between trials.

6. To program additional functions on other buttons, repeat steps 3 to 5.

The systems can be operated with the buttons on the interior rearview mirror.

Special characteristics of alternating- code radio systems If the system cannot be operated after re peated programming, check whether the sys tem to be operated uses an alternating-code system. Read the operating instructions of the system or press and hold the programmed button on the interior rearview mirror. If the LED on the interior rearview mirror flashes rapidly at first and then lights up continuously for 2 seconds, the system is equipped with an alternating- code system. This flashing LED pattern re peats itself for approx. 20 seconds. In systems with an alternating-code system, the Universal Garage Door Opener and the system must be additionally synchronized.

Please obtain additional information on syn chronization in the operating instructions of the system being set up. The systems will be easier to synchronize with the aid of a second person. Synchronization:

1. Park the vehicle within range of the re mote-controlled system.

2. Program the corresponding button on the interior rearview mirror as described.

3. Identify and press the synchronization but ton on the system being set up. You have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.

4. Press and hold the button on the interior rearview mirror for approx. 3 seconds and then release it. Repeat this step up to three times if necessary to complete the syn chronization procedure. When synchroni zation is completed, the programmed func tion is executed.

Reprogramming individual buttons 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Hold the hand-held transmitter at a dis

tance of approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm from the memory buttons. The required distance depends on the par ticular hand-held transmitter.

3. Press the memory button of the Universal Garage Door Opener.

4. If the LED flashes slowly after approx. 20 seconds, press the transmit button on the hand-held transmitter.

5. Release both buttons when the LED flashes rapidly. If the LED does not flash rapidly after ap prox. 60 seconds, change the distance and repeat the step. Canada: if the LED does not flash rapidly after approx. 60 seconds, change the dis tance and repeat the step. If programming

Seite 140

Controls Interior equipment

140 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

was aborted by the hand-held transmitter, hold down the memory button and press and release the button on the hand-held transmitter several times for 2 seconds.

Controls Prior to operation Before operating a unit with the Universal

Garage Door Opener, ensure that there are no people, animals, or objects in the range of movement of the system; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or damage. Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- held transmitter.

The system, such as the garage door, can be operated using the button on the interior rear view mirror with the engine running or the igni tion switched on. When you are within the re ception range of the system, press and hold the button until the function is initiated. The LED on the interior rearview mirror lights up continuously while the radio signal is being transmitted.

Deleting stored functions Press the right and left buttons on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously for approx. 20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The functions cannot be deleted individually.

Digital compass

1 Adjustment button 2 Display

The display shows you the main or secondary compass direction in which you are driving.

Operating concept Various functions can be called up by pressing the adjustment button with a pointed object such as a pen. The following adjustment op tions are displayed one after the other, de pending on how long the adjustment button is pressed: Press briefly: switch the display on/off. 3 to 6 seconds: set the compass zone. 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate the compass. 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right hand

steering. 12 to 15 seconds: set the language.

Setting compass zones Set the compass zone corresponding to the vehicle's geographic location so that the com pass can function correctly; refer to the world map with compass zones.

Seite 141

Interior equipment Controls

141 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Press the adjustment button for 34 seconds. The number of the compass zone set is shown in the display. To change the zone setting, briefly press the adjustment button repeatedly until the display shows the number of the compass zone corre sponding to the current location. The compass is operational again after approx. 10 seconds.

Calibrating the digital compass The digital compass must be calibrated in the following situations: An incorrect compass direction is shown. The cardinal direction displayed does not

change even if the direction of travel changes.

Not all compass directions are shown.

Procedure 1. Make sure that there are no large metal ob

jects or overhead power lines in the vicinity of the vehicle and that there is enough space to drive in a circle.

2. Set the currently valid compass zone. 3. Press the adjustment button for 67 sec

onds to call up C. Then drive at least one full circle at a maximum speed of 4 mph/7 km/h. When the system is cali brated, the C is replaced by the compass directions.

Right-hand/left-hand steering The digital compass is set for right-hand or left-hand steering at the factory.

Setting the language Press the adjustment button for 1213 sec onds. Briefly press the adjustment button again to switch between English "E" and Ger man "O". The setting is automatically saved after approx. 10 seconds.

Seite 142

Controls Interior equipment

142 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Ashtray/cigarette lighter Opening

Front

To open the cover, slide it forward.

Rear

BMW X6

Slide the cover back.

Emptying Take out the insert.

Lighter

With the engine running or the ignition switched on, press in the cigarette lighter.

The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out.

Danger of burns Only hold the hot lighter by its head; oth

erwise, there is the danger of getting burned. Switch off the ignition and take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children cannot use the lighter and burn themselves.

Replace the cover after use Replace the lighter or socket cover after

use; otherwise, objects that fall into the lighter socket or power socket could cause a short circuit.

Connecting electrical devices Note

Do not connect the charger to the socket Do not connect the battery charger to

the socket installed in the vehicle at the factory as this could damage the battery.

Sockets The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment while the engine is run ning or when the ignition is switched on. The

Seite 143

Interior equipment Controls

143 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volt. Avoid damaging the sockets by attempting to insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size.

Front center console

Slide the cover forward.

To access the socket: remove the cap or pull out the cigarette lighter.

Rear center console

The arrangement of the sockets may vary with the equipment.

To access the sockets: remove the caps.

In storage compartment under center armrest

To access the socket: remove the cover.

In cargo area

To access the socket: fold open the cover.

BMW X6: in the rear console

Slide the cover back.

To access the socket: pull off the cover.

Seite 144

Controls Interior equipment

144 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Cargo area BMW X5: luggage compartment roller cover

Pull out the luggage compartment roller cover and hook it into the brackets.

Do not deposit heavy objects Do not deposit heavy or hard objects on

the luggage compartment roller cover. Other wise, they may present a danger to occupants, forinstance during braking and evasive maneu vers.

Do not let the luggage area retractable cover snap back

Do not let the luggage compartment retracta ble cover snap back as this could damage the cover.

Removing 1. Unlock the case with the button, arrow 1.

2. Swing the case somewhat to the left, ar row 2, and remove it.

Installing When installing, proceed in the opposite order of removal.

1. Lay the case on the left-hand side and push it forward, arrow 1.

2. Swing the case toward the inside, see ar row 2.

3. Push the case forward at the ends until it engages in the two side brackets.

4. Check whether the case is properly locked in place by pulling it with a sudden move ment.

BMW X6: cargo cover

Deploy cargo cover by pulling back.

Do not deposit heavy objects Do not deposit heavy or hard objects on

the cargo cover. Otherwise, they may present a danger to occupants, forinstance during braking and evasive maneuvers.

Seite 145

Interior equipment Controls

145 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Removing

1. Grasp retracted cargo cover underneath the upper fold on both sides.

2. Pull the cover back out of the side brack ets.

3. Depending on your vehicle's equipment package, you can store the cover under the floor panel in the cargo area.

Installing When installing, proceed in the opposite order of removal.

1. Set the cargo cover into place on the left and right sides.

2. Lift the back of the cover slightly and slide forward until it snaps into the two side brackets.

Enlarging the cargo area The rear seat backrest is divided. You can fold down both sides separately in order to expand the cargo area.

BMW X6: before folding the rear seat backrest forward

Before folding the rear seat backrest forward or using the ski bag, remove beverage contain ers from the cupholder and close the cu pholder.

Reach into the recess and pull toward the front.

Locking the backrest Before letting passengers ride in the rear,

engage the seat backrests, locking them in place. Otherwise, there is the danger of an ac cident due to unexpected seat movement.

Ensure that the lock is securely engaged When folding back the backrest, be sure

that it locks in place securely. The red warning field in the control display disappears. If it is not properly engaged, transported cargo could enter the passenger compartment during brak ing or evasive maneuvers and endanger the vehicle occupants.

Observe the instructions concerning the safety belt

Observe the instructions concerning the safety belt, refer to page 54. Otherwise, personal pro tection may be compromised.

Seite 146

Controls Interior equipment

146 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Storage compartments Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Notes No loose objects in the passenger com partment

Do not stow any objects in the passenger compartment without securing them; other wise, they may present a danger to occupants for instance during braking and avoidance ma neuvers.

No non-slip mats on the dashboard Do not use non-slip materials, such as

non-slip mats, on the dashboard, or it could be damaged by the substances in the materials.

Glove compartment Opening

Press the button. The covers open upward and downward and the lighting in the glove com partment switches on.

Close the glove compartment again im mediately

Close the glove compartment immediately af ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc cur during accidents.

Closing Push the lower cover closed.

USB interface for data transfer

Port for importing and exporting data, such as music collections, refer to page 207, on USB devices.

Observe the following when connecting:

Seite 147

Storage compartments Controls

147 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Do not use force when plugging the con nector into the USB interface.

Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB interface.

Do not connect a USB hard drive. Do not use the USB interface to recharge

external devices.

Center armrest front Storage compartment A storage compartment is located under the armrest between the front seats and, depend ing on the vehicle's equipment, also a cover for the mobile phone cradle or the snap-in adapter. Details on this mobile phone cradle, refer to page 247.

Opening

Push cover down slightly and press the button. The cover folds upward.

Connection for an external audio device You can connect an external audio device such as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker system: AUX-IN port, refer to page 212. USB audio interface, refer to page 212.

Rear center armrest BMW X6 and BMW X5 with 3rd row seats

Pull on the loop and fold down the center arm rest.

BMW X5 without 3rd row seats

Unlock the center armrest with the button in the lower section of the opening and fold down.

Storage compartments Compartments are located in the doors, in the center console in the front and rear as well as in the rear console in the BMW X6. Storage nets are located on the backrests of the front seats.

Items in the storage nets Do not stow hard or sharp-edged objects

in the storage nets; otherwise there is an in creased risk of injury in the event of an acci dent.

Seite 148

Controls Storage compartments

148 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Clothes hooks BMW X5 The clothes hooks are located at the grab han dles in the rear.

BMW X6

To fold out, press against upper edge.

Do not obstruct view When suspending clothing from the

hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driv er's vision.

No heavy objects Do not hang heavy objects from the

hooks; otherwise, they may present a danger to passengers during braking and evasive ma neuvers.

Cupholders Notes

Shatter-proof containers and no hot drinks

Use light and shatter-proof containers and do not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the increased danger of injury in an accident.

Unsuitable containers Do not forcefully push unsuitable con

tainers into the cupholders. This may result in damage.

Front

Slide the cover back.

Rear

BMW X5

Unlock the center armrest with the button in the lower section of the opening and fold down.

Press the button; the cover folds forward.

With 3rd row seats:

Seite 149

Storage compartments Controls

149 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Fold down the center armrest. Press the but ton; the cupholders are opened.

The cupholders of the 3rd row seats are lo cated in the center console between the seats.

BMW X6

Slide the cover forward.

Folding down the rear seat backrest and using the ski bag

Remove the beverage container before folding the rear seat backrest forward or using the ski bag; otherwise it may cause damage.

Storage compartments in the cargo area Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the fol lowing storage compartments can be found in the cargo area: Storage compartments behind the remov

able side panels on the right and left in the cargo area and under the cargo floor cover, storage compartment on the right in the cargo area.

Storage well under the cargo floor cover. Retaining straps on the left and right side

trim for fastening small objects. Lashing rail with lashing eyes. You can se

cure heavy-duty cargo straps on the lash ing eyes. They can be removed at the notches in the rails. To move the lashing eyes, press the button.

Read and comply with the information en closed with the heavy-duty cargo straps.

Floor panel flap

To access the onboard vehicle tool kit etc.

To open, swing up the flap by the handle, refer to arrow. The cargo floor cover is lockable.

Adaptive fixing system The adaptive fixing system is used to divide up the cargo area. It consists of two brackets with a telescopic rail and retaining straps. These are guided into the two rails on the cargo area floor.

Securing cargo Before using the adaptive fixing system,

fold up and lock the rear seat backrest; other wise, the cargo could be thrown into the vehi cle interior in an accident.

Seite 150

Controls Storage compartments

150 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

1 Brackets 2 Telescopic rail 3 Notch in the cargo area rail

Mounting brackets The two brackets are connected with a tele scopic rail.

1. Insert the brackets at the respective notch in the rail on the cargo area floor.

2. Press down the brackets to push them into the desired position.

3. Check the firm seating of the brackets. They must be clearly heard to engage.

No cargo on brackets Do not lay cargo on the brackets, as oth

erwise they could be unlocked.

Dividing up cargo area

The cargo can be positioned as follows: Between the rear seat backrest and the

telescopic rail Between the telescopic rail and the retain

ing strap

Positioning cargo between telescopic rail and retaining strap:

1. Lay the cargo on the telescopic rail. Press the button, arrow 1, and route the retaining strap around the cargo, arrow 2.

2. Hook the retaining strap into the mount 3 on the telescopic rail.

3. Press the button of the bracket, arrow 1. The retaining strap is tensioned.

It is also possible to hook the two retaining straps onto each other. When the adaptive fixing system is no longer needed, unhook the retaining strap and guide it back into the bracket holding the hook to prevent damage and injury. Then slide the fastening system toward the front in order to permit the best possible use of the cargo area.

Removing brackets Press down the brackets, slide them up to the notches of the rails and remove them. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the adaptive fixing system can be stored under the cargo floor panel in the cargo area.

Ski bag The ski bag is designed for safe, clean trans port of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to 2 snowboards. Skis with a length of up to 6 ft/2.10 m can be stowed using the ski bag. When stowing skis with a length of 6 ft/2.10 m, the capacity of the ski bag is reduced as the bag narrows.

Folding in display screen Before loading the ski bag, fold in the

display screen of the DVD systems in the rear; otherwise, the display screen could be dam aged.

Seite 151

Storage compartments Controls

151 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Loading 1. Fold down the center armrest, press the

button and open the cover.

2. Press the button again; the cover in the cargo area opens. If you press the button firmly the first time, this cover also opens.

3. Extend the ski bag between the front seats and fill it.

4. Attach the retaining strap: BMW X5: insert the latch plate of the ski bag retaining strap into the center safety belt buckle that is marked CENTER.

BMW X6: attach the hook of the ski bag retain ing strap to the eyelet on the backrest.

Only stow clean skis in the ski bag. Wrap sharp edges to prevent damage.

Securing cargo

After loading, secure the ski bag and its con tents. Tighten the retaining strap on the ten sioning buckle for this purpose.

Securing the ski bag Secure the ski bag in this way. Failure to

do so may cause it to endanger occupants dur ing braking or evasive maneuvers.

To store the ski bag, perform the above steps in reverse order.

Removing ski bag The ski bag can be completely removed, e.g., for faster drying or to allow it to be put to other uses.

1. Pull the handle forward, arrow 1. 2. Take out the ski bag upward, arrow 2. 3. Close the cover in the cargo area. More information on the various inserts availa ble can be obtained from the service center.

Seite 152

Controls Storage compartments

152 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Seite 153

Storage compartments Controls

153 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Driving tips This section provides you with information

useful in dealing with specific driving and operating conditions.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Things to remember when driving Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Breaking-in period General information Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to each other. The following instructions will help achieve a long vehicle life and good economy.

Engine and differential Always obey all official speed limits.

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km Do not exceed the maximum engine and road speeds: For a gasoline engine, 4,500 rpm and

100 mph/160 km/h. For a diesel engine, 3,500 rpm and

93 mph/150 km/h. Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the transmission's kickdown mode for the initial miles.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 km The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased.

Tires Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full

traction potential until after an initial breaking- in period. Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.

Brake system Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized contact and wear patterns between brake pads and rotors. Drive cautiously during this break- in period.

Following part replacement The same breaking in procedures should be observed if any of the components mentioned above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life.

General driving notes Closing tailgate

Drive with the tailgate closed Only drive with the tailgate closed; other

wise, passengers and other road users may be endangered or the vehicle may be damaged if an accident occurs or during braking or evasive maneuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the passenger compartment.

If, despite this, the vehicle must be driven with the tailgate open: Drive moderately. Close all windows and the glass sunroof/

panoramic glass sunroof. Greatly increase the blower speed.

Seite 156

Driving tips Things to remember when driving

156 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Hot exhaust system Hot exhaust system High temperatures are generated in the

exhaust system. Do not remove the heat shields installed and never apply undercoating to them. Make sure that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves, grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hot exhaust system during driving, while in idle po sition mode, or when parked. Such contact could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of seri ous personal injury as well as property dam age. Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.

Diesel particulate filter Soot particles are collected in the diesel partic ulate filter and periodically burned away at high temperatures. The following may occur during the cleaning period, which lasts several minutes: The engine temporarily runs somewhat

more roughly. A slightly higher engine speed is necessary

to achieve the accustomed performance. Noises occur and a minimal amount of

smoke emerges from the exhaust until shortly after the engine is switched off.

Mobile communication devices in the vehicle

Mobile communication devices in the ve hicle

It is not recommended to use mobile phones, such as mobile phones without a direct con nection to an external aerial in the vehicle's passenger compartment. Otherwise, the vehi cle electronics and mobile communication de vices can interfere with each other. In addition, there is no assurance that the radiation gener

ated during transmission will be discharged from the vehicle interior.

Hydroplaning On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can form between the tires and road surface. This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface, ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle.

Hydroplaning When driving on wet or slushy roads, re

duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.

The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tire tread depth decreases. Minimum tread depth, refer to page 284.

Driving through water Maximum water depth: BMW X5: 20 inches/50 cm. BMW X6: 17 inches/45 cm.

Adhere to water depth and speed limita tions

Do not exceed this water depth and walking speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the transmission may be damaged.

Braking safely Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand ard feature. Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations when this is neces sary. The vehicle maintains steering responsive ness. You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering effort. Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active mode.

Seite 157

Things to remember when driving Driving tips

157 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Do not let your foot rest on the brake pedal

Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. Even light but consistent pedal pressure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.

Objects in the area around the pedals No objects in the area around the pedals Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other

objects out of the area of motion of the pedals; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects. Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas tened again when they are returned after being removed, such as for cleaning.

Driving in wet conditions When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every few miles. Ensure that this action does not endanger other road users. The heat generated in this process helps dry the brake discs and pads. In this way braking efficiency will be available when you need it.

Hills Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear in which the least braking is required. Otherwise, the brake system may overheat, re sulting in a reduction in the brake system effi ciency. You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down in the manual mode of the au tomatic transmission, refer to page 75.

Avoid load on the brakes Avoid placing excessive load on the

brake system. Light but consistent brake pres sure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.

Do not drive in neutral Do not drive in neutral or with the engine

stopped, as doing so disables engine braking. In addition, steering and brake assist is un available with the engine stopped.

Brake disc corrosion Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina tion on the brake pads are furthered by: Low mileage. Extended periods when the vehicle is not

used at all. Infrequent use of the brakes. Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure that must be exerted by the pads during brake applications to clean the discs is not reached. Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef fect that generally cannot be corrected.

Condensation under the parked vehicle When using the automatic climate control, condensation water develops that exits under neath the vehicle. Therefore, traces of condensed water under the vehicle are normal.

Driving on poor roads Your vehicle combines an all-wheel drive sys tem with the advantages of a normal passen ger car.

Do not drive on unpaved terrain Do not drive on unpaved terrain, as oth

erwise the vehicle may be damaged.

Seite 158

Driving tips Things to remember when driving

158 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

For your own safety and the safety of passen gers and the vehicle, adhere to the following points: Familiarize yourself with the vehicle before

driving; never take risks. Adjust speeds according to road condi

tions. The steeper and rougher the road surface is, the lower the speed should be.

When driving on steep uphill and downhill grades: the engine oil and coolant should be filled nearly to the MAX mark. BMW X5: the vehicle can be driven on up hill and downhill grades up to 50 %.

Use Hill Descent Control HDC, refer to page 108, on steep downhill grades. BMW X5: the vehicle can be driven away on uphill grades of up to 33 %. The per missible body roll is 50 %.

Watch for stones, holes, and other obsta cles and drive around these where possi ble.

On bumps and rough roads, avoid contact between the vehicle body and the ground. The maximum ground clearance is 8 in ches/20 cm and may vary with the loaded cargo.

When driving through water, do not exceed the maximum water height. BMW X5: 20 inches/50 cm BMW X6: 17 inches/45 cm Drive at walking speed only and do not stop the vehicle.

After driving through water, press on the brake pedal several times at low speeds to dry the brakes.

Depending on the prevailing terrain, acti vate Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to page 106, briefly.

When the wheels spin, accelerate to ena ble the driving stability control systems to distribute the drive force to the individual wheels.

The stone chip guard reduces the risk of damage to painted vehicle components, such as in the area of the side skirts and wheel arches. Your service center will be glad to advise you.

After driving on poor roads Adhere to the following points to ensure vehi cle safety: Remove excessive accumulations of dirt

and mud from the vehicle body. Clear mud, snow, ice, etc., from the wheels

and tires and check for damage.

Seite 159

Things to remember when driving Driving tips

159 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Loading Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

General information Overloading the vehicle To avoid exceeding the approved carry

ing capacity of the tires, never overload the ve hicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and increases the rate at which damage develops inside the tires. This could result in a sudden loss of tire inflation pressure.

No fluids in the cargo area Make sure that fluids do not leak into the

cargo area; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam aged.

Determining the load limit

1. Locate the following statement on your ve hicles placard: The combined weight of occupants

and cargo should never exceed XXX kg

or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the vehicle and unstable driving situations may result.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load ca pacity. For example, if the YYY amount equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs pas sengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs: 1,400 lbs minus 750 lbs = 650 lbs.

5. Determine the combined weight of lug gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi cle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transfered to your vehicle. Consult the manual for transport ing a trailer to determine how this may re duce the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Load BMW X5:

Seite 160

Driving tips Loading

160 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

BMW X6:

The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo. The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported.

Stowing cargo BMW X5

BMW X6

Seite 161

Loading Driving tips

161 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Stowing cargo Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not

occupied, secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle.

Heavy cargo: stow as far forward and as low as possible, ideally directly behind the backrests.

Cover sharp edges and corners. Do not pile cargo higher than the top edge

of the backrests. If necessary, fold down the rear backrests

to stow cargo. Place protective material around any

sharp-edged or pointed objects that could bump against the rear window while the vehicle is in motion.

Securing cargo Lashing eyes in the cargo area

BMW X5

BMW X6

Securing cargo Smaller and lighter items: secure with re

taining straps, a cargo net or draw straps. Larger and heavy objects: secure with

cargo straps. Four lashing eyes mounted in the cargo area are used to secure these cargo straps, refer to illustrations. Adhere to the information included with the cargo straps.

Securing cargo Stow and secure the cargo as described

above; otherwise it may present a danger to the occupants, for instance during braking and avoidance maneuvers. Do not stow any heavy and hard objects in the passenger compartment without securing them; otherwise, they may present a danger to occupants, for instance during braking and avoidance maneuvers. Never exceed either the approved gross vehi cle weight or either of the approved axle loads, as excessive loads can pose a safety hazard, and may also place you in violation of traffic safety laws. Use only the lashing eyes pictured to fasten the heavy-duty cargo straps. Do not secure cargo using the upper top tether, refer to page 63, mounting points; otherwise, these may become damaged.

Roof-mounted luggage rack Notes A special rack system is available as an op tional accessory.

Attachment Follow the installation instructions for the roof- mounted luggage rack.

Seite 162

Driving tips Loading

162 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for tilting and opening the glass sunroof/panor amic glass sunroof.

Loading Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major ef fect on vehicle handling and steering re sponse. Therefore, note the following when loading and driving: Do not exceed the approved roof/axle

loads and the approved gross vehicle weight.

Distribute the roof load uniformly. The roof load should not be too large in

area. Always load the heaviest pieces on the

bottom. Fasten the roof-mounted luggage se

curely, for instance using lashing straps. Do not let objects project into the opening

path of the tailgate. Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration

and braking maneuvers. Take corners gen tly.

Seite 163

Loading Driving tips

163 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Saving fuel Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

General information Your vehicle contains advanced technology for the reduction of fuel consumption and emis sions. Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif ferent factors. The implementation of certain measures, driv ing style and regular maintenance, refer to page 293, can have an influence on fuel con sumption and on the environmental impact.

Remove unnecessary cargo Additional weight increases fuel consumption.

Remove attached parts following use Remove unneeded auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage racks after use. Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.

Closing the windows and glass sunroof/panoramic glass sunroof Driving with the glass sunroof/panoramic glass sunroof and windows open results in increased air resistance and raises fuel consumption.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Check and, if necessary, correct the tire infla tion pressure, refer to page 275, at least twice a month and before starting on a long trip. Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and tire wear.

Drive away without delay Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds. This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature.

Look well ahead when driving Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi cle driving ahead of you. Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces fuel consumption.

Avoid high engine speeds Driving at a low engine speed reduces fuel consumption and minimizes wear.

Seite 164

Driving tips Saving fuel

164 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Use coasting conditions When approaching a red light, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt. On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle roll. The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.

Switch off the engine during longer stops Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g., at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic congestion. Fuel savings are already achieved after the en gine is turned off for as little as 4 seconds.

Switch off any functions that are not currently needed Functions such as seat heating and the rear window defroster require a lot of energy and consume additional fuel, especially in city and stop-and-go traffic. Therefore, switch off these functions if they are not actually needed.

Have maintenance carried out Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle economy and operating life. Have the maintenance carried out by your service center. Please also note the BMW Maintenance Sys tem, refer to page 293.

Seite 165

Saving fuel Driving tips

165 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Navigation This chapter contains various examples of how the navigation system can guide you reliably to

your destination.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Navigation system Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

General information The navigation system can determine the pre cise position of the vehicle, with the aid of sat ellites and vehicle sensors, and can reliably guide you to every entered destination.

Entries in stationary vehicle Enter data only when the vehicle is sta

tionary, and always give priority to the applica ble traffic regulations in the event of any con tradiction between traffic and road conditions and the instructions issued by the navigation system. Failure to take to this precaution can place you in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants and other road users in danger.

Opening the navigation system

1. Press the button on the controller. 2. "Navigation"

The navigation system can also be called up directly using the button on the con

troller.

Navigation data Information on navigation data 1. "Navigation"

2. Open "Options". 3. "Navigation system version"

Information is displayed on the data ver sion.

Updating the navigation data

General information Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and can be updated. Current navigation data and the authorization code are available from your service center. Depending on the data volume, a data up

date may take several hours. Update during the trip to preserve battery. During the update, only the basic functions

of the navigation system are available. The status of the update can be viewed. After the updating process is complete, the

system restarts. Remove the medium with the navigation

data after the update.

Performing an update 1. Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD

player with the labeled side facing up. 2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis

play. 3. Enter the authorization code of the naviga

tion DVD. 4. Change the DVD if necessary. After the trip is interrupted, follow the instruc tions on the Control Display.

Viewing the status 1. Open "Options". 2. "Navigation update"

Seite 168

Navigation Navigation system

168 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Removing navigation DVD

1. Press button 1. The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.

2. Remove the DVD.

Seite 169

Navigation system Navigation

169 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Destination entry Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

At a glance In entering your destination you can select from the following options: Enter the destination manually, see below. Select the destination from the address

book, refer to page 172. Last destinations, refer to page 173. Special destinations, refer to page 173. Destination entry via map, refer to

page 175. Using the home address as the destina

tion, refer to page 173. Destination entry by voice, refer to

page 176. Destination entry via the Concierge serv

ice, refer to page 175. Entries in stationary vehicle Enter data only when the vehicle is sta

tionary, and always give priority to the applica ble traffic regulations in the event of any con tradiction between traffic and road conditions and the instructions issued by the navigation system. Failure to take to this precaution can place you in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants and other road users in danger.

Manual destination entry General information The system supports you in entering street names and house numbers by automatically completing the entry and providing entry com parisons, refer to page 24. Stored town/city and street names can be called up quickly. If the existing entries should not be

changed, the entries for the state/province and town/city can be skipped.

Destination guidance is started to the town/city center if no street is entered.

Entering a state/province

1. Press the button. 2. "Navigation" 3. "Enter address"

4. Select "State/Province" or the displayed state/province.

Seite 170

Navigation Destination entry

170 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Entering a town/city 1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis

played town/city.

2. Select letters, if necessary. The list is narrowed down further with each entry.

3. Move the controller to the right. 4. Select the name of the town/city from the

list. If there are several towns/cities with the same name:

1. Change to the list of town/city names. 2. Highlight the town/city. 3. Select the town/city.

Entering the postal code 1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis

played town/city. 2. Select the symbol. 3. Select the numbers. 4. Change to the list of postal codes and

towns/cities. 5. Highlight the entry. 6. Selecting an entry.

Entering a street and intersection 1. Select "Street" or the displayed street. 2. Enter a street and intersection in the same

way as you would enter a town/city.

If there are several streets with the same name:

1. Change to the list of street names. 2. Highlight the street. 3. Select the street.

Alternative: enter the street address and house number 1. Select "Street" or the displayed street. 2. Enter the street as you would the town/

city. 3. "House number" 4. Select the numbers. 5. Change to the list of house numbers. 6. Select a house number or range of house

numbers.

Street does not exist in the destination city/town The desired street does not exist in the speci fied city/town because it belongs to another part of the city/town.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Enter address" 3. Select "Street" or the displayed street. 4. Change to the list of street names. 5. Select "In" with the state/province cur

rently displayed. All streets of the selected state/province are offered. The associated town/city is displayed after the street name.

Seite 171

Destination entry Navigation

171 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

6. Select the letters. 7. Change to the list of street names. 8. Highlight the street. 9. Select the street.

Starting destination guidance after entering the destination 1. "Accept destination" 2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another

destination" Add, refer to page 177, a destination as a further destination.

Address book Create contacts, refer to page 258.

Selecting a destination from the address book 1. "Navigation" 2. "Address book"

Contacts with addresses are displayed if these addresses have been checked as destinations in the contacts. If the contacts with addresses from the mobile phone are not displayed, they first need to be checked as destinations, refer to page 259.

3. Select a contact in the list or, if desired, with "A-Z search".

4. "Business address" or "Home address"

Storing the destination in the address book After entering the destination, store the desti nation in the address book.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Guidance" 4. Open "Options". 5. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing

contact"

6. Select an existing contact, if available. 7. "Business address" or "Home address" 8. Enter "Last name" and, if necessary, "First

name". 9. "Store in vehicle"

Storing the position The current position can be stored in the ad dress book.

1. "Navigation" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Store position as contact" or "Add

position to contact"

Seite 172

Navigation Destination entry

172 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

4. Depending on the selection, choose an ex isting contact from the list. Select the type of address and enter the first and last name.

5. "Store in vehicle"

Editing or deleting an address 1. "Navigation" 2. "Address book" 3. Highlight the entry. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry"

Using the home address as the destination The home address must be stored. Specify the home address, refer to page 251.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Address book" 3. "Home"

4. "Start guidance"

Last destinations At a glance The destinations previously entered are stored automatically. These destinations can be called up and used as a destination for destination guidance.

Calling up the last destination 1. "Navigation" 2. "Last destinations"

Starting destination guidance 1. "Navigation" 2. "Last destinations" 3. Select the destination. 4. "Start guidance"

Editing the destination 1. "Navigation" 2. "Last destinations" 3. Highlight the destination. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Edit destination"

Deleting the last destinations 1. "Navigation" 2. "Last destinations" 3. Highlight the destination. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last

destinations"

Special destinations General information Even with the latest navigation data, informa tion on specific special destinations may have

Seite 173

Destination entry Navigation

173 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

changed; for example, gas stations might not be in operation.

Opening the search for special destinations Selection of special destinations, such as ho tels or tourist attractions.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Points of Interest" 3. Select the search function.

Online Search 1. "Google Local Search" 2. Select a special destination. 3. Select the symbol. 4. "Start guidance"

A-Z search 1. "A-Z search" 2. "Town/City" 3. Select or enter the town/city. 4. "Category" 5. Select the category. 6. "Category details"

For some special destinations, multiple category details can be selected. Move the controller to the left to leave the category details.

7. "Keyword" 8. Enter the keyword.

A list of the special destinations is dis played.

9. Select a special destination. Details are displayed. If multiple details are stored, you can leaf through the pages. If a phone number is available, a connec tion can be established if necessary.

10. Select the symbol. 11. "Start guidance" or "Add as another

destination" Add a destination as a further destination, refer to page 177.

"Start search": if a search term is not entered, the search is repeated with the previous search term.

Category search 1. "Category search" 2. "Town/City" 3. Select or enter the town/city. 4. "Category" 5. Select the category. 6. "Category details"

For some special destinations, multiple category details can be selected. Move the controller to the left to leave the category details.

7. "Start search" A list of the special destinations is dis played.

8. Select a special destination. Details are displayed. If multiple details are stored, you can leaf through the pages. If a phone number is available, a connec tion can be established if necessary.

9. Select the symbol. 10. "Start guidance" or "Add as another

destination" Add a destination as a further destination, refer to page 177.

Display of special destinations List of special destinations: special destina tions are arranged by distance and appear with a directional arrow pointing to the special des tination.

Seite 174

Navigation Destination entry

174 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

In the splitscreen, special destinations of the selected category are displayed in the map view as symbols. The display depends on the scale of the map and the category.

Destination entry via the Concierge service A connection is established to the Concierge service, refer to page 261.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Enter address" 3. Open "Options". 4. "BMW Assist dest. entry"

Displaying special destinations in the map To display symbols of the special destinations in the map view:

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Display Points of Interest" 5. Select the setting.

Destination entry by map Selecting the destination 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map"

The current position of the vehicle is dis played on the map.

3. "Interactive map"

4. Select the destination with crosshairs. To change the scale: turn the control

ler. To shift the map: move the controller in

the required direction. To shift the map diagonally: move the

controller in the required direction and turn it.

Specifying the street If the system does not recognize the street, one of the following pieces of information is displayed: A street name in the vicinity. The county. The coordinates of the destination.

Additional functions Additional functions are available on the inter active map after the controller is pressed.

Select the symbol. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination"

Seite 175

Destination entry Navigation

175 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Add a destination as a further destination, refer to page 177.

"Exit interactive map": return to the map view.

"View in northern direction" or "View in driving direction"

"Display destination": the map section around the destination is displayed.

"Display current location": the map section around your current location is displayed.

"Find points of interest": the search for special destinations is started.

Destination entry by voice General information Instructions for voice activation system, re

fer to page 25. When making a destination entry by voice,

you can change between voice operation and iDrive.

To have the available spoken instructions read out loud: Voice commands.

Saying the entries The town/city, street, and house number

can be entered using a single command. Spell the entry if the spoken language and

the language of the system differ. Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exag

gerating the pronunciation and inserting lengthy pauses between the letters.

The methods of entry depend on the navi gation data in use and the country and lan guage settings.

Entering the address in a command

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. Enter address

3. Wait for a request from the system. 4. Say the address in the suggested order. 5. Continue making the entry as prompted by

the system. If necessary, individually name the sepa rate components of the address, e.g., the town/city.

Entering a town/city separately The town/city can be said as a complete word. With the destination entry menu displayed:

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. City or Spell city 3. Wait for the system to prompt you for the

town/city. 4. Say the name of the town/city, or name at

least the first three letters. Depending on the entry, up to 20 towns/ cities may be suggested.

5. Select a location: Select a recommended town/

city: Yes. Select a different town/city: New

entry. Select an entry: Entry ..., for instance,

entry 2. Spell an entry: Spell city.

6. Continue making the entry as prompted by the system.

If there are several towns/cities with the same name: Towns/cities of the same name are grouped in a list and displayed as one location followed by an ellipsis.

1. Select an entry: Yes or Entry ..., e. g., En try 2.

2. Select the desired town/city.

Seite 176

Navigation Destination entry

176 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Entering a street or intersection separately Enter a street and intersection in the same way as you would enter a town/city.

Entering a house number separately Depending on the data in the navigation sys tem, house numbers up to number 2,000 can be entered.

1. House number 2. Say the house number.

Say each digit separately. 3. Continue making the entry as prompted by

the system.

Starting destination guidance Start guidance

Planning a trip with intermediate destinations New trip A trip can be planned with several intermediate destinations.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Move the controller to the left if necessary. 4. "Guidance" 5. "Enter new destination" 6. Select the type of destination entry.

7. Enter the intermediate destination. 8. "Start guidance"

Entering intermediate destinations A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can be entered for a trip.

1. "Enter new destination" 2. Select the type of destination entry. 3. Enter the intermediate destination. 4. "Add as another destination"

The intermediate destination is entered in the destination list and is highlighted.

5. Turn the controller until the intermediate destination is located at the desired loca tion in the list.

6. Press the controller.

Starting the trip 1. After all intermediate destinations are en

tered, highlight the first destination. If the second destination, for example, is highlighted when destination guidance is started, the first destination is skipped.

2. "Start guidance" This symbol marks the active leg of the

trip.

Storing a trip Up to 30 trips can be stored in the trip list. If necessary, delete existing trips to be able to store new trips.

1. Open "Options". 2. "Store trip" 3. Enter a name for the trip. 4. "OK"

Selecting a stored trip 1. "Navigation" 2. "Stored trips"

Seite 177

Destination entry Navigation

177 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

3. Select a stored trip. 4. "Start guidance"

Changing the trip direction Intermediate destinations are displayed in re verse order in the list.

1. "Map" 2. "Guidance" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Reverse order of trip dest."

Intermediate destination options 1. "Map" 2. "Guidance" 3. "Display all trip destinations" 4. Select an intermediate destination.

"Edit destination" "Reposition dest. in the trip": move an

intermediate destination to another po sition in the list.

"Delete dest. in the trip" "Go to next dest. in the trip"

Some options are not available for certain trips.

Deleting a stored trip 1. "Navigation" 2. "Stored trips" 3. Highlight the desired trip. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip"

Opening the last trip 1. "Navigation" 2. "Stored trips" 3. "Last trip" 4. "Start guidance"

Seite 178

Navigation Destination entry

178 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Destination guidance Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Starting destination guidance 1. "Navigation" 2. Make a destination entry, refer to

page 170. 3. "Accept destination" 4. "Start guidance" The route is shown on the Control Display. The distance to the destination/intermediate destination and the estimated time of arrival are displayed in the map view. The arrow view is displayed in the Head-up Display and in some cases on the Control Dis play.

Terminating destination guidance 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Guidance" 4. "Stop guidance"

Continuing destination guidance If the destination was not reached during the last trip, destination guidance can be resumed. "Resume guidance"

Route criteria General information The route calculated can be influenced by

selecting certain criteria. The route criteria can be changed when

the destination is entered and during desti nation guidance.

Road types are part of the navigation data and are taken into consideration when planning a route, e.g., avoid highways.

The recommended route may differ from the route you would take based on per sonal experience.

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Destination guidance with traffic bulletins, refer to page 185.

Changing the route criteria 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Route preference" 4. Select the criterion:

"Fast route": time-optimized route, being a combination of the shortest possible route and the fastest roads.

"ECO PRO route": optimized com bination of the fastest and shortest route.

Seite 179

Destination guidance Navigation

179 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

"Short route": short distance, irre spective of how fast or slow progress will be.

"Alternative routes": if available, alter native routes are suggested during ac tive destination guidance. The individual suggestions are high lighted in color.

5. Specify additional criteria for the route, if necessary: "Avoid highways": highways are

avoided wherever possible. "Avoid toll roads": toll roads are

avoided wherever possible. "Avoid ferries": ferries are avoided

where possible.

Route Different views of the route are available during destination guidance: Arrow view. List of route sections. Map view, refer to page 181. Arrow view in the Head-up Display, refer to

page 127.

Arrow view The following information is displayed during destination guidance: Large arrow: indicates the current direction

of travel.

Street name of the road currently being driven on.

Small arrow: indicates the next change in direction.

Intersection view. Lane information. Traffic bulletins. Distance to the next change in direction. Street name at the next change in direc

tion.

Lane information On multi-lane roads, the recommended lanes are marked in the arrow view by a triangle. Solid triangle: best lane. Empty triangle: possible lane. However,

another lane change may be needed shortly.

Displaying a list of route sections When destination guidance is active, a list of the route sections can be displayed. The driv ing distance and traffic bulletins are displayed for each route section.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Route information" 3. Highlight a route section.

The route section is displayed on the split screen.

Bypassing a section of the route Calculate a new route for a route section.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Route information"

Seite 180

Navigation Destination guidance

180 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

3. "New route for"

4. Turn the controller. Enter the number of kilometers within which you would like to return to the original route.

5. Press the controller.

Resuming the original route If the route section should no longer be by passed:

1. "Navigation" 2. "Route information" 3. "New route for:" 4. "Remove blocking"

Gas station recommendation The remaining range is calculated and gas sta tions along the route are displayed if needed. Even with the latest navigation data, informa tion on individual special destinations may have changed; for example, gas stations might not be in operation.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Route information" 3. "Recommended refuel"

A list of the gas stations is displayed. 4. Highlight a gas station.

The position of the gas station is shown on the split screen.

5. Select the gas station.

6. Select the symbol. 7. "Start guidance": destination guidance to

the selected gas station is started. "Add as another destination": the gas sta tion is added to the route.

Destination guidance through voice instructions Switching spoken instructions on/off The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Voice instructions"

Repeating a spoken instruction 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Highlight the symbol. 4. Press the controller twice.

Volume of spoken instructions Turn the volume knob while giving an instruc tion until the desired volume is set. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Saving the spoken instructions on the programmable memory buttons The function for switching the spoken instruc tions on/off can be stored on a programmable memory button, refer to page 23, for quick ac cess.

Map view Selecting the map view 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map"

Seite 181

Destination guidance Navigation

181 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

At a glance

1 Function bar 2 Route section with traffic obstruction 3 Traffic sign for traffic obstruction 4 Planned route 5 Current location 6 Upper status field 7 Lower status field

Lines in the map Streets and routes are displayed in different colors and styles depending on their classifica tion. Dashed lines represent railways and ferry connections. Country borders are indicated by thin lines.

Traffic obstructions Small triangles along the planned route indi cate route sections with traffic obstructions, depending on the map scale. The direction of the triangles indicates the direction of the ob struction. The traffic signs indicate the significance of the obstruction. Red traffic sign: the obstruction affects the

planned route or direction. Grey traffic sign: the obstruction does not

affect the planned route or direction. Traffic bulletins, refer to page 183.

Planned route After destination guidance is started, the plan ned route is displayed on the map.

Status fields Show/hide: press the controller. Upper status field: time, telephone, and en

tertainment details. Lower status field: symbol for active desti

nation guidance, status of traffic bulletins, time of arrival, and distance to destination.

Function bar The following functions are available in the function bar:

Symbol Function

Start/end destination guidance.

Switch spoken instructions on/ off.

Change the route criteria.

Search for a special destina tion.

Display traffic bulletins.

Open the interactive map.

Set the map view.

Change the scale.

To change to the function bar, move the con troller to the left.

Changing the map section "Interactive map"

To shift the map: move the controller in the required direction.

To shift the map diagonally: move the con troller in the required direction and turn it.

Changing the scale 1. Select the symbol. 2. To change the scale: turn the controller.

Seite 182

Navigation Destination guidance

182 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Automatically scaled map scale In the map view facing north, turn the control ler in any direction until the AUTO scale is dis played. The entire route between the current location and the destination is displayed on the map.

Settings for the map view The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Settings" 5. To set the map view: "Day/night mode"

Select and create the necessary settings depending on the light conditions. "Traffic conditions/gray map" active: the setting is disregarded.

"Satellite images" Depending on availability and resolution, satellite images are displayed at scales of approx. 1 mile to 600 miles/2 km to 1,000 km.

"Perspective view in 3D" Prominent areas that are contained in the navigation data are displayed on the map in 3D.

"Traffic conditions/gray map" The map is optimized for displaying traffic bulletins, refer to page 184. Symbols for the special destinations are no longer displayed.

Map view for splitscreen The map view can be selected for the split screen independently from the main screen.

1. Open "Options". 2. "Split screen"

3. Move the controller to the right repeatedly until the split screen is selected.

4. Select "Split screen content" or the scale. 5. Select the map view.

"Arrow display" "Map facing north" "Map direction of travel" "Map view with perspective" "Position" "Exit ramp view": selected blind drive

ways are displayed three dimension ally.

"Traffic conditions/gray map" 6. To change the scale: select the split

screen and turn the controller.

Traffic bulletins At a glance Display the traffic bulletins from radio sta

tions that broadcast the TI Traffic Informa tion of a traffic information service. Infor mation on traffic obstructions and hazards is updated continuously. Certain BMW models equipped with navi gation have the capability to display real- time traffic information. If your system has this capability the following additional terms and conditions apply: An End-User shall no longer have the right to use the Traffic Data in the event that the End-User is in material breach of the terms and conditions contained herein. A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear Channel Broadcasting, Inc. (Total Traffic Network) holds the rights to the traffic in cident data and RDS-TMC network through which it is delivered. You may not modify, copy, scan or use any other method to reproduce, duplicate, republish, transmit or distribute in any way any por

Seite 183

Destination guidance Navigation

183 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

tion of traffic incident data. You agree to in demnify, defend and hold harmless BMW of North America, LLC. (BMW NA) and Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates) against any and all claims, dam ages, costs or other expenses that arise di rectly or indirectly out of (a) your unauthor ized use of the traffic incident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b) your violation of this directive and/or (c) any unauthorized or unlawful activities by you in connection herewith. B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is infor mational only. User assumes all risk of use. Total Traffic Network, BMW NA, and their suppliers make no representations about content, traffic and road conditions, route usability, or speed. C. The licensed material is provided to li censee as is, and where is. Total Traf fic Network, including, but not limited to, any and all third party providers of any of the licensed material, expressly disclaims, to the fullest extent permitted by law, all warranties or representations with respect to the licensed material (including, without limitation, that the licensed material will be error-free, will operate without interruption or that the traffic data will be accurate), ex press, implied or statutory, including, with out limitation, the implied warranties of merchantability, non-infringement fitness for a particular purpose, or those arising from a course of dealing or usage of trade. D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. or BMW NA will be liable to you for any in direct, special, consequential, exemplary, or incidental damages (including, without limitation, lost revenues, anticipated reve nues, or profits relating to the same) arising from any claim relating directly or indirectly to use of the traffic data, and even if Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc., or BMW NA are aware of the possibility of such damages. These limitations apply to all claims, in cluding, without limitation, claims in con

tract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict liability). Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of inci dental or consequential damages, so those particular limitations may not apply to you.

The traffic bulletins are indicated on the map by symbols.

The traffic bulletins for the surrounding area are stored in a list.

The symbol in the function bar of the map view turns red if there are traffic bulle tins that affect the calculated route.

Switching the reception on/off 1. "Navigation" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Receive Traffic Info"

Opening the list of traffic bulletins 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Traffic Info"

First, traffic bulletins for the calculated route are displayed. The traffic bulletins are sorted by their dis tance from the current position of the vehi cle.

4. Select a traffic bulletin. "More information": display additional

information. 5. Scroll to the next or previous traffic bulletin

if required.

Traffic bulletins on the map "Traffic conditions/gray map" active: The Control Display changes to a black and white display. This enables a better view of the traffic bulletins. The day/night mode is disre

Seite 184

Navigation Destination guidance

184 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

garded in this setting. Symbols and special destinations are not displayed.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Settings" 5. "Traffic conditions/gray map"

Symbols in the map view Depending on the scale of the map and the lo cation of the traffic obstruction along the route, the symbols for the traffic obstructions are dis played.

Additional information in the map view Depending on the map scale, a traffic obstruc tion's length, direction, and impact are dis played in the map using triangles or gray bars along the calculated route. Red: traffic congestion Orange: stop-and-go traffic Yellow: heavy traffic Green: clear roads Gray: general traffic bulletins such as road

construction The displayed information depends on the par ticular traffic information service.

Filtering traffic bulletins You can set which traffic bulletins appear on the map.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Open "Options".

4. "Traffic Info categories" 5. Select the desired category.

Traffic bulletins of the selected category are displayed on the map. Traffic bulletins that are relevant to the

route are always shown. For your own safety, traffic bulletins that

notify you of potentially dangerous situa tions, such as wrong-way drivers, cannot be hidden.

Destination guidance with traffic bulletins

General information Detour suggestions from the navigation sys tem can be manually accepted when using semi-dynamic destination guidance. When us ing dynamic destination guidance, they are au tomatically accepted for route guidance.

Semi-dynamic destination guidance When traffic bulletin reception is switched on, semi-dynamic destination guidance is active. The destination guidance system takes the available traffic bulletins into account. A mes sage is displayed depending on the route, the traffic bulletins, and the possible detour routes. If possible, a detour is offered in case of traffic obstructions. The upper part of the message shows: Symbol of the first traffic obstruction, pos

sibly with the distance to the beginning of the obstruction.

Seite 185

Destination guidance Navigation

185 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Total length of the traffic obstructions on the route.

Time by which the trip is extended due to the traffic obstructions.

The lower part of the message shows: Detour recommendation with the distance

to the beginning of the detour. Difference between the length of the new

route compared to the original route. Time gained if the detour is taken com

pared to the original route with the traffic obstructions.

Both the original route, shown in white, and the detour are displayed on the split screen.

Accepting the detour "Detour"

In the event of special hazards, e. g., objects on the road, a message is displayed without a de tour suggestion. Detours can also be accepted if the traffic messages are called up in the list.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Traffic Info" 4. "Detour information" 5. "Detour"

Dynamic destination guidance The route is automatically changed in the event of traffic obstructions. The system does not point out traffic ob

structions along the original route. Traffic bulletins continue to be displayed

on the map. Depending on road type and the kind and

extent of the traffic obstruction, the calcu lated route may lead through the traffic ob struction.

Dangerous situations are displayed regard less of the setting.

Activating dynamic destination guidance 1. "Navigation" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Dynamic guidance"

Seite 186

Navigation Destination guidance

186 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

What to do if... Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

What to do if... The current transmission position cannot

be displayed? The vehicle is located in an unrecognized region, is in a poor reception area, or the system is currently determining the posi tion. Reception is usually best when you have an unobstructed view of the sky.

The destination without street information is not used for route guidance? When city has been input, no downtown can be determined. Input any street in the selected city and start destination guid ance.

The destination is not used for route guid ance? The destination data are not contained in the navigation data. Select a destination that is as close as possible to the original.

Letters for destination input cannot be se lected? The stored data do not contain the data of the destination. Select a goal that is as close as possible to the original.

Is the map displayed in shades of gray? "Traffic conditions/gray map" active:

The Control Display changes to a black and white display. This enables a better view of the traffic bulletins.

Spoken instructions are no longer output during route guidance in front of intersec tions? The area has not yet been fully recorded, or you have left the recommended route and the system requires a few seconds to calculate a new route suggestion.

Seite 187

What to do if... Navigation

187 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Entertainment This chapter helps assure your enjoyment when receiving radio stations and playing CDs, DVDs,

and tracks from the music collection.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Tone Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

General information The sound settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Treble, bass, balance, and fader "Treble": treble adjustment. "Bass": depth adjustment. "Balance": left/right volume distribution. "Fader": front/rear volume distribution.

Setting treble, bass, balance, and fader 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone"

3. Select the desired tone settings.

4. To adjust: turn the controller. 5. To store: press the controller.

Equalizer Setting for individual audio frequency ranges.

Adjusting the equalizer 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Equalizer" 4. Select the desired setting.

5. To adjust: turn the controller. 6. To store: press the controller.

Seite 190

Entertainment Tone

190 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Multi-channel playback, surround Choose between stereo and multi-channel playback, surround.

Setting multi-channel playback, surround 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Surround"

When surround is activated, multi-channel playback is simulated when a stereo audio track is played.

Volume "Speed volume": speed-dependent vol

ume control. "PDC": volume of the PDC signal com

pared to the entertainment sound output. "Gong": volume of the signal, such as the

safety belt reminder, compared to the en tertainment sound output.

"Microphone": volume of the microphone during a phone call.

"Loudspeak.": volume of the loudspeakers during a phone call.

The following volumes are only stored for the respective paired telephone: "Microphone", "Loudspeak.".

Adjusting the volume 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Volume settings" 4. Select the desired volume setting.

5. To adjust: turn the controller. 6. To store: press the controller.

Resetting the tone settings All tone settings can be reset to the default setting.

1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Reset"

Seite 191

Tone Entertainment

191 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Radio Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Controls

1 Volume, on/off 2 Change wave band 3 Change station/track 4 Change entertainment sources 5 Programmable memory buttons

Sound output Switching on/off When the ignition is switched off: press ON/OFF button on the radio.

Muting When the ignition is switched on or the engine is running: press the ON/OFF button on the radio.

AM/FM station Selecting a station 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" or "AM" 3. Select the desired station.

All saved stations are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Changing the station Turn the controller and press it or

Press the button

or Press the buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 12.

Storing a station 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" or "AM"

Seite 192

Entertainment Radio

192 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

3. Highlight the desired station.

4. Press the controller for an extended period. 5. Select the desired memory location. The stations are stored for the remote control currently in use. The stations can also be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons, refer to page 23.

Selecting a station manually Station selection via the frequency.

1. "Radio" 2. "FM" or "AM" 3. "Manual" 4. To select the frequency: turn the control

ler.

To store the station: press the controller for an extended period.

Renaming a station An FM station with changing station names can be renamed.

1. "Radio" 2. "FM"

3. Select the desired station. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Rename to:"

If necessary, wait for the desired name to be displayed.

The selected station name is added to the list of current stations and stored stations.

RDS RDS broadcasts additional information, such as the station name, in the FM wave band.

Switching the RDS on/off 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" 3. Open "Options". 4. "RDS"

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

HD Radio reception Many stations broadcast both analog and digi tal signals. License conditions HD Radio Technology manufactured under li cense from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio and the HD, HD Radio, and Arc logos are proprietary trade marks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

Seite 193

Radio Entertainment

193 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Activating/deactivating digital radio reception 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" or "AM" 3. Open "Options". 4. "HD Radio Reception" The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

This symbol is displayed in the status line when the audio signal is digital. When tuning to a station with a digital signal, it may take several seconds for the station to be played back in digital quality. Note on HD stations whose station name ends in ...HD or with ...HD1: In areas in which the station is not continu ously received in digital mode, the playback switches between analog and digital reception. In this case, switch off digital radio reception. Note on HD multicast stations whose station name ends in ...HD2, ...HD3, ...: In areas in which the station is not continu ously received in digital mode, the audible sig nal may be interrupted for several seconds. This is reception related.

Displaying additional information Some stations broadcast additional informa tion on the current track, such as the name of the artist.

1. Select the desired station. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Station info"

Selecting a substation This symbol indicates that a main station

also broadcasts additional substations. The station name of the main station ends in HD1. Station names of the substations end in HD2, HD3, etc.

1. Select the desired station.

2. Press the controller. 3. Select the substation. When reception is poor, the substation is muted.

Satellite radio General information The channels are offered in predefined pack ages. The packages must be enabled by tele phone.

Navigation bar overview

Symbol Function

Change the list view.

Select the category.

Direct channel entry

Timeshift

Open the My Favorites cate gory/open a favorite.

Manage the favorites.

Traffic Jump

The functions of the navigation bar symbols can also be stored on the programmable mem ory buttons, refer to page 23.

Managing a subscription To be able to enable or unsubscribe from the channels, you must have reception. It is usually at its best when you have an unobstructed view of the sky. The channel name is displayed in the status line.

Seite 194

Entertainment Radio

194 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Enabling channels The Unsubscribed Channels category contains all disabled channels.

1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Category"

4. Select the Unsubscribed Channels cate gory.

5. Select the desired channel. The phone number and an electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed.

6. Select the phone number to have the channel enabled.

You can unsubscribe from the channels again via this phone number.

Unsubscribing from channels 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. Open "Options".

4. "Manage subscription"

5. The phone number and an electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed.

6. Call Sirius to unsubscribe from the chan nels.

Selecting channels You can only listen to enabled channels. The selected channel is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Via the iDrive 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate

gory. 4. Select the desired channel.

Via the button on the radio Press the button. The next channel is selected.

Seite 195

Radio Entertainment

195 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Via direct channel entry 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Set channel" 4. Turn the controller until the desired chan

nel is reached and press the controller.

Storing a channel 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de

sired category. 4. Select the desired channel. 5. Press the controller again. 6. Press the controller again to confirm the

highlighted channel.

7. Select the desired memory location. The channels are stored for the remote control currently in use. The channels can also be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons, refer to page 23.

Changing the list view The list view changes every time the first sym bol on the navigation bar is pressed. Information on the channel is displayed.

Symbol Meaning

Channel name

Artist

Track

Selecting a category 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Category" 4. Select the desired category.

Timeshift Approx. one hour of the program being broad cast on the channel currently being listened to is stored in a buffer. Prerequisite: the signal must be available. The stored audio track can be played with a delay following the live broadcast. When the buffer is full, the older tracks are overwritten. The buffer is cleared when a new channel is selected.

Opening the timeshift function 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Replay - Time shift"

The red arrow shows the current playback position.

The time difference to the live broadcast is displayed next to the buffer bar.

For live transmissions "live".

Timeshift menu

Symbol Function

Go to the live broadcast

Playback/pause

Seite 196

Entertainment Radio

196 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Symbol Function

Next track

Previous track

Fast forward

Reverse

Automatic timeshift deactivated/ activated

Automatic timeshift When the function is activated, audio playback is stopped automatically in the event of: Incoming and outgoing telephone calls. Activation of the voice activation system. Muting. The audio playback then continues with a time delay. To activate:

1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Replay - Time shift" 4. "Automatic time shift" To deactivate:

"Automatic time shift"

Storing favorites Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favor ites list. Available favorites are artist, track, game, league, and team.

Storing the artist, track, or game It is only possible to store favorites that are currently being broadcast. The channel infor mation must be available.

1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de

sired category.

4. Select the desired channel. 5. Press the controller again. 6. Select the artist, track, or game.

Storing the league or team Leagues or teams can be added to the favor ites from a selection list.

1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Manage favorites" 4. "Add sports information"

5. Select the league. 6. Select "Add all teams" or the desired team.

Opening the favorites If an activated favorite is played back, the fol lowing message appears for approx. 20 sec onds "Favorite alert!".

"Favorites" Select the symbol while the message is shown.

The displayed favorite is played.

Seite 197

Radio Entertainment

197 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

If there is no message, the system changes to the My Favorites category. All favorites cur rently being broadcast can be selected from a list.

Managing the favorites

Activating/deactivating the favorites Favorites can be activated and deactivated globally and individually.

1. "Satellite radio" 2. "Manage favorites" 3. Select "Activate alert" or the desired favor

ites. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Deleting favorites 1. "Satellite radio" 2. "Manage favorites" 3. Highlight the desired favorite. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete entry"

Traffic Jump Traffic and weather information for a selected region is broadcast every few minutes.

Selecting a region 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Set jump" 5. Select the desired region. The region is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Activating/deactivating the jump 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Jump to:"

Information for the selected region is broad cast as soon as it is available. A new panel opens. Canceling the Traffic Jump: "Cancel".

Symbol Meaning

Information will be broadcast shortly.

Information is currently being broadcast.

Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic Jump.

Automatic update About twice a year, Sirius performs an update of the channel names and positions. The up date takes place automatically and may take several minutes.

Notes Reception may not be available in some

situations, such as under certain environ mental or topographic conditions. The sat ellite radio has no influence on this.

The signal may not be available in tunnels or underground garages; next to tall build ings; or near trees, mountains or other powerful sources of radio interference.

Stored stations General information It is possible to store up to 40 stations.

Calling up a station 1. "Radio" 2. "Presets" 3. Select the desired station.

Seite 198

Entertainment Radio

198 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Storing a station The station currently selected is stored.

1. "Radio" 2. "Presets" 3. "Store station"

4. Select the desired memory location. The list of stored stations is stored for the re mote control currently in use. The stations can also be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons, refer to page 23.

Deleting a station 1. "Radio" 2. "Presets" 3. Select the desired station. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete entry"

Seite 199

Radio Entertainment

199 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

CD/multimedia Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Controls

1 Volume, on/off 2 Eject CD/DVD 3 CD/DVD drive 4 Change station/track 5 Change the entertainment source 6 Programmable memory buttons

Sound output Switching on/off When the ignition is switched off: press ON/OFF button on the radio.

Muting When the ignition is switched on or the engine is running: press the ON/OFF button on the radio.

CD/DVD Playback

Loading the CD/DVD player Insert the CD/DVD with the printed side up. Playback begins automatically. Reading can take a few minutes with com pressed audio files.

Starting playback A CD/DVD is located in the CD/DVD player or in the CD/DVD changer.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the desired CD or DVD.

Symbol Meaning

CD/DVD player

... CD/DVD changer

CD/DVD player, rear

Playable formats DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-

RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD audio (video part only), DVD video.

CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA.

Seite 200

Entertainment CD/multimedia

200 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC, M4A.

Audio playback

Selecting the track using the button Press the button for the appropriate direction as often as necessary until

the desired track is played back.

Selecting the track using the iDrive

Audio CDs

Select the desired track to begin playback.

CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files Depending on the data, some letters and num bers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed cor rectly.

1. Select the directory if necessary. To change to a higher level directory: move the controller to the left.

2. Select the desired track to begin playback.

Displaying information on the track

If information about a track has been stored, it is displayed automatically: Interpret. Album track. Number of tracks on the CD/DVD. File name of track.

Random playback 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the desired CD or DVD.

Seite 201

CD/multimedia Entertainment

201 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

4. Open "Options". 5. "Random"

CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: all tracks within the selected directory are played in random order. Random mode is switched off when the audio source is changed and the ignition is switched off.

Fast forward/reverse Press and hold the button.

Video playback

Country codes Only DVDs with the code of the home region can be played back; also refer to the informa tion on the DVD.

Code Region

1 USA, Canada

2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Af rica

3 Southeast Asia

4 Australia, Central and South America, New Zealand

5 Northwest Asia, North Africa

6 China

0 All regions

Playback The video image is displayed on the Control Display up to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/h; in some countries, it is only displayed while the parking brake is set or the automatic transmis sion is in position P.

DVD video 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select a DVD with video content. 4. "DVD menu"

5. Start the DVD via the DVD menu.

Video menu To open the video menu: turn the controller during playback. Press the controller when "Back" is displayed.

Symbol Function

Open DVD menu

Starting playback

Pause

Stop

Next chapter

Previous chapter

Fast forward

Reverse

Seite 202

Entertainment CD/multimedia

202 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases every time the controller is pressed. To stop, start playback.

DVD menu 1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the

video menu. 2. "DVD menu"

The DVD menu is displayed. The display depends on the contents of the DVD.

3. To select menu items: move the controller and press it.

To change to the video menu: turn the control ler and press it.

DVD settings For some DVDs, settings can only be made via the DVD menu; refer also to the information on the DVD.

Selecting the language The languages that are available depend on the DVD.

1. Turn the controller during playback. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Audio/language"

4. Select the desired language.

Selecting the subtitles The subtitles that are available depend on the DVD.

1. Turn the controller during playback. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Subtitles" 4. Select the desired language or "Do not

display subtitles".

Setting the brightness, contrast and color 1. Turn the controller during playback. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Display settings" 4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color"

5. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller.

Selecting the zoom Display the video image on the entire screen.

1. Turn the controller during playback. 2. Open "Options".

Seite 203

CD/multimedia Entertainment

203 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

3. "Additional options" 4. "Zoom mode"

Selecting a track DVD video:

1. Turn the controller when the DVD menu is displayed.

2. Open "Options". 3. "Additional options" 4. "Select title" 5. Select the desired track.

Selecting the camera angle The availability of a different camera angle de pends on the DVD and the current DVD track.

1. Turn the controller during playback. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Additional options" 4. "Viewing angle" 5. Select the desired camera angle.

Opening the main menu, back These functions are not contained on every DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for use.

CD/DVD changer

In the glove compartment

The BMW CD/DVD changer for six CDs/DVDs is located in the glove compartment.

Controls and displays

1 Empty CD/DVD compartments 2 LEDs on the CD/DVD slot 3 Buttons for CD/DVD compartments 4 CD/DVD slot 5 Load CD/DVD compartments

Loading the CD/DVD compartments individually

1. Press the button. The LED on the first empty compartment flashes.

2. Select another compartment if necessary. 3. Wait for the LEDs on the DVD slot to flash. 4. Insert a single CD or DVD in the middle.

Seite 204

Entertainment CD/multimedia

204 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

The CD/DVD is drawn in automatically and placed into the selected compartment.

Sliding in CDs/DVDs Do not insert the CD/DVD until the LEDs

on the DVD slot are flashing; otherwise, the CD/DVD or the CD/DVD changer could be damaged. Do not continue to push on the CD/DVD; this may cause it to jam and prevent it from being able to eject again.

Loading all empty CD/DVD compartments

1. Press the button for a longer pe riod. The LEDs on the empty CD compartments flash.

2. Wait for the LEDs on the DVD slot to begin flashing and then insert each CD or DVD into the center of the slot. The CDs/DVDs are drawn in automatically and placed into the empty compartments.

Sliding in CDs/DVDs Do not insert the CD/DVD until the LEDs

on the DVD slot are flashing; otherwise, the CD/DVD or the CD/DVD changer could be damaged. Do not continue to push on the CD/DVD; this may cause it to jam and prevent it from being able to eject again.

After they are inserted, it may take several mi nutes for the CDs/DVDs to be read in.

Removing a single CD/DVD

1. Press the button. 2. Select the CD/DVD compartment.

The CD/DVD is partially ejected. 3. Remove the CD/DVD.

Removing all CDs/DVDs

1. Press the button for a longer period. 2. Remove the CDs/DVDs.

Malfunctions If all LEDs on the CD/DVD changer flash rap idly, the system is malfunctioning. To eliminate the malfunction:

1. Press one of the buttons:

The CD/DVD last inserted is ejected. 2. Remove the CD/DVD. If the LEDs stop flashing rapidly, the CD/DVD changer is functional again.

Audio playback The audio track of a DVD can be played back even if video playback is not possible in the ve hicle. Only the main film without the previews or ex tras can be played back.

Starting playback A DVD is located in the DVD changer.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the desired DVD.

Selecting a chapter using the button Press the button repeatedly until the desired chapter is played.

Selecting a chapter using iDrive 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD"

Seite 205

CD/multimedia Entertainment

205 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

3. Select the desired DVD. 4. Select the desired chapter.

Fast forward/reverse Press and hold the button.

Selecting the language The languages that are available depend on the DVD.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the desired DVD. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Audio/language" 6. Select the desired language.

Notes

CD/DVD player and changer Do not remove the cover BMW CD/DVD players and changers are

officially designated Class 1 laser products. Do not operate if the cover is damaged; otherwise, severe eye damage can result.

CDs and DVDs Use of CDs/DVDs Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs

with labels applied, as these can be come detached during playback due to heat buildup and can cause irrep arable damage to the device.

Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/DVDs with an adapter, e.g., single CDs; otherwise, the CDs or the adapter may jam and no longer eject.

Do not use combined CDs/DVDs, e.g., DVD Plus, as the CDs/DVDs can jam and will no longer eject.

General malfunctions CD/DVD changers and players have been

optimized for performance in vehicles. In some instances they may be more sensi tive to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary de vices would be.

If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check whether it has been inserted correctly.

Humidity High levels of humidity can lead to condensa tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens, and temporarily prevent playback.

Malfunctions involving individual CDs/ DVDs If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/ DVDs, this can be due to one of the following causes:

Self-recorded CDs/DVDs Possible reasons for malfunctions with

self-recorded CDs/DVDs are inconsistent data creation or recording processes, or poor quality or old age of the blank CD/ DVD.

Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side with a pen intended for this purpose.

Damage Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and

moisture. Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve. Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures

over 122 /50 , high humidity or direct sunlight.

CDs/DVDs with copy protection CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro tection feature by the manufacturer. This can mean that some CDs/DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to a limited extent.

Seite 206

Entertainment CD/multimedia

206 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

MACROVISION This product contains copyrighted technology that is based on multiple registered US patents and the intellectual property of the Macrovision Corporation and other manufacturers. The use of this copy protection must be approved by Macrovision. Media protected by this product - unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision - may only be used for private purposes. Copy ing of this technology is prohibited.

DTS Digital Surround

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Numbers: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & and other patents granted and registered in the USA and worldwide. DTS and the logo are registered trademarks & DTS Digital Surround and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS Inc. DTS, Inc. All rights reserved.

Music collection Storing music

General information Music tracks from CDs/DVDs and USB devices can be stored in the music collection on a hard disc in the vehicle and played from there. Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com

pressed audio format. If available, informa tion on the album, such as the artist, is stored as well.

CD/DVD or USB device with compressed audio files: the entire content of the CD/DVD or the USB device is stored in the vehicle as an album. The WMA, MP3, M4A, and AAC formats are stored. Individual tracks and directories can be deleted later, Deleting a track and directory, refer to page 211. Tracks with DRM copy protection can be stored but cannot be played back.

Backing up music data Regularly back up the music data; other

wise, it could be lost if there is a fault on the hard disc.

Music recognition technology and re lated data are provided by Grace

note. Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related con tent delivery. For more information, please visit www.gracenote.com. CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright 2000, Gracenote up to now. Gracenote-Software Copyright 2000, Grace note up to now. This product and service may practice one or more of the following U.S. Pat ents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents is sued or pending. Some services supplied un der license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Pat ent: #6,304,523.

Storing from a CD/DVD 1. Insert a CD or DVD into the CD/DVD

player. 2. "CD/Multimedia" 3. "CD/DVD" 4. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD

player. 5. "Store in vehicle"

The music collection is displayed and the first track of the CD/DVD is played back. During the storage process, the tracks are played in se quence.

Seite 207

CD/multimedia Entertainment

207 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Observe the following during the storage proc ess: Do not switch to the CD/DVD player and do not remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD player as this will interrupt the storage process. You can switch to the other audio sources without interrupting the storage process. Tracks from the current CD/DVD that have already been stored can be called up.

Interrupting storage 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. "Storing..."

4. "Cancel storing" The storage process is interrupted and can be continued at any time.

Continuing the storage process 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD

player. 4. "Continue storing" Storage of the CD/DVD continues at the begin ning of the track at which storage was inter rupted.

Album information During storage, information such as the name of the artist is stored with the track, if this infor mation is available in the vehicle database or on the CD.

To update the database, contact your service center.

Storing from a USB device To store music, a suitable device must be con nected to the USB interface in the glove com partment. Suitable devices: USB mass storage devi

ces, such as USB flash drives or MP3 play ers with a USB interface.

Unsuitable devices: USB hard drives, USB hubs, USB memory card readers with mul tiple inserts, Apple iPod/iPhone. Music from the Apple iPod/iPhone can be played via the USB audio interface in the center armrest.

File systems: standard file systems for USB devices are supported. The FAT 32 format is recommended.

1. Connect the USB device to the USB inter face in the glove compartment, refer to page 147.

2. "CD/Multimedia" 3. "Music collection" 4. Open "Options". 5. "Music data import/export" 6. "Import music (USB)"

Playing music

Music search All tracks for which additional information has been stored can be accessed by the music search. Tracks without additional information

Seite 208

Entertainment CD/multimedia

208 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

can be called up via the corresponding album, refer to page 210.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. "Music search"

4. Select the desired category.

5. Select the desired entry. Select "A-Z search", refer to page 23,

and input the desired entry. Select the desired entry from the list.

6. Select other categories if you wish. The tracks found are listed in alphabetical order. Not all categories need to be selected. For example, to search for all tracks by a cer tain artist, call up that artist only. All of the tracks by that artist are then displayed.

7. "Start play" The list of tracks is repeated automatically.

Restarting the music search "New search"

Music search by voice Instructions for voice activation system, refer to page 25.

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. Music search 3. Open the desired category, e. g., Select

artist. 4. Say the desired entry in the list. 5. Select other categories if you wish. To select a track directly: Title ... Say the voice command and the name of the desired track in a single command.

Current playback The list of tracks that was generated last by the music search, or the album that was se lected last.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. "Current playback"

4. Select the desired track, if necessary.

Top 50 The 50 most frequently played tracks.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. "Top 50" 4. Select the desired track, if necessary.

Seite 209

CD/multimedia Entertainment

209 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Albums All stored albums, listed in order of their stor age dates.

Symbol Format

Audio CD

Compressed audio files

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Select the desired album.

Depending on the album, the tracks or the subdirectories of the album are displayed. The first track is played automatically, if possible.

4. Change directories if needed to select tracks. To go up a level in the directory: move the controller to the left.

Random playback All tracks of the selection are played back in random order.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection"

3. Open "Options". 4. "Random"

Managing music

Albums

Renaming an album The name of the album, if available, is automat ically entered when the album is stored. If the name is not available, it can be changed later if desired.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Highlight the desired album. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Rename album"

6. Select the letters individually.

Seite 210

Entertainment CD/multimedia

210 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Deleting an album An album cannot be deleted while a track from that album is being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Highlight the desired album. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete album"

Deleting a track and directory A track cannot be deleted while it is being played. A directory cannot be deleted while a track from that directory is being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Highlight the directory or track. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track"

Free memory capacity Display the free memory capacity in the music collection.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Free memory"

Music collection

Backing up the music collection The entire music collection can be stored on a USB device. Make sure there is enough free memory capacity on the USB device. Depending on the number of tracks, backing up the music collection may take several

hours. Therefore, it is best to perform the backup during a long trip.

1. Starting the engine. 2. Connect the USB device to the USB inter

face in the glove compartment, refer to page 147.

3. "CD/Multimedia" 4. "Music collection" 5. Open "Options". 6. "Music data import/export"

7. "Backup music on USB"

Storing the music collection in the vehicle When storing from the USB device, the exist ing music collection in the vehicle is replaced.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Music data import/export" 5. "Restore music from USB"

Seite 211

CD/multimedia Entertainment

211 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Deleting the music collection 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Delete music collection"

External devices At a glance

Symbol Meaning

AUX-IN port

USB audio interface

Music interface for smartphones

Bluetooth audio

AUX-IN port

At a glance For connecting audio devices, e.g., MP3

player. The sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.

Recommendation: use medium tone and volume settings on the audio device. The tone depends on the quality of the audio files.

Connecting

The AUX-IN port is in the center armrest.

Connect the headphone connector or line-out connector of the device to the AUX-IN port.

Playback 1. Connect the audio device, switch it on and

select a track on the audio device. 2. "CD/Multimedia" 3. If necessary, "External devices" 4. "AUX front" Sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.

Volume The volume of the sound output is dependent on the audio device. If this volume differs markedly from the volume of the other audio sources, it is advisable to adjust the volumes.

Adjusting the volume 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. If necessary, "External devices" 3. "AUX front" 4. "Volume"

5. Turn the controller until the desired volume is set and press the controller.

USB audio interface/music interface for smartphones

At a glance It is possible to connect external audio devices. They can be operated via iDrive.The sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.

Seite 212

Entertainment CD/multimedia

212 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Connectors for external devices Connection via USB audio interface: Apple

iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g., MP3 play ers, USB flash drives, or mobile phones that are supported by the USB audio inter face.

Connection via snap-in adapter, refer to page 247, when equipped with the music interface for smartphones: Apple iPhone or mobile phones. Playback is only possible if no audio device is connected to the analog AUX-IN port.

Due to the large number of different audio de vices available on the market, it cannot be en sured that every audio device/mobile phone is operable on the vehicle. Ask your service center about suitable audio devices/mobile phones.

Audio files Standard audio files can be played back: MP3. WMA. WAV (PCM). AAC, M4A. Playback lists: M3U, WPL, PLS.

File system Standard file systems for USB devices are supported. The FAT 32 format is recom mended.

Connecting

The USB audio interface is in the center arm rest.

Connection of Apple iPod/iPhone via USB audio interface Connect using a flexible adapter cable. Connect the Apple iPod/iPhone to the USB in terface. The Apple iPod/iPhone menu structure is sup ported by the USB audio interface.

Connection of a USB device via the USB audio interface Connect using a flexible adapter cable to pro tect the USB audio interface and the USB de vice against physical damage. Connect the USB device to the USB interface.

After connecting for the first time Information on all music tracks, e.g. artist or type of music, as well as playback lists are transmitted into the vehicle. This may take some time, depending on the USB device and the number of tracks. During transmission, the tracks can be called up via the file directory.

Number of tracks Information from up to four USB devices or for approx. 36,000 tracks can be stored in the ve hicle. If a fifth device is connected or if more than 36,000 tracks are stored, information on existing tracks may be deleted.

Seite 213

CD/multimedia Entertainment

213 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Copy protection Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Management (DRM) cannot be played.

Playback 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the or symbol.

The playback starts with the first track. The CD cover belonging to the track may ap pear on the Control Display after several sec onds.

Track search Selection is possible via: Playback lists. Information: type of music, artist, and, if

available, composer, album, track. Additionally for USB devices: file directory,

composer. Tracks are displayed if they have been saved in the Latin alphabet.

Starting the track search 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the or symbol. 4. "Search" 5. Select the desired category, e.g., "Genre"

or "Artist". All entries are displayed in a list.

Open "A-Z search" and input the de sired entry. When a letter is entered, the results are filtered using this letter as the first letter. If multiple letters are entered, all results that contain that se quence are displayed.

Select the desired entry from the list.

6. Select other categories if you wish. Not all categories need to be selected. For example, if all of the tracks by a certain ar tist are to be displayed, call up that artist only. All of the tracks by that artist are then displayed.

7. "Start play"

Restarting a track search "New search"

Playback lists Calling up playback lists.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the or symbol. 4. "Playlists"

Current playback List of tracks currently being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the or symbol. 4. "Current playback"

Seite 214

Entertainment CD/multimedia

214 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Random playback The current list of tracks is played back in ran dom order.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Random"

Fast forward/reverse Press and hold the button.

Notes Do not expose the audio device to extreme en vironmental conditions, such as very high tem peratures; refer to the audio device operating instructions. Depending on the configuration of the audio files, e.g., bit rates greater than 256 kbit/s, the files may not play back correctly in each case.

Information on connection The connected audio device is supplied

with a max. power of 500 mA if supported by the device. Therefore, do not addition ally connect the device to a socket in the vehicle; otherwise, playback may be com promised.

Do not use force when plugging the con nector into the USB interface.

Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB audio interface.

Do not connect USB hard drives. Do not use the USB audio interface to re

charge external devices.

Bluetooth audio

At a glance Music files on external devices such as au

dio devices or mobile phones can be played back via Bluetooth.

Use of a mobile phone as an audio source, refer to page 238.

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

The sound is output on the vehicle loud speakers.

The volume of the sound output is de pendent on the device. If necessary, adjust the volume on the device.

Up to four external devices can be paired with the vehicle.

Requirements The device is suitable. Information at

www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. The device is ready for operation. The ignition is switched on. Bluetooth is activated on the vehicle, refer

to page 237, and on the device. Bluetooth presettings must be made on

the device, such as for a connection with out confirmation or visibility; refer to the device operating instructions.

A number with at least four and a maximum of 16 digits is defined as the Bluetooth passkey. It is only required once for pairing.

Pairing and connecting Pairing a device To avoid becoming distracted and pos

ing an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehicle's occupants and to other road users, only pair the device while the vehicle is station ary.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth (audio)" 3. If necessary, "Bluetooth audio". 4. "Add new phone"

Seite 215

CD/multimedia Entertainment

215 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis played.

5. Perform additional steps on the device, re fer to the device operating instructions: for instance, search for or connect the Blue tooth device or a new device. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the device display.

6. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the device display. You are prompted by the iDrive or device to enter the same Bluetooth passkey.

7. Enter the passkey and confirm.

8. Select the desired functions with which the device is to be connected, for instance "Audio".

9. "OK"

If pairing was successful, the device is dis played as connected. White symbol : the device is active as an audio source. If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., re fer to page 218.

Connecting a specific device A device that has already been paired can be connected as an active audio source. Connecting is not possible when data is ex changed via a mobile phone connected via Bluetooth.

Requirements If necessary, activate the audio connection of the desired device from the list of paired devi ces.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth (audio)" 3. If necessary, "Bluetooth audio". 4. Select the desired device from the list of

paired devices. 5. Open "Options". 6. "Configure phone" 7. Activate "Audio". 8. "OK"

Seite 216

Entertainment CD/multimedia

216 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Connecting the device 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth (audio)" 3. If necessary, "Bluetooth audio". 4. Select the desired device from the list of

paired devices.

White symbol : the device is active as an audio source.

Playback

General information The display of music track information de

pends on the device. Operation can takes place on the device or

iDrive. Playback is interrupted when data is ex

changed via a mobile phone connected via Bluetooth.

Starting playback 1. Connect the device. 2. "CD/Multimedia" 3. "External devices"

4. Select the symbol.

5. Select the desired track from the list, if necessary.

Playback menu Depending on the particular device, some of the functions may not be available.

Symbol Function

Next track Fast forward: press and hold the symbol.

Previous music track Reverse: press and hold the symbol.

Disconnecting the audio connection 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth (audio)" 3. Highlight the desired device. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Configure phone" 6. "Audio" 7. "OK"

Unpairing a device 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth (audio)" 3. If necessary, "Bluetooth audio". 4. Highlight the device that is to be unpaired.

Seite 217

CD/multimedia Entertainment

217 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

5. Open "Options". 6. "Remove phone from list"

What to do if... Information on suitable devices can be found at www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. Suitable mobile phones, refer to page 236. The device is not supported by the vehicle. Perform a software update, refer to

page 218, if needed. The device could not be paired or connected. Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the device

and the vehicle match? Enter the same passkey on the device and via iDrive.

Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter the passkey? Repeat the pairing proce dure.

Are too many Bluetooth devices con nected to the device or vehicle? Delete connections with other devices if neces sary.

Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or does it have only a limited remaining bat tery life? Charge the mobile phone in the snap-in adapter or via a charging cable.

Depending on the mobile phone, it is pos sible that only one device can be con nected to the vehicle. Unpair the con nected device from the vehicle and pair and connect only one device.

The device no longer reacts? Switch the device off and on again.

Repeat the pairing procedure.

Music cannot be played back. Start the program for playing back music

data on the device and select a track on the device if necessary.

Switch the radio on and off again. Music files can only be played back softly. Adjust the volume settings on the device. Playback is disturbed when buttons are pressed or by other messages on the device. Switch off the button tones and other sig

nal tones on the device. Playback is interrupted by a telephone call or traffic bulletin and is not resumed automati cally. Switch the radio on and off again. Playback is not possible if the mobile phone is connected via Bluetooth Audio while it is also connected via the USB interface or the snap-in adapter. Disconnect one of the two connections; for

example, disconnect the audio connection, refer to page 217, and restart playback.

If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available, please contact the hotline or service center.

Software Update The vehicle supports various external devices depending on the current software version. With a software update, the vehicle can sup port new mobile phones or new external de vice, for example. USB.

Software updates and related current infor mation is available at www.bmw.com/ update.

Displaying the current version The currently installed software is displayed.

1. "Settings" 2. "Software update"

Seite 218

Entertainment CD/multimedia

218 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

3. "Show current version" Select desired version to display additional in formation.

Updating software via USB The software may only be updated when the vehicle is stationary.

1. Store the file for the software-update in the main director of a USB flash drive.

2. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB au dio interface in the center armrest. An up date via the USB interface in the glove compartment is not possible.

3. "Settings" 4. "Software update" 5. "Update software"

6. "Start update" 7. "OK" All listed software updates are installed.

Restoring the previous version The software version prior to the last software update can be restored. The previous version can only be restored when the vehicle is stationary.

1. "Settings" 2. "Software update" 3. "Restore previous version" 4. "OK" Double-click. All listed software updates are removed.

Note While the software is being updated or a previ ous version is being restored, BMW Assist, Of fice functions, and the connected devices are temporarily unavailable. Wait several minutes for the functions to become available again.

Seite 219

CD/multimedia Entertainment

219 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

DVD system in rear Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

General information With the DVD system in the rear you can play CDs and DVDs with audio, video and image data. The DVD system can also play data from attached external audio and video devices. Au dio output is possible both via headphones and via the vehicle speakers. You can control the DVD system using the but tons on the CD-/DVD player or using the re mote control. Some functions are operated using the remote control.

Enabling DVD system The DVD system can be enabled via iDrive.

1. "Settings" 2. "Allow rear control" 3. "Rear DVD system active"

Controls

1 Display screen 2 Infrared interface for headphones 3 CD/DVD player 4 Headphone connection: jack plug 5 12 V sockets143

Folding in display screen When using the ski bag or when transporting bulky pieces of luggage, the display screen should be folded in, as otherwise it may be damaged.

Note when the display screen is folded down

When the screen is folded down, do not open the lid of the center armrest or rest your arm on the screen; otherwise, you may damage the screen.

Seite 220

Entertainment DVD system in rear

220 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

1. Turn the display screen, arrow 1 The display screen switches off.

2. Fold down the display screen, arrow 2. The display screen is folded out in the reverse order.

CD/DVD player Controls

1 Press: switch the DVD system on/off Turn: volume for headphones with jack plug, left

2 Eject CD/DVD 3 Beginning of track

Stop Playback, pause, freeze frame Next track

4 CD/DVD slot 5 Connectors for external device: cinch

sockets 6 Press: switch the DVD system on/off

Turn: volume for headphones with jack plug, right

Connecting headphones You can connect headphones with a jack plug or operate them using the infrared interface. To enable optimal use of the infrared interface, use infrared headphones that comply with the IEC 61603-2 standard. Compatible infrared headphones and informa tion about supported headphones are available at your service center. When using infrared headphones, it is impor tant not to interrupt the infrared connection between the headphones and the infrared in terface. This means that no obstacle should come between the two and that the cover of the infrared interface should not be covered or scratched. Unfavorable lighting conditions such as glare from outside can interfere with reception.

Remote control

1 Menu navigation 2 Volume for headphones with jack plug 3 Changing track or chapter during CD-,

DVD- or AUX playback, fast forward/rewind 4 Headphones right/left 5 Open start menu for DVD system

Seite 221

DVD system in rear Entertainment

221 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Menu navigation You can use the thumbwheel and buttons 1 to navigate through the menus. Turn the thumbwheel: select a menu item. Press the arrow buttons: change between

fields. Press the button: activate the menu

item.

Changing batteries

1. Press the detent and remove the cover. 2. Change the batteries. The type and instal

lation position are marked on the bottom of the battery compartment.

3. Close the cover. Take the used battery to a recycling center or to your service center.

Setting the language of the DVD system 1. Select a CD/DVD track. 2. Press the button. 3. Select "Tone". 4. Press the button. 5. Switch to the top window. 6. Select "Language". 7. Press the button. 8. Select the desired language. 9. Press the button.

Sound output via speakers In addition to the headphones, you can also play the sound via the vehicle speakers.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. "AUX rear" 4. "Volume" 5. Turn the controller until the desired volume

is set and press the controller.

Switching DVD system on/off Press the button on the CD-/DVD player or un der the desired screen. The DVD system switches on automatically when a CD or DVD is inserted.

Playing CD/DVD Use the following menu items to access data from a CD/DVD: Video data via "DVD" Audio data via "CD" Images "Photo"

Seite 222

Entertainment DVD system in rear

222 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Playing videos from CDs/ DVDs Country codes of DVDs Your DVD player only plays DVDs with the coding of your home region, e.g., Europe=2. The country codes supported by your DVD are contained in the information on your DVD. An overview of the coding zones:

Code Region

1 USA, Canada

2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Af rica

3 Southeast Asia

4 Australia, Central and South America, New Zealand

5 Northwest Asia, North Africa

6 China

DVDs with the code 0 can be played on all de vices.

Starting playback 1. Push the CD/DVD into the drive with the la

beled side facing upward. The CD/DVD is automatically pulled in. Playback begins automatically after a

few seconds. Otherwise: select "DVD".

2. If the DVD control or the DVD-specific menu is displayed when a DVD is inserted, use the remote control buttons for menu navigation to select the desired option. Or:

Press the button on the CD/DVD player.

You can control the playback with the buttons on the CD/DVD player or the DVD control.

Video CDs (VCDs) and Super Video CDs (SVCDs) can only be played if they do not have a DVD-specific menu.

Eject CD/DVD Press the button on the CD/DVD player.

The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.

DVD control With the DVD control, you can select the title and chapter, open the DVD-specific menu, and operate functions such as Language, Fast for ward and Reverse or Freeze frame. A DVD can briefly deactivate functions of the DVD control, under certain circumstances while the entire DVD is being played. It is not possible to operate the DVD control under these circumstances. In this case, try to make the selection using the DVD-specific menu.

1. Press the button on the remote con trol during playback.

2. Press the buttons on the remote con trol or turn the thumbwheel to select the desired function.

3. Press the button.

Symbol Function

Exit DVD control

"SET" Settings for playing DVDs.

Start playback.

Stop playback.

Seite 223

DVD system in rear Entertainment

223 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Symbol Function

Activate and deactivate freeze frame.

Skip a chapter.

Fast forward/reverse.

"Menu" Open the DVD-specific menu.

The DVD control disappears again after a short time if you have not selected a function. Or:

Press the button on the remote control to exit the DVD control.

Fast forward/reverse

Forward/reverse with DVD control 1. Press the button on the remote con

trol during playback. 2. Select the symbol. 3. Press the button. 4. Press the button several times to in

crease the fast forward/reverse speed. The DVD playback will be distorted. To cancel fast forward/reverse:

1. Select the symbol. 2. Press the button. Or:

Press the button on the CD/DVD player. The DVD will start play at the point selected.

Forward/reverse with remote control Press and hold the button until you

reach the desired point. Or:

1. During playback, turn the thumbwheel. Fast forward/reverse is interrupted.

2. Continue to turn the thumbwheel. The speed is increased.

3. Press the button on the CD/DVD player. Fast forward/reverse is interrupted. The DVD will start play at the point se lected.

Skipping chapter You can change to the next or previous chap ter during playback.

1. Press the button on the remote con trol during playback.

2. Select the symbol. 3. Press the button repeatedly, continuing

until you reach the desired chapter. Or:

Press the button on the left or right on the remote control repeatedly until you reach the desired chapter.

Freeze frame 1. Press the button on the remote con

trol during playback.

2. Select the symbol. 3. Press the button. To continue playback:

1. Select the or symbol. 2. Press the button. As an alternative, you can also stop and con tinue playback with the button on the CD/DVD player.

Seite 224

Entertainment DVD system in rear

224 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Making settings for DVD 1. Press the button during playback.

2. Make the settings with the remote control: "Video settings":

"Brightness", "Color", and "Contrast" on the screen.

After switching to the top window, you can change other settings. "Language": the system language of the DVD system "Display": background brightness of the screen.

"Tone": "Treble / Bass" and "Balance": sepa

rately adjustable for the left and right headphones and the infrared head phones.

"Reset": the settings are reset to the default values.

"DVD format": "Standard" "Zoom": full-screen playback.

"Language": language of the DVD play back. The language advances one setting each time the menu item is selected.

"Subtitles": language of the subtitles or turn off the subtitles.

"Title": select individual tracks on the DVD. "Angle of view": camera angle.

Information or symbols that appear during the playback of a film generally point out

different camera angles. These are usually only briefly available.

"Menu": open the DVD-specific menu. "Return": exit the menu, or:

Press the buttons on the remote con trol.

Many DVDs offer dialogs and subtitles in vari ous languages or scene descriptions for the hearing impaired. These functions are stored on the DVD. With some DVDs, it is only possible to select language, subtitles, camera angle, or title by using the DVD-specific menu. Consult the in formation accompanying your DVD.

Opening the DVD-specific menu Additional functions may be available on DVDs. It is thus possible, for example, to select from among several possible actions or to access information about the film.

1. Press the button on the remote con trol during playback.

2. Select "Menu". 3. Press the button.

On some DVDs, you can use "Main menu" and "Title" to access additional menus in which you can select music scenes, for ex ample.

To make a selection:

1. Select the symbol. 2. Press the button until the desired func

tion is selected. 3. Select the arrow. 4. Press the button. To return to the start menu:

1. Select the arrow. 2. Press the button. You can also select language, subtitles, cam era angle, or title in the DVD-specific menu.

Seite 225

DVD system in rear Entertainment

225 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Consult the information accompanying your DVD.

Compressed video files

Playback 1. Select the directory if necessary.

2. Press the button. 3. Select a track.

4. Press the button. 5. Select "Play". 6. Press the button. To change the directory:

1. Select the directory.

2. Press the button.

Playback functions 1. Select a track. 2. Press the button. 3. Select a menu item:

"Pause": stop and continue playback. "Repeat track": repeat the selected

track. "Repeat directory": repeat the tracks in

the current directory. 4. Press the button.

Playing audio tracks from CD/DVD Starting playback Push the CD/DVD into the drive with the la beled side facing upward. The CD/DVD is au tomatically pulled in. Playback begins automatically after a few

seconds. Otherwise: select "CD".

Press the button. CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files, refer to page 228, can take approx. 1 minute to read, depending on their directory structure. To play back audio tracks from a DVD, refer to Compressed audio files, refer to page 228. To start playback if a CD is already in the drive:

1. Open the start menu with the remote con trol.

2. Select "CD".

Seite 226

Entertainment DVD system in rear

226 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

3. Press the button.

As an alternative, you can also control the play back with the buttons on the CD/DVD player. To eject CD/DVD:

Press the button on the CD/DVD player.

Selecting a track

Buttons on CD/DVD player Press the button for the correspond

ing direction repeatedly until you reach the de sired track. Playback begins at the start of the track.

Using the remote control Press the button for the corresponding

direction repeatedly or turn the thumbwheel until you reach the desired track. Playback begins at the start of the track.

Settings and playback functions for audio CDs 1. Select "SET".

2. Press the button.

3. Make the settings with the remote control: "Tone":

"Treble / Bass" and "Balance": sepa rately adjustable for the left and right headphones and the infrared head phones.

"Reset": the settings are reset to the default values.

"Pause": stop and continue playback. "Random": the CD tracks are played back

once in random sequence. "Scan": brief samples of all CD tracks are

automatically played one after another. "Repeat": repeat the current track. Select

again to end. To exit from the menu:

Press the buttons on the remote control.

Fast forward/reverse Buttons on the CD/DVD player:

Press and hold the button for the corresponding direction.

Seite 227

DVD system in rear Entertainment

227 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Compressed audio files

Playback 1. Select the directory if necessary.

2. Press the button. 3. Select a track.

4. Press the button. 5. Select "Play". 6. Press the button. To change the directory:

1. Select the directory.

2. Press the button.

Settings and playback functions for compressed audio files 1. Select a track. 2. Press the button. 3. Make the settings with the remote control: "Tone":

"Treble / Bass" and "Balance": sepa rately adjustable for the left and right headphones and the infrared head phones.

"Reset": the settings are reset to the default values.

"Pause": stop and continue playback. "Scan directory": briefly sample the tracks

in the current directory. "Scan all": briefly sample all tracks. "Random directory": play the tracks in the

current directory in a random sequence. "Random all": play all tracks in a random

sequence. "Repeat track": repeat the selected track. "Repeat directory": repeat the tracks in the

current directory. "Details": display any stored information on

the current track. To exit from the menu:

Press the buttons on the remote control.

Displaying images from CD/DVD 1. Push the CD/DVD into the drive with the la

beled side facing upward. The CD/DVD is automatically pulled in.

2. Open the start menu with the remote con trol.

3. Select "Photo". 4. Press the button.

Seite 228

Entertainment DVD system in rear

228 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Displaying overview 1. Select the subdirectory if necessary. 2. Select "Overview".

3. Press the button. It may take some time until the overview is completely displayed. If a symbol appears instead of an image, the image cannot be displayed in the overview.

Displaying images 1. Use the buttons or the thumbwheel of the

remote control to select an image. 2. Press the button.

3. Displaying images: Scroll using the menu navigation but

tons of the remote control. Display the slide show: turn the thumb

wheel to set the display duration of the images. Stop the slide show: select "Stop".

Adjusting 1. Press the button.

2. Select a menu item:

Symbol Function

Return to the photo menu.

"SET" Adjust the "Display". "Language": after switching to the top window, the system lan guage can be changed.

Start the slide show.

Display the first/last image of the current directory.

Rotate the image by 90.

"Overview" Change to the image overview.

Ending display 1. Press the button. 2. Select the symbol. 3. Press the button.

Eject CD/DVD Press the button on the CD/DVD player.

Seite 229

DVD system in rear Entertainment

229 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Information on CD/DVD player Safety notes

Do not remove the cover The BMW CD/DVD player is a Class 1 la

ser product. Do not operate if the cover is damaged; otherwise, severe eye damage can result.

Suitable media Use of CDs/DVDs Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs

with labels applied, as these can be come detached during playback due to heat buildup and can cause irrep arable damage to the device.

Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/DVDs with an adapter, e.g., single CDs; otherwise, the CDs or the adapter may jam and no longer eject.

Do not use combined CDs/DVDs, e.g., DVD Plus, as the CDs/DVDs can jam and will no longer eject.

The CD/DVD player can play the following me dia: Video DVD. CD-DA (audio CD). CDs/DVDs with compressed image data. CDs/DVDs with compressed audio data. CDs/DVDs with compressed video data. The DVD player does not support DVD audio. However, many audio DVDs available in stores also contain a video track in the DVD Video for mat in addition to the audio track. These DVDs can be played back by the DVD player. Refer to the information on your DVD to determine whether your audio DVD contains an additional video track. Depending on the authoring used, it is possible that not all functions are available during playback.

Dual-sided DVDs available from retail suppliers are coated on both sides and bear no mark ings. This means both sides are information carriers. To play the information on the other side, turn over the DVD.

Supported formats Depending on the compression method used, not all files of the specified formats can be opened.

Images JPEG/JPG. With very large image files, it can take longer for the images to be displayed.

Compressed audio files MP3. WMA. OGG. AAC.

Compressed video files SVCD. MPEG1. MPEG2. MPEG4/DivX.

Digital Rights Management (DRM) In some cases, it may not be possible to play CDs/DVDs with integrated Digital Rights Man agement (DRM).

General malfunctions CD/DVD changers and players have been

optimized for performance in vehicles. In some instances they may be more sensi tive to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary de vices would be.

If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check whether it has been inserted correctly.

Seite 230

Entertainment DVD system in rear

230 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Foreign bodies/liquids in the CD/DVD slot

Make sure that no foreign objects or liquids get into the CD/DVD slot; otherwise, the CD/DVD player will be damaged.

Humidity High levels of humidity can lead to condensa tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens, and temporarily prevent playback.

Malfunctions involving individual CDs/ DVDs If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/ DVDs, this can be due to one of the following causes.

Copied or self-recorded CDs/DVDs Possible reasons for malfunctions with

home-recorded CDs/DVDs are inconsis tent data creation or recording processes, or poor quality or old age of the blank CD/ DVD.

Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side with a pen intended for this purpose.

Damaged CDs/DVDs Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and

moisture. Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve. Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures

over 122 /50 , high humidity or direct sunlight.

CDs/DVDs with copy protection CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro tection feature by the manufacturer. As a re sult, some CDs/DVDs cannot be played, can only be played to a limited degree, or cause the system to switch off. In this case, wait a short while and then switch the system back on again. Then remove the CD/DVD from the drive.

CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files If the language set for the CD/DVD player does not match the language of the music track, the music tracks may be displayed incorrectly.

External device Connecting

1 Connections for audio/video cables. Watch the colors of the sockets when connecting. Yellow socket: video White socket: audio on left Red socket: audio on right

2 Power supply for external device: socket with removable cap.

Playback 1. Switch on the external device and start the

playback. 2. Open the start menu with the remote con

trol.

Seite 231

DVD system in rear Entertainment

231 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

3. Select "AUX".

4. Press the button. For devices without a video signal, for instance MP3 players, "No video signal" appears on the display. The sound is nevertheless played.

Settings for external devices 1. Press the button during playback.

2. Make the settings with the remote control: "Video settings":

"Brightness", "Color", and "Contrast" of the video playback.

"NTSC color": the color can be ad justed on an external device with the NTSC standard.

"Standard": the DVD system can be adapted to external devices with differ ent TV standards; to do so, consult the operating manual of the external de vice.

"Reset": the settings are reset to the default values.

"Tone":

"Treble / Bass" and "Balance": sepa rately adjustable for the left and right headphones and the infrared head phones.

"Reset": your settings are reset. After switching to the top window, you

can change other settings. "Audio": adjust the volume of the ex ternal device to the volume of the CD/DVD player. "Language": the system language of the DVD system. "Display": background brightness of the screen.

"Video Format": "Standard" "Zoom": full-screen playback.

To exit from the menu: Press the buttons on the remote control.

Seite 232

Entertainment DVD system in rear

232 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Seite 233

DVD system in rear Entertainment

233 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Communication All of the options available to you for mobile

communication with family, friends, business partners, and service providers are described in

this chapter.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Telephone Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

At a glance The concept Mobile phones or other external devices such as audio players can be connected to the vehi cle via Bluetooth. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue tooth SIG, Inc. After these devices are paired once, they are recognized automatically when the ignition is switched on as soon as they are in the vehicle and can then be operated via iDrive, the but tons on the steering wheel, and via voice acti vation. Depending on their functionality, external devi ces can be used via the vehicle as a telephone or as an audio source. The telephone functions are described in the following. Operating the audio functions, refer to page 215. Up to four external devices can be paired. Certain functions may need to be enabled by the mobile phone provider or service provider.

Using the mobile phone while driving Make entries only when traffic and road

conditions allow. Do not hold the mobile phone in your hand while you are driving; use the hands-free system instead. If you do not ob serve this precaution, you can endanger the vehicle occupants and other road users.

Snap-in adapter The snap-in adapter is used to: Hold the mobile phone. Recharge the battery. Connect the mobile phone to an outside

antenna of the vehicle. This provides for better network reception and consistent sound quality.

Approved mobile phones Details on which mobile phones and external devices with a Bluetooth interface are sup ported by the mobile phone preparation pack age can be obtained at www.bmwusa.com/ bluetooth.

Displaying the vehicle identification number and software part number The vehicle identification number and software part number are needed to determine which mobile phones are supported by the mobile phone preparation package. The software ver sion of the mobile phone may also be required.

1. "Telephone" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Bluetooth info" 4. "Display system information" These approved mobile phones with a certain software version, support the vehicle functions described below. Malfunctions may occur with other mobile phones or software versions. Do not operate a mobile phone that is con nected to the vehicle on the mobile phone key pad, as this may lead to a malfunction. A software update, refer to page 218, can be performed if necessary.

Seite 236

Communication Telephone

236 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Notes At high temperatures, the charging function of the mobile phone may be limited and functions may not be executed. When using the mobile phone via the vehicle, note the operating instructions of the mobile phone.

Pairing/unpairing the mobile phone General information The following functions are available: Use of a mobile phone as a telephone. Use of a mobile phone as an additional te

lephone. Use of a mobile phone as an audio source. Use of an audio device as an audio source,

refer to page 215.

Requirements The mobile phone is suitable, refer to

page 236. The mobile phone is ready for operation. Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle and on

the mobile phone. Bluetooth presettings may need to be

made on the mobile phone, e.g., for a con nection without confirmation or visibility, refer to the mobile phone operating in structions.

Deactivate Bluetooth audio if necessary. A number with at least four and a maximum

of 16 digits was defined as the Bluetooth passkey. It is only required once for pairing.

The ignition is switched on.

Activating/deactivating Bluetooth Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Com ply with all safety guidelines and regulations.

1. "Telephone" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Bluetooth"

Additional functions

Activating/deactivating the additional functions Activate the functions before pairing to be able to use them in the vehicle. Information on suit able mobile phones, refer to page 236, that support this function.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Configure Bluetooth" 5. Select the desired additional function.

"Additional telephone" "Office" "Bluetooth audio"

6. "OK" An additional function cannot be assigned to a telephone while it is deactivated.

Additional telephone A mobile phone can be used as an additional telephone. The additional telephone can be used to ac cept incoming calls, refer to page 241. While a

Seite 237

Telephone Communication

237 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

call is active on the additional telephone, re ceived calls are displayed on the Control Dis play.

Audio source A mobile phone can be used as an audio source.

Pairing and connecting a mobile phone

Pairing the mobile phone To avoid becoming distracted and pos

ing an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehicle's occupants and to other road users, only pair the mobile phone while the vehicle is stationary.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)" 3. "Add new phone"

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis played.

4. To perform additional steps on the mobile phone, refer to the mobile phone operating instructions: for instance, search for or connect the Bluetooth device or a new de vice. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the mobile phone display.

5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the mobile phone display.

6. You are prompted by the iDrive or mobile phone to enter the same Bluetooth pass key. Enter the passkey and confirm. or Compare the control number on the vehi cle display with the control number on the mobile phone display. Confirm the control number on the mobile phone and in the ve hicle. "OK"

7. Select the functions for which the mobile phone is to be used.

8. "OK" If the pairing was successful, the mobile phone appears at the top of the list of mobile phones. The functions supported by the mobile phone and audio device are displayed as symbols when paired. White symbol: the function is active. Gray symbol: the function is inactive.

Symbol Function

Telephone.

Additional telephone.

Audio source.

Four mobile phones can be paired with the ve hicle at once. Three mobile phones can be connected with the vehicle at once. If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., re fer to page 239.

Following the initial pairing The mobile phone is detected/connected

in the vehicle within a short period of time when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.

The phone book entries of the telephone stored on the SIM card or mobile phone are transmitted to the vehicle after detec tion, depending on the mobile phone.

Four mobile phones can be paired. Specific settings may be necessary in

some mobile phones, e.g., authorization or a secure connection; refer to the mobile phone operating instructions.

Connecting a particular mobile phone 1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)"

Seite 238

Communication Telephone

238 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

3. Select the mobile phone that is to be con nected.

The functions assigned to the mobile phone before unpairing are assigned to the mobile phone when it is reconnected. These functions are deactivated in a mobile phone that is al ready connected.

Configuring the mobile phone Additional functions can be activated or deacti vated for paired and connected mobile phones.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)" 3. Highlight the mobile phone to be config

ured. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Configure phone" 6. At least one function must be selected.

"Telephone" "Additional telephone" "Audio"

7. "OK" If a function has already been assigned to an other connected mobile phone, the function is deactivated in that mobile phone and the mo bile phone is unpaired when the function is as signed to a new mobile phone.

Swapping the telephone and additional telephone The function of the telephone and additional telephone can be swapped automatically.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)" 3. "Swap phone/addit. phone"

Unpairing the mobile phone 1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)"

3. Highlight the mobile phone that is to be unpaired.

4. Open "Options". 5. "Remove phone from list"

What to do if... Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to page 236. The mobile phone could not be paired or con nected. Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and on

the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in the vehicle and on the mobile phone.

Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile phone and the vehicle match? Enter the same passkey on the mobile phone and via iDrive.

Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter the passkey? Repeat the pairing proce dure.

Are too many Bluetooth devices con nected to the mobile phone or vehicle? De lete connections with other devices if nec essary.

Is the audio connection activated? Deacti vate the audio connection.

Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or does it have only a limited remaining bat tery life? Charge the mobile phone in the snap-in adapter or via the charging cable.

Depending on the mobile phone, it is pos sible that only one mobile phone can be connected to the vehicle. Unpair the con

Seite 239

Telephone Communication

239 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

nected mobile phone from the vehicle and pair and connect only one mobile phone.

The mobile phone no longer reacts. Switch the mobile phone off and on again. Is the ambient temperature too high or

low? Do not expose the mobile phone to extreme environmental conditions.

The telephone functions are not available. Is the mobile phone paired as an additional

telephone and is the additional telephone function deactivated? Activate the func tion.

Is an outgoing call not possible? Connect the mobile phone as a telephone.

No phone book entries or only some phone book entries are displayed, or they are incom plete. Transmission of the phone book entries is

not yet complete. It is possible that only the phone book en

tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card are transmitted.

It may not be possible to display phone book entries with special characters.

The number of phone book entries to be stored is too high.

Is the data volume of the contact too large, e. g., due to stored information such as notes? Reduce the data volume of the con tact.

Is the mobile phone connected as an audio source or additional telephone? The mo bile phone must be connected as a tele phone.

The phone connection quality is poor. The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the

mobile phone can be adjusted, depending on the mobile phone.

Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in adapter or place it in the area of the center console.

Adjust the volume of the microphone and loudspeakers separately.

If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available, con tact Customer Relations or the service center.

Controls Adjusting the volume

Turn the knob until the desired volume is se lected. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

The vehicle automatically adjusts the volume of the microphone on the telephone and the volume of the called party. Depending on the mobile phone, the volumes may need to be ad justed. The settings can only be created during a call and must be adjusted separately for each telephone. The settings are deleted when the telephone is unpaired.

1. "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Volume settings" 4. Select the desired setting: "Microphone"

or "Loudspeak." 5. To adjust: turn the controller. 6. To store: press the controller.

Seite 240

Communication Telephone

240 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Incoming call

Receiving calls If the number of the caller is stored in the phone book and is transmitted by the network, the name of the contact is displayed. Other wise, only the phone number is displayed. If more than one phone number is assigned to a contact, only the name of the contact is dis played. For calls on the additional telephone, the num ber is only displayed if it is transmitted by the network. An incoming call to one of the telephones is automatically rejected if there is an active call on the other telephone.

Accepting a call Press the button on the steering wheel.

or "Accept"

Rejecting a call "Reject"

Ending a call Press the button on the steering wheel.

or

1. "Telephone"

2. "End call"

Entering a phone number

Dialing a number 1. "Telephone" 2. "Dial number" 3. Select the digits individually. 4. Select the symbol.

The phone number can also be entered by voice.

Calls with multiple parties

General information You can switch between calls or connect two calls to a single conference call. These func tions must be supported by the mobile phone and service provider.

Accepting a call while speaking to another party This function might have to be activated by the service provider and the mobile phone must be adjusted accordingly.

Seite 241

Telephone Communication

241 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

If a second call comes in during an ongoing call, a call waiting signal is sounded.

"Accept" The call is accepted and the existing call is put on hold.

Establishing a second call Establish an additional call during an active call.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Active calls" 3. "Hold"

The existing call is put on hold.

4. Dial the new phone number or select it from a list.

"Return" The call on hold is resumed.

Switching between two calls, hold call The active call is displayed in color. The call on hold is displayed in gray.

"Swap calls" The call on hold is resumed.

Establishing a conference call Two calls can be connected to a single tele phone conference call.

1. Establish two calls. 2. "Conference call"

When terminating a conference call, both calls are ended. If one call is terminated by another party, the other call can be continued.

Switching the microphone to mute When a call is active, the microphone can be muted.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Active calls" 3. "Microphone mute" A microphone that has been switched to mute is automatically reactivated: When a new connection is established. When switching between call parties.

DTMF suffix dialing DTMF suffix dialing can be used for gaining ac cess to network services or for controlling de vices, e.g., to make a remote inquiry of an an swering machine. The DTMF code is needed for this purpose.

1. "Telephone" 2. Select the contact from a list or "Dial

number". 3. "Keypad dialing" 4. Enter the DTMF code via iDrive.

Phone book

Displays The phone book accesses the contacts and shows all contacts for which a phone number has been stored. The entries can be selected to make a call.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Phone book" A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts.

Seite 242

Communication Telephone

242 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Calling a contact

Symbol Meaning

Contact with one stored phone number.

Contact with more than one stored phone number.

Call not possible; mobile phone without reception or network, or Service Request is active.

For contacts with one stored phone number: select the required contact. The connection is being established. For contacts with more than one stored phone number: select the required contact and the phone number. The connection is being estab lished.

Editing a contact Changing the entries in "Contacts". When a contact is changed, the changes are not stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle.

1. Highlight the contact. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Edit entry" The contact can be edited.

Redialing

General information The list of dialed numbers in the mobile phone is transmitted to the vehicle depending on the mobile phone. Possibly only those numbers are displayed that were dialed from the vehicle. The 20 phone numbers dialed last are dis played. The sorting order of the phone num bers depends on the particular mobile phone.

Dialing a number via the instrument cluster This is possible if a call is not currently active.

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. Select the desired phone number. The connection is established.

Dialing the number via the iDrive 1. "Telephone" 2. "Redial"

3. Select the desired entry and the phone number if necessary.

The connection is established.

Deleting a single entry or all entries The deletion of entries depends on your par ticular mobile phone.

1. Highlight the entry. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list"

Seite 243

Telephone Communication

243 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Saving an entry in the contacts 1. Highlight the entry. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing

contact" 4. Select the contact if necessary. 5. Select the type of number: "Home",

"Business", "Mobile" or "Other" 6. Complete the entries if necessary. 7. "Store contact"

Received calls

Displaying calls The 20 calls that were last received are dis played.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Received calls"

Calling a number from the list Selecting an entry. The connection is established.

Deleting a single entry or all entries The deletion of entries depends on your par ticular mobile phone.

1. Highlight the entry. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list"

Saving an entry in the contacts 1. Highlight the entry. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing

contact" 4. Select the contact if necessary. 5. Select the type of number: "Home",

"Business", "Mobile" or "Other" 6. Complete the entries if necessary. 7. "Store contact"

Hands-free system

General information Calls that are being made on the hands-free system can be continued on the mobile phone and vice versa.

From the mobile phone to the hands- free system Calls that were begun outside of the Bluetooth range of the vehicle can be continued on the hands-free system with the ignition switched on. Depending on the mobile phone, the system automatically switches to the hands-free sys tem. If the system does not switch over automati cally, follow the instructions on the mobile phone display; refer also to the mobile phone operating instructions.

From the hands-free system to the mobile phone Calls that are made on the hands-free system can in some cases be continued on the mobile phone; this depends on the mobile phone. Follow the instructions on the mobile phone display; refer also to the mobile phone operat ing instructions.

Seite 244

Communication Telephone

244 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Voice operation General information Vehicles equipped with the voice activation system: operation, refer to page 25. Vehicles not equipped with the voice activation system: depending on the equipment, the mo bile phone can be voice operated as described below. The list of short commands in the Owner's Manual does not apply to this type of voice op eration.

The concept The mobile phone can be operated without

taking your hands from the steering wheel. In many cases, the entries are accompa

nied by announcements or questions. ... Verbal instructions to use with the voice

operation system. ... Identifies the answers generated by

the voice operation system.

Using voice activation

Activating the voice activation system

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. Say the command.

Terminating the voice activation system

Press the button on the steering wheel or Cancel.

Possible commands

Having possible commands read aloud Press the button on the steering wheel.

Help.

Possible commands are announced. The digits from zero to nine are recognized. The digits can be spoken separately or com bined in a sequence to accelerate the entry.

Using alternative commands The system often recognizes a number of dif ferent commands to run a function; for in stance: Dial name or Name

Example: dialing a phone number

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. Dial number The system says: Please say the number .

3. For instance, 123 456 790 The system says: 123 456 790. Con tinue?.

4. Dial The system says: Dialing number.

Calling

Dialing a phone number 1. Dial number 2. Say the phone number. 3. Dial

Correcting the phone number The sequence of digits can be deleted after the system has repeated the digits. Correct number The command can be repeated as often as necessary.

Deleting a phone number Delete All digits entered up to that point are deleted.

Seite 245

Telephone Communication

245 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Redialing Redial

Voice phone book Depending on how your vehicle is equipped, it may be necessary to create your own voice phone book. The entries must be entered using voice acti vation and are separate from the memory in the mobile phone. Up to 50 entries can be set up.

Saving an entry 1. Save name 2. Say the name. Do not exceed the speaking

duration of approx. 2 seconds. 3. Say the phone number after being

prompted to do so by the system. 4. Save

Deleting an entry 1. Delete name 2. Say the name after being prompted to do

so. 3. Confirm the prompt: Yes

Deleting all entries 1. Delete phone book 2. Confirm the prompt: Yes 3. Confirm the prompt again: Yes

Reading and selecting entries 1. Read phonebook 2. When the desired entry is read aloud: say

Dial number

Selecting an entry 1. Dial name 2. Say the name after being prompted to do

so. 3. Confirm the prompt: Yes

Adjusting the volume

Turn the knob during an announcement.

The volume remains constant even if the volume of other audio sources is changed.

The volume is stored for the remote con trol currently in use.

Notes Do not use voice operation to initiate an Emer gency Request. In stressful situations, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can un necessarily delay the establishment of a tele phone connection. Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 307, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.

Environmental conditions Say the commands, numbers, and letters

smoothly and with normal volume, empha sis, and speed.

Always say commands in the language of the system. The language for the mobile phone voice operation is preset and cannot be changed in the Control Display.

Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun roof closed to prevent noise interference.

Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking.

Seite 246

Communication Telephone

246 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Snap-in adapter General information More information on compatible snap-in adapters that support the functions of the mo bile phone is available at the service center.

Notes At high temperatures, the charging function of the mobile phone may be limited and functions may not be executed. When using the mobile phone via the vehicle, note the operating instructions of the mobile phone.

Installation position In the center armrest.

Inserting/removing the snap-in adapter 1. Press button 1 and remove the cover.

2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front, ar row 1, and press down, arrow 2, until it en gages.

3. To remove the snap-in adapter: press but ton 1.

Inserting the mobile phone 1. Depending on the mobile phone, remove

the protective cap from the antenna con nector and from the USB connection of the mobile phone.

2. With the buttons facing up, slide the mo bile phone up toward the electrical con tacts and press it down until it engages.

The battery is charged beginning with the radio ready state of the vehicle.

Seite 247

Telephone Communication

247 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Removing the mobile phone

Press the button and remove the mobile phone.

Seite 248

Communication Telephone

248 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Office Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

At a glance General information Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text messages, and e-mails from the mobile phone can be displayed on the Control Display if the mobile phone provides compatible support of these functions and the necessary Bluetooth standards. Information about which mobile phones sup port the Office functions can be found at www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. A limited num ber of compatible mobile phones is available for Office. Contents are only displayed in full length when the vehicle is stationary. The mobile phone has read-access only.

Do not use Office while driving To avoid becoming distracted and pos

ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occupants and to other road users, never at tempt to use the controls or enter information unless traffic and road conditions allow this.

Requirements A suitable mobile phone is paired with the

vehicle and connected. In some mobile phones, data access must be confirmed on the mobile phone.

The time, time zone, and date, refer to page 87, are correctly set on the Control Display and on the mobile phone, for in stance to correctly display appointments.

Office is activated, refer to page 237.

Updating Data are updated every time the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle. Appointment en tries, tasks, notes and reminders can be up dated separately.

1. "Office" 2. "Current office", "Calendar", "Tasks",

"Notes" or "Reminders" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Update data"

Mobile phone data are transmitted again to the vehicle.

Office information The number of unread messages and active tasks as well as the upcoming appointments are displayed.

1. "Office" 2. "Current office" 3. Select the desired entry to display details.

Seite 249

Office Communication

249 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Contacts Note Equipment version with the mobile phone preparation package.

At a glance Contacts can be created and edited. The con tacts from the mobile phone are displayed as well if this function is supported by the mobile phone. The addresses can be adopted as des tinations for navigation and the phone num bers can be dialed.

Displaying contacts

General information 1. "Office" 2. "Contacts"

All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z search is offered, refer to page 23. A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts.

Symbol Storage location

No sym bol

In the vehicle; the address has not been checked as a destination.

In the vehicle; the address has been checked as a destination.

Mobile phone.

Dialing phone numbers 1. Select the desired contact. 2. Select the phone number.

The connection is established.

Editing a contact 1. Select the desired contact. 2. "Edit contact"

3. Change the entries. 4. "Store contact in vehicle" When a contact is edited, the changes are not stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the en try is stored in the vehicle.

Selecting the contact as a navigation destination 1. Select the desired contact. 2. Select the address.

When contacts from the mobile phone are used, the address may need to be matched to the navigation data contained in the ve hicle. In this case: Correct the address.

3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination"

Checking the address as a destination An address that is to be used for destination guidance must match the navigation data con

Seite 250

Communication Office

250 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

tained in the vehicle. The address can be checked for this purpose.

1. Select the desired contact and highlight the address.

2. Open "Options". 3. "Check as destination" 4. Correct and store the address if necessary. If the address is corrected and stored, a copy of it is stored in the vehicle. The address is not changed on the mobile phone.

New contact

General information A contact can have up to 8 phone numbers, 2 addresses, 3 e-mail addresses and one Inter net address.

1. "Office" 2. "Contacts" 3. Open "Options". 4. "New contact"

5. The entry fields are still filled with the pre vious entries: "Delete input fields"

6. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next to the entry field.

7. Enter the text and assign the contact type. 8. If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation

system: enter the address. Only addresses contained in the navigation data in the ve hicle can be entered. This ensures that destination guidance is possible for all ad dresses.

If necessary, "Accept address". 9. "Store contact in vehicle"

Contact types Various contact types can be assigned to phone numbers and addresses.

Symbol Meaning

Home phone number.

Business phone number.

Mobile phone number.

Other phone number.

Home address.

Business address.

Specifying the home address A home address can be stored. It appears at the top of the contact list.

1. "Office" 2. "Contacts" 3. "Home" 4. Create a contact. 5. "Store contact in vehicle"

Selecting the sorting order of the names Names can be displayed in a different order.

1. "Office" 2. "Contacts" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,

last name" Depending on how the contacts were stored on the mobile phone, the sorting order of the names may differ from the selected sorting or der.

Seite 251

Office Communication

251 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Show contact pictures Pictures stored with the contacts are stored in the vehicle when the mobile phone is con nected to the vehicle. The number of transmit ted pictures depends on the mobile phone. The mobile phone must support this function.

1. "Office" 2. "Contacts" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Configure Bluetooth" 5. "Show images" Display of all contact pictures is activated or deactivated.

Deleting contacts Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone cannot be deleted.

1. "Office" 2. "Contacts" 3. Highlight the contact. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts" 6. If necessary. "Yes"

Messages General information Whether or not text messages and e-mails from the mobile phone are displayed depends on whether transmission from the mobile phone to the vehicle is supported. Text mes sages and e-mails may not be supported by the service provider, or the function may need to be enabled separately. After the mobile phone is first paired, transmission may take several minutes. Messages are only displayed in full length when the vehicle is stationary. Messages from the additional telephone are not transmitted.

Displaying messages 1. "Office" 2. "Messages" A symbol identifies the type of message.

Symbol Message type

Text messages.

My Info

Message from the Concierge serv ice.

E-mail from mobile phone.

Filtering the message list The message list can be filtered if more than one type of message exists.

1. "Filter:"

2. Select the type of message. "All"

All messages are displayed. "E-mail"

Only e-mails from the mobile phone are displayed.

"Service message" Only messages from the BMW Assist Concierge service and My Info are dis played.

"Text message" Only text messages from the mobile phone are displayed.

Seite 252

Communication Office

252 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Deleting messages Messages from the Concierge service and My Info can be deleted. Delete a message:

1. "Office" 2. "Messages" 3. Select the desired message. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete message" Delete all messages:

1. "Office" 2. "Messages" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Delete all messages" or "Delete service

messages"

Text messages

Calling the sender of a text message 1. Select the desired message. 2. Select the symbol.

Saving the sender in the contacts 1. Highlight the desired message. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing

contact"

Using contact data Contact data from appointments, tasks, text messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or selected, refer to page 256.

Reading the text message out loud Read the text message out loud, refer to page 256.

My Info

Selecting additional functions Additional functions are available when a mes sage is selected.

Sym bol

Function

"Start guidance" or "Add as another destination"

"Call" If the message contains a number, the connection is established.

"Select phone number" If the message contains more than one number, select the desired number from the list. The connec tion is established.

Message from the Concierge service

Storing an address 1. Select the desired message. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Store contact in vehicle"

Selecting additional functions Additional functions are available when a mes sage is selected.

Sym bol

Function

"Start guidance" or "Add as another destination"

"Call" If the message contains a number, the connection is established.

Seite 253

Office Communication

253 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Sym bol

Function

"Select phone number" If the message contains more than one number, select the desired number from the list. The connec tion is established.

"Further information" Display additional information.

E-mail

Displaying e-mails 1. "Office" 2. "Messages" 3. Select the desired e-mail.

Displaying e-mail contacts If the sender and recipient of an e-mail are transmitted by the mobile phone, this informa tion is displayed in the e-mail.

"Sender/Recipient" If the e-mail addresses are stored in the con tacts, the contact is displayed. Select the con tact to display details. If the e-mail addresses are not stored in the contacts, only the e-mail address is displayed.

Using contact data Contact data from appointments, tasks, text messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or selected, refer to page 256.

Deactivating the full display When an e-mail is opened in the vehicle, the e- mail is fully transmitted to the vehicle. This may result in charges.

1. "Office" 2. "Messages"

3. Open "Options". 4. "Fully download e-mails"

Only a part of the e-mail from the mobile phone is loaded into the vehicle.

Reading the e-mail out loud Read the e-mail out loud, refer to page 256.

Calendar Display the calendar Appointments during the last 20 days and the next 50 days can be displayed.

1. "Office" 2. "Calendar"

The appointments on the current day are displayed.

Selecting the calendar day 1. Select the date.

2. Select the desired day or date. "Next day" "Date:" "Previous day" "Today"

Display the appointment 1. Select the desired appointment. 2. Scroll through the appointment if neces

sary: Turn the controller.

Seite 254

Communication Office

254 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Select the symbol.

Using contact data Contact data from appointments, tasks, text messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or selected, refer to page 256.

Reading the appointment out loud Read the appointment out loud, refer to page 256.

Tasks Displaying the task list Display tasks that are due within the next 90 days.

1. "Office" 2. "Tasks"

Sorting the task list 1. Select the header in the task list.

2. Select the sorting criterion: "Priority (!)" "Subject" "Due date"

Displaying the task 1. Select the desired task. 2. Scroll in the task if necessary:

Turn the controller. Select the symbol.

Using contact data Contact data from appointments, tasks, text messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or selected, refer to page 256.

Reading the task out loud Read the task out loud, refer to page 256.

Notes Displaying notes 1. "Office" 2. "Notes"

All notes are displayed.

Displaying the note 1. Select the desired note.

2. Scroll in the note if necessary: Turn the controller. Select the symbol.

Using contact data Contact data from appointments, tasks, text messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or selected, refer to page 256.

Reading the note out loud Read the note out loud, refer to page 256.

Seite 255

Office Communication

255 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Reminders Displaying reminders Reminders of pending appointments and tasks are displayed. After an appointment or after a task is due, the reminder is no longer dis played.

1. "Office" 2. "Reminders" 3. Select the desired reminder. The corresponding appointment or the task are displayed.

Using contact data At a glance Contact data from appointments, tasks, text messages, emails, and notes can be stored or selected.

Displaying contact or selecting phone number 1. "Use contact data" 2. Display the contact or select the phone

number: Select the contact to display contact

details. Select the phone number to establish a

connection directly.

Storing contact data 1. "Use contact data" 2. Highlight the phone number or e-mail ad

dress. 3. Open "Options". 4. "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new

contact"

Reading out loud Text messages, e-mails, appointment entries, tasks, and notes can be read out loud.

1. Select the desired message, appointment, task, or note.

2. Select the symbol. The following options are available during reading: "Pause"

Interrupt reading. Select again to restart reading.

"Back to beginning" Start reading the message again from the beginning.

Select the symbol. Go back one paragraph.

Select the symbol. Skip a paragraph.

To end reading, turn the controller to the left.

What to do if... Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to page 236. Appointments, tasks, notes, text messages, or e-mails from the mobile phone are not dis played. The mobile phone is not capable of the

missing function or is not connected cor rectly.

The Office function is deactivated. The mobile phone is connected as an addi

tional phone. Appointments are older than 20 days or

are more than 50 days in the future. The tasks have been marked as completed

or have a due date that lies more than 90 days in the future.

Seite 256

Communication Office

256 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Depending on the number of stored ap pointments, task notes, and messages in the mobile phone, not all are displayed in the vehicle.

Not all appointments and tasks from the mo bile phone are displayed at the right time? The time zone, time, or date is incorrectly

set on the Control Display and mobile phone.

The e-mail attachment is not displayed. E-mails are transmitted without an attach

ment. Entries are not displayed in full length. Text were already transmitted from the

mobile phone in a shortened form. Synchronization between the mobile

phone and vehicle may take several mi nutes.

The contact pictures are not being displayed? Up to 200 contact pictures can be stored in

the vehicle. The E-mail is displayed with a delay? Check the e-mail settings on the telephone

and adjust if necessary. If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available, please contact the hotline or service center.

Seite 257

Office Communication

257 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Contacts Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Note Equipment version without the mobile phone preparation package.

General information Contacts can be created and edited. The con tacts from the mobile phone are displayed as well if this function is supported by the mobile phone. The addresses can be adopted as des tinations for navigation and the phone num bers can be dialed.

New contact 1. "Contacts" 2. "New contact"

3. The entry fields are still filled with the pre vious entries: "Delete input fields"

4. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next to the entry field.

5. Enter the text, refer to page 23. In vehicles equipped with a navigation sys tem: it is only possible to enter addresses that are contained in the vehicle navigation data. This ensures that destination guid ance is possible for all addresses.

6. If necessary, "Store". 7. "Store contact in vehicle"

Specifying the home address A home address can be stored. It appears at the top of the contact list.

1. "Home" 2. Create a contact. 3. "Store contact in vehicle"

My contacts General information List of all contacts stored in the vehicle.

Displaying contacts 1. "Contacts"

Seite 258

Communication Contacts

258 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

2. "My contacts"

All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z search is offered, refer to page 23. A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts:

Symbol Storage location

No sym bol

In the vehicle; the address has not been checked as a destination.

In the vehicle; the address has been checked as a destination.

Mobile phone.

Dialing a phone number 1. Select the desired contact. 2. Select the phone number.

The connection is established.

Editing a contact 1. Select the desired contact. 2. "Edit contact"

3. Change the entries.

4. Move the controller to the left. 5. "Yes" If a contact from the mobile phone is edited, the changes are not stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the ve hicle, and only this copy is displayed. Under certain circumstances, a contact entry with the same name is created.

Selecting the contact as a navigation destination 1. Select the desired contact. 2. Select the address. 3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another

destination"

Checking the address as a destination An address that is to be used for destination guidance must match the navigation data con tained in the vehicle. The address can be checked for this purpose.

1. Select the desired contact and highlight the address.

2. Open "Options". 3. "Check as destination" 4. Correct and store the address if necessary.

Selecting the sorting order of the names Names can be displayed in a different order.

1. "My contacts" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,

last name"

Exporting/importing contacts Contacts can be exported and imported via Personal Profile, refer to page 30.

Seite 259

Contacts Communication

259 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Deleting contacts 1. "My contacts" 2. Highlight the contact. 3. Open "Options". 4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts"

Seite 260

Communication Contacts

260 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

ConnectedDrive Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

TeleService General information TeleService supports communication with your service center. Data on the vehicle's service requirements

can be sent directly to the service center. In this way, the service center can plan its work in advance. This shortens the dura tion of the service appointment.

In the event of a breakdown, data on the vehicle's condition can be sent directly to Roadside Assistance.

The service varies by country. Connection costs may ensue. Services may be restricted abroad.

Requirements BMW Assist is activated.

If BMW Assist is not activated, a mobile phone that has been recommended by BMW for TeleService and that is config ured for mobile data communication must be connected with the vehicle.

Wireless reception is available. The ignition is switched on.

Using TeleService TeleService is typically activated in the vehicle. Even if TeleService is not active, a voice con tact to Roadside Assistance is still possible. To continue using or to deactivate the serv ices, please contact your service partner or the BMW customer hotline.

Concierge service General information The BMW Assist Concierge service offers in formation on events, gas stations, and hotels, and provides phone numbers and addresses. Hotels can be booked directly by the BMW As sist Concierge service. The Concierge service is part of the optional Convenience Plan.

Starting the Concierge service 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Concierge"

3. "Start service" A voice connection is established with the BMW Assist Concierge service. Phone num bers and addresses can be transmitted to the vehicle.

Messages Information on messages, refer to page 252.

Seite 261

ConnectedDrive Communication

261 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Roadside Assistance At a glance BMW Roadside Assistance can be contacted if assistance is needed in the event of a break down. Roadside Assistance can also be contacted via a Check Control message, refer to page 85.

Starting Roadside Assistance without TeleService 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Roadside Assistance"

The Roadside Assistance number is dis played. If the mobile phone is paired, a connection is established to Roadside As sistance.

Starting Roadside Assistance with TeleService

General information In vehicles equipped with TeleService, support is first offered by TeleService Diagnosis and then, if necessary, by TeleService Help.

1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Roadside Assistance"

3. "Start service"

TeleService Diagnosis TeleService Diagnosis enables the wireless transmission of detailed vehicle data that are important for vehicle diagnosis. These data are transmitted automatically. After the data are transmitted, the voice con nection to Roadside Assistance is re-estab lished.

BMW Online At a glance A business search can be opened via BMW Online. License conditions This product contains NetFront Browser soft ware of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright 2007 ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. NetFront is a trademark or registered trade mark of ACCESS CO., LTD., in Japan and other countries. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.

Requirements Subscription to the optional Convenience

Plan. The date setting on the Control Display is

current. The vehicle is located within wireless net

work coverage.

Seite 262

Communication ConnectedDrive

262 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Starting BMW Online 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "BMW Online"

3. If necessary, "OK". The BMW Online home page is displayed.

Operating BMW Online To start a search: Turn the controller to highlight an element. Press the controller to display an element.

Opening the start page 1. Open "Options". 2. "Display start page"

Loading a new page 1. Open "Options". 2. "Reload"

Cancel 1. Open "Options". 2. "Cancel loading"

Customer Relations At a glance Contact Customer Relations for information on all aspects of your vehicle.

Calling Customer Relations

Vehicle not equipped with TeleService 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Customer Relations" The Customer Relations phone number is dis played. If the mobile phone is paired, a connec tion is established to Customer Relations.

Vehicle equipped with TeleService 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Customer Relations" 3. "Start service"

Service Request At a glance Sends information to your service partner to request the arrangement of a service appoint ment. The TeleService data is transmitted dur ing a Service Request. If possible, your service partner will establish contact with you.

Starting a Service Request 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Service Request"

Seite 263

ConnectedDrive Communication

263 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

3. "Start service"

A Service Request can be started via a Check Control message, refer to page 85.

Automatic Service Request The TeleService data necessary for servicing the vehicle are automatically sent to your serv ice partner prior to the service deadline. If pos sible, the service partner will contact you and a service appointment can be arranged. To check when your service partner was noti fied:

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status"

3. Open "Options". 4. "Last Service Request"

TeleService Report Transmits technical data when needed from your vehicle to BMW at regular intervals; these are evaluated for the continued development of BMW products.

TeleService Report is activated in vehicles that meet certain technical conditions and that have a current ConnectedDrive subscription; it is free of charge. Neither personal nor position data are trans mitted. To check when your service partner was noti fied:

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Options" 4. "Last Teleservice Info"

Services status Displaying available services Display of all services available in the vehicle.

1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Service Status" 3. "Available services"

Updating BMW Assist Manual update of TeleService.

1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Service Status" 3. "Update BMW Assist"

Seite 264

Communication ConnectedDrive

264 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Data transfer During the updating of BMW services, display the status of the data transfer.

1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Data transfer"

Apps At a glance Certain software applications of a suitable mo bile phone can be integrated in the vehicle. These software applications are displayed on the Control Display. They are operated via iDrive.

Requirements The mobile phone is suitable. The mobile phone operating system sup

ports the software applications of Apps. Software applications are installed on the

mobile phone and ready to use. Corresponding mobile wireless contract.

Any additionally incurred costs are not a part of Apps.

Use only BMW approved software applica tions; otherwise, it may result in malfunc tions.

Information about suitable mobile phones, available software applications and their instal lation can be found at www.bmw.com/connec tivity or at the service center.

Create the entries. Make entries only when traffic and road

conditions allow. Otherwise, the vehicle occu pants and other road users may be put in dan ger because of the distraction from driving. For reasons of safety, some software applica tions are usable only while the vehicle is sta tionary.

Operating Apps 1. Connect the mobile phone via the snap-in

adapter or via the USB audio interface. 2. "ConnectedDrive" 3. Select the desired software application.

Displaying status Information about the currently available soft ware applications can be displayed.

1. "ConnectedDrive" 2. "BMW apps"

Notes The ranges of Apps that can be displayed

on the Control Display depend on the range of installed software applications on the mobile phone.

The data transmission of the software ap plications from the mobile phone to the ve hicle can last some time. Some software applications depend on the speed of the available Internet connection of the mobile phone.

Some mobile phones cannot simultane ously use Apps and the Bluetooth hands- free system. If necessary, restart the software applica tion on the mobile phone after a phone conversation.

Seite 265

ConnectedDrive Communication

265 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Mobility In order to always ensure your mobility, you will

find important information on operating fluids, wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside

Assistance in the following.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Refueling Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

General information Refuel promptly At the latest, refuel at a range below

30 miles/50 km; otherwise, the engine function is not ensured and damage may occur.

For Diesel engines The filler neck is designed for refueling at die sel fuel pumps.

Notes Switch off the engine before refueling Always switch off the engine before refu

eling; otherwise, fuel cannot be added to the tank and a message will be displayed.

Observe when handling fuel Take all precautionary measures and

observe all applicable regulations when handling fuel.

Do not carry any spare fuel containers in your vehicle. They can develop a leak and cause an explosion or cause a fire in the event of an accident.

Fuel cap Opening 1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler

flap.

2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise. 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached

to the fuel filler flap.

Closing 1. Fit the fuel cap and turn it clockwise until

you clearly hear a click. 2. Close the fuel filler flap.

Do not pinch the retaining strap Do not pinch the retaining strap attached

to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed properly and fuel vapors can escape.

A message is displayed if the cap is loose or missing.

Manually unlocking fuel filler flap In the event of a malfunction, the fuel filler flap can be released manually:

1. Open the right-hand side panel in the cargo area.

Seite 268

Mobility Refueling

268 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

2. Pull the knob with the gas pump symbol.

Observe the following when refueling When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com pletely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel pump nozzle during refueling causes: Premature pump shutoff. Reduced efficiency in the fuel-vapor recov

ery system. The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time.

Do not overfill the fuel tank Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise,

escaping fuel may harm the environment or damage the vehicle.

Handling fuels Follow the safety instructions provided at

gas stations; otherwise, there is a danger of personal injury and property damage.

Fuel tank capacity Approx. 22.5 US gallons/85 liters, including the reserve capacity of approx. 2.1 US gallons/ 8 liters. X5 xDrive50i/X6 xDrive50i: reserve capacity of approx. 3.2 gallons/12 liters.

Seite 269

Refueling Mobility

269 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Fuel Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Fuel quality Gasoline For the best fuel economy, the gasoline should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. Do not use fuels that are labeled at the fuel pump as containing metals.

Only refuel with lead-free gasoline with out metal additives

Do not refuel with leaded gasoline or gasoline with metal additives, e. g., manganese or iron; otherwise, the catalytic converter and other components will be permanently damaged.

Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 10 %, i.e., E10, may be used for refueling. The ethanol should fulfill the following quality standards: US: ASTM 4806xx CAN: CGSB-3.511xx xx: always adhere to the currently applicable standard.

Do not refuel with ethanol E85 Do not refuel with E85, i.e., fuel with an

ethanol content of 85 %, or with Flex Fuel, as this would damage the engine and fuel supply system.

The engine is knock controlled. Therefore, you can refuel with different gasoline qualities.

Recommended fuel quality BMW recommends AKI 91.

Minimum fuel grade BMW recommends AKI 89.

Minimum fuel grade Do not fill up with fuel below the speci

fied minimum quality; otherwise, the engine may not run properly.

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life.

Minimum fuel grade The use of poor-quality fuels may result

in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi tionally, problems relating to drivability, start ing and stalling, especially under certain envi ronmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude, may occur. If drivability problems are encountered, we rec ommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade AKI num ber for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en gine deposits, it is highly recommended to purchase gasoline from BP or Top Tier retail ers. Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in the need for unscheduled main tenance.

Diesel

Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel The engine of your BMW is designed for diesel with a low sulfur content:

Seite 270

Mobility Fuel

270 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Ultra-low sulfur diesel ASTM D 975-xx. xx: always adhere to the currently applicable standard.

Only refuel with ultra-low sulfur diesel. The percentage of biodiesel in the fuel

must not exceed 5%, referred to as B5. Do not refuel with gasoline. If the vehicle has been re fueled with incorrect fuel such as gasoline, do not start the engine; otherwise, there is a dan ger of engine damage.

If you added the wrong fuel, contact the serv ice center. If the nozzle cannot be inserted into the fuel filler pipe of your BMW, please check to make sure that you are refueling with a diesel fuel pump and whether this is equipped with a die sel nozzle. In the event the Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel fuel cannot be fully inserted into the fuel filler neck, please contact BMW Roadside Assistance for instructions on how to add fuel. For more infor mation on BMW Roadside Assistance, refer to page 308.

Winter diesel To ensure that the diesel engine remains op erational in the winter, use winter diesel. It is available at gas stations during winter months. The standard fuel filter heating prevents the supply of fuel from stalling during driving.

Do not use diesel additives Do not use additives, including gasoline;

otherwise, engine damage may occur.

BMW X5 with BMW Advanced Diesel The concept BMW Advanced Diesel reduces nitrogen ox ides in the diesel exhaust of your vehicle by in jecting the reducing agent diesel exhaust fluid into the exhaust line. In the catalytic converter, a chemical reaction occurs that minimizes ni trogen oxides. In order to be able to start the engine in the usual way, there must be a sufficient supply of diesel exhaust fluid in the separate reservoir.

System heating In order to bring the system to operating tem perature after a cold start of the engine, the au tomatic transmission shifts into the next higher gear at a later point.

Reserve display A display in the instrument panel informs you about the remaining distance can be covered with the amount of fuel currently in the tank.

The reserve display appears approx. 1,000 miles/1,600 km before the tank is empty.

As soon as the reserve display has appeared in the instrument panel, have the diesel exhaust fluid refilled to prevent the engine from being unable to restart.

Seite 271

Fuel Mobility

271 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Diesel exhaust fluid at minimum

Even with a display of -- mls, the engine will continue to run, provided that it is not switched off, and all other operating requirements are met, e.g. sufficient fuel.

No engine start Do not drive until the displayed remain

ing distance runs out. Otherwise, it may not be possible to restart the engine.

Incorrect fueling The warning lamp lights up: The reservoir has been filled with an in correct fluid.

Please contact your service center.

Have diesel exhaust fluid refilled This exhaust fluid is refilled by your service center during regular maintenance. If you ad here to this maintenance schedule, it is usually not necessary to refill any fluids between the maintenance dates. Under certain circumstances, for example, due to a particularly sporty driving style or opera tion of the vehicle at high altitudes, it may be necessary to refill fluids between maintenance dates. As soon as the reserve display has appeared in the instrument panel, have the diesel exhaust fluid refilled to prevent the engine from being unable to restart. You can have the fluid refilled by a service cen ter.

Diesel exhaust fluid at low temperatures Due to its physical properties, it may be neces sary to replenish the level of diesel exhaust fluid at temperatures below +23 / -5 , even between the regular maintenance dates. If the fluid needs to be refilled, this will be indi cated with the reserve display in the instru ment cluster, refer to page 271.

Only refill the diesel exhaust fluid yourself in exceptional circumstances To be able to reach the nearest service center with your vehicle, you may refill the diesel ex haust fluid yourself, making sure to heed the warning notices specified below.

Handling diesel exhaust fluid Do not allow diesel exhaust fluid to come

into contact with you. This can lead to skin and eye irritation. Wear protective goggles and gloves as needed. Follow the safety instruc tions on the bottle. When opening the bottle or reservoir, pungent smelling vapors can escape. Before refilling, close the vehicle completely so that the vapors do not get into the interior of the vehicle. When handling diesel exhaust fluid in enclosed spaces, make sure to have suffi cient ventilation. After handling diesel exhaust fluid, wash hands thoroughly. Failure to do so may lead to irritation, for instance, due to inad vertent contact with the eyes. If eye irritation occurs, immediately rinse eyes with ample wa ter and contact a doctor if necessary. If diesel exhaust fluid comes into contact with surfaces of your vehicle, rinse the affected surfaces with water or else damage may occur. Keep diesel exhaust fluid out of reach of children.

Suitable diesel exhaust fluid Preferred: BMW Diesel Exhaust Fluid. This

bottle and its special adapter permit con venient refilling with diesel exhaust fluid.

Alternative: NOx reduction agent AUS 32

Seite 272

Mobility Fuel

272 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Diesel exhaust fluid can be obtained from your service center.

Refilling quantity Refilling quantity at the start of the reserve dis play: Approx. 0.75 gallons/2.7 liters

Open reservoir for diesel exhaust fluid 1. Open the hood, refer to page 289. 2. Fit the releasing tool from the tool kit, refer

to page 295, into place and open the lock, see arrow.

Refilling BMW diesel exhaust fluid 1. Set bottle into place and rotate until it

comes into contact with the stop, refer to arrow.

2. Press bottle down, refer to arrow.

The reservoir of the vehicle is filled.

3. The reservoir is full when the fill level in the bottle stops changing. It is not possible to overfill. Pull bottle back, refer to arrow, and un screw it.

Closing reservoir After the reservoir is filled, close it again with the releasing tool.

After refilling diesel exhaust fluid

Incorrect fluid Incorrect fluids After refilling with the incorrect fluid, e.g.,

antifreeze for windshield wiper fluid, do not start the engine because this could result in a fire hazard.

Contact your service center.

Bottle disposal Diesel exhaust fluid bottles can be dis posed of by your service center.

Seite 273

Fuel Mobility

273 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Only dispose of empty bottles in your house hold garbage if the local legal regulations per mit it.

Reserve display

After refilling, the reserve continues to appear after the engine is restarted. After the vehicle has been driven for a few more minutes, this display will disappear.

Seite 274

Mobility Fuel

274 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Wheels and tires Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Tire inflation pressure Safety information It is not merely the tires' service life, but also driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving safety that depend on the condition of the tires and the maintenance of the specified tire pres sure.

Checking the pressure Only check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. This means after a maximum of 1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours. When the tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Check the tire inflation pressure regularly

and correct it if necessary, even in the compact wheel: usually twice monthly or before em barking on a long trip. If you fail to observe this precaution, you may be driving on tires with in correct tire pressures, a condition that may not only compromise your vehicle's driving stabil ity, but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an accident.

Do not drive with depressurized or flat tires, except for run-flat tires. A flat tire will seriously impair your vehicle's handling and braking re sponse. Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead to a loss of control over the vehicle.

After adjusting the tire inflation pressure, reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 99, or reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 97.

Pressure specifications The tables below provide all the correct infla tion pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient temperature. The inflation pressures apply to the tire sizes approved and tire brands recommended by BMW; a list of these is available from your service center. For correct identification of the right tire infla tion pressures, observe the following: Tire sizes of your vehicle. Maximum allowable driving speed.

Tire inflation pressures for driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h For normal driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h, adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation pressures listed on the following pages in the column for traveling speeds up to 100 mph/ 160 km/h to achieve optimum driving comfort. These tire inflation pressures can also be found on the driver's side door pillar when the driver's door is open.

Seite 275

Wheels and tires Mobility

275 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed

The maximum permissible speed for these tire pressures is 100 mph/160 km/h. Do not ex ceed this speed; otherwise, tire damage and accidents may occur.

Tire inflation pressures for driving above 100 mph or 160 km/h

Adjust the tire inflation pressures To drive at maximum speeds in excess of

100 mph/160 km/h, adjust pressures to the re spective tire inflation pressures listed on the following pages in the column for traveling speeds including those exceeding 100 mph or 160 km/h. Otherwise, tire damage and acci dents could occur.

Observe all national and local maximum speed limits; otherwise, violations of the laws could occur.

Tire inflation pressures X5 xDrive35i/X5 xDrive35d with two rows of seats

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those exceeding 100 mph/ 160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the ta ble are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

Compact wheel: T 155/90 D 18 113 M T 155/80 R 19 114 M

Speeds of up to 50 mph/80 km/h 4.2/60

Without Sport Package:

255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL A/S RSC 255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL RSC

2.2/32 2.5/36 2.4/35 2.8/41

255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL A/S RSC 255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC

2.2/32 2.6/38 2.4/35 2.9/42

Front: 255/50 R 19 107 V XL RSC Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 V XL RSC

2.2/32 -

- 2.4/35

2.4/35 -

- 2.6/38

Seite 276

Mobility Wheels and tires

276 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC

2.3/33 -

- 2.4/35

2.4/35 -

- 2.6/38

Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL RSC Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL RSC

2.3/33 -

- 2.6/38

2.5/36 -

- 2.8/41

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 V M+S XL RSC Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 V M+S XL RSC

2.3/33 -

- 2.4/35

2.4/35 -

- 2.7/39

With Sport Package:

255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL RSC 2.2/32 2.5/36 2.4/35 2.8/41

255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC 2.2/32 2.6/38 2.4/35 2.9/42

Front: 255/50 R 19 107 V XL RSC Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 V XL RSC

2.2/32 -

- 2.4/35

2.7/39 -

- 2.9/42

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC

2.3/33 -

- 2.4/35

2.6/38 -

- 2.8/41

Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL RSC Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL RSC

2.3/33 -

- 2.6/38

2.6/38 -

- 3.1/45

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 V M+S XL RSC Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 V M+S XL RSC

2.3/33 -

- 2.4/35

2.7/39 -

- 3.0/44

Tire inflation pressures X5 xDrive50i with two rows of seats

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those exceeding 100 mph/ 160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the ta ble are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

Seite 277

Wheels and tires Mobility

277 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Compact wheel: T 155/90 D 18 113 M T 155/80 R 19 114 M

Speeds of up to 50 mph/80 km/h 4.2/60

Without Sport Package:

255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL A/S RSC 255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL RSC

2.2/32 2.5/36 2.4/35 2.8/41

255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL A/S RSC 255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC

2.2/32 2.7/39 2.5/36 3.0/44

Front: 255/50 R 19 107 W XL RSC Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 W XL RSC

2.2/32 -

- 2.4/35

2.5/36 -

- 2.6/38

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC

2.3/33 -

- 2.5/36

2.4/35 -

- 2.7/39

Front: 285/35 R 21 105 Y XL RSC Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 Y XL RSC

2.3/33 -

- 2.7/39

2.5/36 -

- 2.8/41

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 V M+S XL RSC Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 V M+S XL RSC

2.3/33 -

- 2.5/36

2.4/35 -

- 2.7/39

With Sport Package:

255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL RSC 2.2/32 2.5/36 2.4/35 2.8/41

255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC 2.2/32 2.7/39 2.5/36 3.0/44

Front: 255/50 R 19 107 W XL RSC Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 W XL RSC

2.2/32 -

- 2.4/35

2.8/41 -

- 3.1/45

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC

2.3/33 -

- 2.5/36

2.9/42 -

- 3.2/46

Front: 285/35 R 21 105 Y XL RSC Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 Y XL RSC

2.3/33 -

- 2.7/39

2.6/38 -

- 3.1/45

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 V M+S XL RSC Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 V M+S XL RSC

2.3/33 -

- 2.5/36

2.9/42 -

- 3.2/46

Seite 278

Mobility Wheels and tires

278 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Tire inflation pressures X5 xDrive35i/X5 xDrive35d with three rows of seats

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those exceeding 100 mph/ 160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the ta ble are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

Without Sport Package:

255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL A/S RSC 255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL RSC

2.3/33 2.8/41 2.6/38 3.1/45

255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL A/S RSC 255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC

2.5/36 3.0/44 2.8/41 3.3/48

Front: 255/50 R 19 107 V XL RSC Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 V XL RSC

2.2/32 -

- 2.6/38

2.4/35 -

- 2.9/42

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC

2.3/33 -

- 2.7/39

2.4/35 -

- 2.9/42

Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL RSC Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL RSC

2.4/35 -

- 2.9/42

2.6/38 -

- 3.1/45

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 V M+S XL RSC Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 V M+S XL RSC

2.3/33 -

- 2.7/39

2.4/35 -

- 2.9/42

With Sport Package:

255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL RSC 2.3/33 2.8/41 2.6/38 3.1/45

255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC 2.5/36 3.0/44 2.8/41 3.3/48

Front: 255/50 R 19 107 V XL RSC Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 V XL RSC

2.2/32 -

- 2.6/38

2.8/41 -

- 3.3/48

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC

2.3/33 -

- 2.7/39

2.8/41 -

- 3.3/48

Seite 279

Wheels and tires Mobility

279 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL RSC Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL RSC

2.4/35 -

- 2.9/42

2.9/42 -

- 3.4/49

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 V M+S XL RSC Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 V M+S XL RSC

2.3/33 -

- 2.7/39

2.8/41 -

- 3.3/48

Tire inflation pressures X5 xDrive50i with three rows of seats

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those exceeding 100 mph/ 160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the ta ble are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

Without Sport Package:

255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL A/S RSC 255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL RSC

2.3/33 2.8/41 2.6/38 3.1/45

255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL A/S RSC 255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC

2.5/36 3.0/44 2.8/41 3.3/48

Front: 255/50 R 19 107 W XL RSC Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 W XL RSC

2.2/32 -

- 2.6/38

2.4/35 -

- 2.9/42

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC

2.3/33 -

- 2.7/39

2.4/35 -

- 2.9/42

Front: 285/35 R 21 105 Y XL RSC Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 Y XL RSC

2.4/35 -

- 2.9/42

2.6/38 -

- 3.1/45

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 V M+S XL RSC Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 V M+S XL RSC

2.3/33 -

- 2.7/39

2.4/35 -

- 2.9/42

With Sport Package:

Seite 280

Mobility Wheels and tires

280 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL RSC 2.3/33 2.8/41 2.6/38 3.1/45

255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC 2.5/36 3.0/44 2.8/41 3.3/48

Front: 255/50 R 19 107 W XL RSC Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 W XL RSC

2.2/32 -

- 2.6/38

2.8/41 -

- 3.3/48

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC

2.3/33 -

- 2.7/39

2.9/42 -

- 3.4/49

Front: 285/35 R 21 105 Y XL RSC Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 Y XL RSC

2.4/35 -

- 2.9/42

2.8/41 -

- 3.2/46

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 V M+S XL RSC Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 V M+S XL RSC

2.3/33 -

- 2.7/39

2.9/42 -

- 3.4/49

Tire inflation pressure X6 xDrive35i

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those exceeding 100 mph/ 160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the ta ble are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL A/S RSC 255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC 255/50 R 19 107 V M+S XL RSC

2.2/32 2.4/35 2.5/36 3.0/44

Front: 255/50 R 19 107 V XL RSC Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 V XL RSC

2.2/32 -

- 2.2/32

2.5/36 -

- 2.6/38

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC

2.2/32 -

- 2.2/32

2.5/36 -

- 2.5/36

Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL RSC Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL RSC

2.2/32 -

- 2.3/33

2.6/38 -

- 2.7/39

Seite 281

Wheels and tires Mobility

281 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 V M+S XL RSC Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 V M+S XL RSC

2.2/32 -

- 2.2/32

2.5/36 -

- 2.7/39

Compact wheel: T 155/90 D 18 113 M T 155/80 R 19 114 M

Speeds of up to 50 mph/80 km/h 4.2/60

Tire inflation pressures for X6 xDrive50i

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those exceeding 100 mph/ 160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the ta ble are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL A/S RSC 255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC 255/50 R 19 107 V M+S XL RSC

2.3/33 2.5/36 2.8/41 3.0/44

Front: 255/50 R 19 107 W XL RSC Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 W XL RSC

2.5/36 -

- 2.5/36

2.9/42 -

- 2.9/42

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC

2.5/36 -

- 2.5/36

3.0/44 -

- 3.0/44

Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL RSC Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL RSC

2.5/36 -

- 2.5/36

3.1/45 -

- 3.1/45

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 V M+S XL RSC Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 V M+S XL RSC

2.5/36 -

- 2.5/36

3.0/44 -

- 3.0/44

Compact wheel: T 155/90 D 18 113 M T 155/80 R 19 114 M

Speeds of up to 50 mph/80 km/h 4.2/60

Seite 282

Mobility Wheels and tires

282 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Tire identification marks Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire makes it easier to identify and choose the right tires.

Tire size Example: 255/55 R 19 107 V 255: nominal width in mm 55: aspect ratio in % R: radial tire code 19: rim diameter in inches 107: load rating, not for ZR tires V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires

Speed letter Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h

Tire Identification Number Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Transportation. DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 1013 xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand xxx: tire size and tire design 1013: tire age

Tire age The tire manufacturing date is contained in the tire identification mark: DOT ... 1013 means that the tire was manufactured in the week 10 of 2013. BMW recommends that you replace all tires af ter 6 years at most, even if some tires may last for 10 years.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

DOT Quality Grades Treadwear Traction AA A B C Temperature A B C

Conform to Federal Safety Requirements All passenger car tires must conform to

Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart signifi cantly from the norm due to variations in driv ing habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Seite 283

Wheels and tires Mobility

283 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Temperature The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tires resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the ma terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Temperature grade for this tire The temperature grade for this tire is es

tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

RSC Run-flat tires The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle with the letters RSC on the sidewall, refer to page 286.

M+S Winter and all-season tires. These have better winter properties than summer tires.

XL Designation for specially reinforced tires.

Tire tread Summer tires Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.12 in/3 mm.

There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.

Winter tires Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.16 in/4 mm. Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are less suitable for winter operation.

Minimum tread depth

Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's circumference and have the legally re quired minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.

They are marked on the side of the tire with TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.

Tire damage General information Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.

Notes Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and suspension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cush ioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped with low-profile tires.

Seite 284

Mobility Wheels and tires

284 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de fects: Unusual vibrations during driving. Unusual handling such as a strong ten

dency to pull to the left or right. Damage can be caused by driving over curbs, road damage and similar situations.

In case of tire damage If there are indications of tire damage, re

duce your speed immediately and have the wheels and tires checked right away; other wise, there is the increased risk of an accident. Drive carefully to the next service center or tire shop. If necessary, have the vehicle towed. Otherwise, tire damage can present a life- threatening hazard to vehicle occupants and other road users.

Repair of tire damage For safety reasons, the manufacturer of

your vehicle recommends that you do not have damaged tires repaired; they should be re placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re sult.

Changing wheels and tires Mounting

Information on mounting tires Have mounting and balancing performed

only by a service center or tire specialist. If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.

Wheel and tire combination Information on the right wheel and tire combi nation and rim version for your vehicle can be obtained from the service center.

Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the function of a variety of systems such as ABS or DSC. To maintain good handling and vehicle re sponse, use only tires with a single tread con figuration from a single manufacturer. Following tire damage, have the original wheel and tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible.

Approved wheels and tires The manufacturer of your vehicle recom

mends that you use only wheels and tires that have been approved for your particular vehicle model. For example, despite having the same official size ratings, variations can lead to body con tact and with it, the risk of severe accidents. The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot eval uate non-approved wheels and tires to deter mine if they are suited for use, and therefore cannot ensure the operating safety of the vehi cle if they are mounted.

Wheels with electronics for TPM Tire Pressure Monitor When mounting new tires or changing from summer to winter tires or vice versa, only use wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise, the Tire Pressure Monitor will not be able to detect a flat tire, refer to page 99. Your service center will be glad to advise you.

Seite 285

Wheels and tires Mobility

285 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Recommended tire brands

For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve hicle recommends certain tire brands. These can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall. With proper use, these tires meet the highest standards for safety and handling.

Retreaded tires The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec ommend the use of retreaded tires.

Retreaded tires Possibly substantial variations in the de

sign and age of the tire casing structures can limit service life and have a negative impact on road safety.

Winter tires The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures below +45 /+7 . Although so-called all-season M+S tires do provide better winter traction than summer tires, they do not provide the same level of per formance as winter tires.

Maximum speed of winter tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then display a corresponding sign in the field of vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire specialist or from your service center.

Maximum speed for winter tires Do not exceed the maximum speed for

the winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and ac cidents can occur.

Run-flat tires For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. Your service center will be glad to advise you.

Rotating wheels between axles The manufacturer of your vehicle advises against swapping wheels between the front and rear axles. This can impair the handling characteristics. Rotating the tires is not permissible when us ing different types of tires.

Storage Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.

Run-flat tires Label

RSC label on the tire sidewall. The wheels are composed of special rims and tires that are self-supporting, to a limited de gree.

Seite 286

Mobility Wheels and tires

286 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

The support of the sidewall allows the tire to remain drivable to a restricted degree in the event of a pressure loss.

Driving with a damaged tire: Flat Tire Monitor FTM, refer to page 97 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM, refer to

page 99

Snow chains Only certain fine-link snow chains have been tested by BMW, classified as safe for use and recommended. Consult your service center for more information. BMW X5: use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped with tires of the following size: 255/55 R 18 255/50 R 19 BMW X6: use only in pairs on rear wheels of size 255/50 R 19. Observe the manufacturer's instructions when mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when using snow chains. Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if snow chains are mounted; otherwise, the instrument might issue an incorrect reading. When driving with snow chains, it can be bene ficial to temporarily activate DTC, refer to page 106.

Seite 287

Wheels and tires Mobility

287 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Engine compartment Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Important features in the engine compartment BMW X5

1 Filler neck for washer fluid for the head lamp and window washer system73

2 Starting aid terminal309

3 Coolant expansion tank292 4 Engine oil filler neck291

Seite 288

Mobility Engine compartment

288 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

BMW X6

1 Filler neck for the washer fluid for the headlamp and window washer system75

2 Engine oil filler neck291

3 Starting aid terminal309 4 Coolant expansion tank292

Hood Opening the hood

Working in the engine compartment Never attempt to perform any service or

repair operations on your vehicle without the necessary professional technical training. If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide lines, have any work on the vehicle performed only by a service center.

If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.

1. Pull the lever.

Seite 289

Engine compartment Mobility

289 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

2. Press the release handle and open the hood.

Closing the hood

Drop the hood from a height of ap prox. 16 in/40 cm. It must be clearly heard to engage.

Hood open when driving If you see any signs that the hood is not

completely closed while driving, pull over im mediately and close it securely.

Danger of pinching Make sure that the closing path of the

hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Engine oil General information Engine oil consumption depends on the driv ing style and the conditions of use. A highly sporty driving style, for example, results in considerably higher engine oil consumption.

Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level after refueling.

Checking the engine oil level Your car is equipped with an electronic engine oil level check.

Requirements The engine must be running and warm af

ter the vehicle has been driven for at least 6.2 miles/10 km.

The vehicle is stopped or being driven on a level roadway.

Displaying the oil level 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Engine oil level"

Possible messages "Engine oil level OK" "Measurement not possible at this time." "Measuring engine oil level..."

Duration with the engine running: ap prox. 3 minutes. Duration while driving: approx. 5 minutes. If engine oil was added, it may take up to 30 minutes to obtain an oil level reading.

"Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1 quart!" Add a maximum quantity of 1 US quart/1 li ter of engine oil at the next opportunity, re fer also to Adding engine oil below.

Seite 290

Mobility Engine compartment

290 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

"Engine oil level too high! Have this checked."

Too much engine oil Have the vehicle checked immedi

ately; otherwise, surplus oil can lead to en gine damage.

"Measurement inactive. Have this checked." Do not add engine oil. It is possi ble to continue driving. Note the newly cal culated remaining mileage until the next oil service, refer to page 83. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Adding engine oil

Filler neck

BMW X5

BMW X6

Add a maximum quantity of 1 US quart/1 liter of oil only after the corresponding message appears on the Control Display.

Add oil promptly Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km;

otherwise, engine damage could result.

Too much engine oil Have the vehicle checked immediately;

otherwise, surplus oil can lead to engine dam age.

Protect children Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil

dren and heed the warnings on the containers to prevent health risks.

Oil types for refilling

Notes No oil additives Do not use oil additives as these may

cause engine damage.

Viscosity classes of engine oils When selecting an engine oil, ensure that

the engine oil belongs to one of the SAE vis cosity classes 0W-40, 0W-30, 5W-40, or 5W-30, or malfunctions or engine damage may occur.

The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine. Due to national regulations, some oil types are not available in every country.

Approved oil types

Gasoline engine

BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30

BMW Longlife-01

BMW Longlife-01 FE

Diesel engine

BMW Longlife-04

Seite 291

Engine compartment Mobility

291 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Further information on approved oil types can be obtained from the service center.

Alternative oil types If the approved engine oils are not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an oil with the following specification can be used:

Gasoline engine

API SM or a higher quality standard

Diesel engine

API ILSAC GF-5

Oil change An oil change should be carried out by the service center only.

Coolant General information

Danger of burns from hot engine Do not open the cooling system while

the engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant may cause burns.

Suitable additives Only use suitable additives; otherwise,

engine damage may occur. The additives are harmful to your health.

Coolant consists of water and additives.

Not all commercially available additives are suitable for your vehicle. Ask your service cen ter for suitable additives.

Checking the coolant level 1. Do not open the hood until the engine has

cooled down. 2. Turn the expansion tank cap counterclock

wise slightly to allow any accumulated pressure to escape; then continue turning to open.

3. The filling level indicator 1 in the filler neck indicates the coolant level. The coolant level is correct if it is between the arrows of the respective reservoir label 2.

4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill.

5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click. 6. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi

nated as soon as possible.

Disposal Comply with the appropriate environ mental protection regulations when dis

posing of coolant additives.

Seite 292

Mobility Engine compartment

292 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Maintenance Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

BMW Maintenance System

The maintenance system provides information on required maintenance measures and thus provides support in maintaining road safety and the operational reliability of the vehicle.

Condition Based Service CBS Sensors and special algorithms take into ac count the driving conditions of your vehicle. Based on this, Condition Based Service deter mines the maintenance requirements. The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance you need to your user profile. Details on the service requirements, refer to page 83, can be displayed on the Control Dis play.

On the Control Display, the remaining distan ces and times for selected maintenance re quirements and any legally required deadlines can be displayed individually, refer to page 83.

Service data in the remote control Information on the required maintenance is continuously stored in the remote control. Your service center will read out this data and suggest the right array of service procedures for your vehicle. Therefore, hand your service specialist the re mote control that you used most recently.

Setting the correct date Make sure the date is set correctly, refer

to page 87; otherwise, the effectiveness of CBS Condition Based Service is not ensured.

Storage periods Storage periods during which the vehicle bat tery was disconnected are not taken into ac count. If this occurs, have a service center update the time-dependent maintenance procedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/ activated-charcoal filter.

Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Please consult your Service and Warranty In formation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod els for additional information on service re quirements.

Seite 293

Maintenance Mobility

293 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Maintenance and repair should be performed by your service center. Make sure to have reg ular maintenance procedures recorded in the vehicle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models, and in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod els. These entries are proof of regular mainte nance.

Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis

On the driver's side is an OBD socket for checking the primary components in the vehi cle emissions.

Emissions The warning lamp lights up:

Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.

The warning lamp flashes under certain circumstances: This indicates that there is excessive mis firing in the engine. Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief pe riod can seriously damage emission con trol components, in particular the catalytic converter.

Display of the previously described malfunctions on Canadian models.

Fuel cap The indicator lamp lights up. If the fuel cap is not properly tight ened, the OBD system may conclude

that fuel vapor is escaping. If the cap is then tightened, the display should go out in a short time.

Seite 294

Mobility Maintenance

294 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Replacing components Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Tool kit

The tool kit is stowed under the cargo floor panel in the cargo area.

Wiper blade replacement Do not fold down the wipers without wiper blades

Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades have not been installed; this may damage the windshield.

Front

1. Fold up the wiper arm. 2. Press the release button on the wiper arm,

see arrow 1. 3. Pull off the wiper blade toward the front,

see arrow 2.

BMW X5: rear

1. Lift off the wiper arm completely and pull off the wiper blade, refer to arrow.

2. Mount the new wiper blade and press on until it is heard to engage.

Lamp and bulb replacement Notes

Lamps and bulbs Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu tion to vehicle safety.

Seite 295

Replacing components Mobility

295 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you entrust corresponding procedures to the service center if you are unfamiliar with them or they are not described here. You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs at the service center.

Danger of burns Only change bulbs when they are cool;

otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.

Working on the lighting system When working on the lighting system,

you should always switch off the lights af fected to prevent short circuits. To avoid possible injury or equipment damage when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufacturer.

Do not perform work/bulb replacement on xenon headlamps

Have any work on the xenon lighting system, including bulb replacement, performed only by a service center. Due to the high voltage present in the system, there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.

Do not touch the bulbs Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with

your bare hands, as even minute amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.

Light-emitting diodes LED Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu cent lenses serve as the light source for many of the controls, displays and other equipment in your vehicle. These light-emitting diodes, which operate us ing a concept similar to that applied in conven

tional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.

Do not remove the covers Do not remove the covers, and never

stare into the unfiltered light for several hours; otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.

Headlamp glass Condensation can form on the inside of the headlamps in cool or humid weather. When you drive with the lights switched on, the con densation evaporates after a short time. The headlamps do not need to be changed. If the condensation in the headlamps does not evaporate after trips with the lights switched on, and the amount of moisture in the head lamps increases, for example if water droplets form, have them checked by your service cen ter.

BMW X5: bulb replacement Xenon headlamps

Notes Because of the long life of these bulbs, the likelihood of failure is very low. Switching the lamps on and off frequently shortens their life. If a xenon bulb fails, switch on the front fog lamps and continue the trip with great care. Comply with local regulations.

Do not perform work/bulb replacement on xenon headlamps

Have any work on the xenon lighting system, including bulb replacement, performed only by a service center. Due to the high voltage present in the system, there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.

Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 295.

Seite 296

Mobility Replacing components

296 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Parking lamps, roadside parking lamps, daytime running lights These lamps are made using LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.

Turn signals, front Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 295. The illustration shows the right side of the en gine compartment. 24-watt bulb, PY24W

1. Rotate bulb holder to the left and remove it along with the bulb.

2. Rotate the bulb to the right along with the socket and replace.

3. Install in the reverse order.

Side marker lamps, rear Contact the service center for bulb replace ment.

Fog lamps Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 295. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.

Tail lamps Turn signal, brake lamp: 21-watt bulb,

P21W. Brake force display: 21-watt bulb, P21W.

Backup lamp: 16-watt bulb, W16W Tail lamp: LED technology.

Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.

Arrangement of tail lamps

1 Tail lamp 2 Brake force display 3 Brake lamp 4 Tail lamp/side marker lamp 5 Backup lamp 6 Turn signal

Turn signals, brake lamps and backup lamps Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 295. The bulbs are integrated in a single bulb holder.

1. Open the side panel in the cargo area. 2. Remove the first aid kit and warning trian

gle if necessary. Fold up the insulation.

Seite 297

Replacing components Mobility

297 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

3. Press the button, arrow 1, down, press the catches, arrows 2, outward slightly, and re move the bulb holder.

4. Apply gentle pressure to the P21W bulb while turning it to the left for removal and replacement. Remove the W16W bulb and replace.

5. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audi bly clicks into place.

6. Remount the side panel.

Brake Force Display Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 295.

1. Carefully remove the cover in the tailgate panel with a screwdriver.

2. Push the catch on the bulb holder to the left, arrow, and remove it.

3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and re placement.

4. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audi bly clicks into place.

5. Before installing the cap, unclip the cargo area lamp. Then lay the cap on its upper side and close it, refer to arrow.

6. Position the cargo area lamp and clip it in, refer to arrow.

License plate lamps Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 295. These lamps are made using LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.

Center brake lamp Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 295. This lamp uses LED technology for operation. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.

Seite 298

Mobility Replacing components

298 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

BMW X6: bulb replacement Xenon headlamps

Notes Because of the long life of these bulbs, the likelihood of failure is very low. Switching the lamps on and off frequently shortens their life. If a xenon bulb fails, switch on the front fog lamps and continue the trip with great care. Comply with local regulations.

Do not perform work/bulb replacement on xenon headlamps

Have any work on the xenon lighting system, including bulb replacement, performed only by a service center. Due to the high voltage present in the system, there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.

Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 295.

Parking lamps, roadside parking lamps, daytime running lights The illustration shows the left side of the en gine compartment. 35-watt bulb, H8

1. Turn the cover to the left and remove.

2. Left side of vehicle: rotate the bulb holder to the right, see arrow, and remove.

Right side of vehicle: rotate the bulb holder to the left and remove.

3. Disconnect plug and replace bulb. 4. Install in the reverse order.

Side marker lamps The illustration shows the left side of the en gine compartment. 5-watt bulb, WY5W XLL

1. Rotate the bulb holder to the left and re move.

2. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and re place.

3. Install in the reverse order.

LED headlamps Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 295. With LED headlamps, the following lamps are designed with LED technology: Low beams/high beams Adaptive Light Control Parking and roadside parking lamps

Seite 299

Replacing components Mobility

299 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Daytime running lights. Side marker lights. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.

Turn signals, front Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 295. The illustration shows the left side of the en gine compartment. 24-watt bulb, PY24W

1. Rotate bulb holder to the left and remove it along with the bulb.

2. Rotate the bulb to the right along with the socket and replace.

3. Install in the reverse order.

Fog lamps Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 295. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.

Tail lamps Turn signal, backup lamp: 21-watt bulb,

H21W. Brake lamp, brake force display: 21-watt

bulb, P21W Tail lamp: LED technology.

Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.

Arrangement of tail lamps

1 Tail lamps 2 Brake force display 3 Brake lamp 4 Backup lamp 5 Turn signal

Brake lamps Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 295.

1. Open the side panel in the cargo area. 2. Remove the first aid kit and warning trian

gle if necessary. 3. Rotate the relevant bulb socket to the left

and remove.

4. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and re placement.

5. Install in the reverse order.

Seite 300

Mobility Replacing components

300 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Turn signal Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 295.

1. Open the side panel in the cargo area. 2. Remove the first aid kit and warning trian

gle if necessary. 3. Remove bulb holder along with bulb and

replace.

4. Install in the reverse order.

Backup lamp Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 295.

1. Open the side panel in the cargo area. 2. Remove the first aid kit and warning trian

gle if necessary. 3. Remove bulb holder along with bulb and

replace.

4. Install in the reverse order.

Brake force display Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 295.

1. Carefully remove the cover in the tailgate panel with a screwdriver.

2. Rotate the bulb socket to the left and re move.

3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and re placement.

4. Insert the bulb socket in the tailgate and engage it.

5. Replace the cover.

License plate lamps Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 295. These lamps are made using LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.

Center brake lamp Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 295.

Seite 301

Replacing components Mobility

301 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

This lamp uses LED technology for operation. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.

Changing wheels Notes Your vehicle is equipped with run-flat tires, re fer to page 286, as standard equipment. They do not need to be replaced immediately in the event of a puncture. When mounting new tires or changing from summer to winter tires or vice versa, use run- flat tires for your own safety. BMW X6: do not rotate the front wheels to the rear or vice versa, as otherwise the handling characteristics will be negatively affected. Suitable tools for changing the wheels are available from the service center as an acces sory.

Jacking points for the vehicle jack

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo cated in the positions shown.

Compact wheel Safety precautions in the event of a flat tire or wheel change

Park the vehicle as far as possible from pass ing traffic and on solid ground. Switch on the hazard warning system.

Set the parking brake and engage transmis sion position P. Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehi cle and ensure that they remain outside the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail. If a warning triangle or portable hazard warning lamp is required, set it up on the roadside at an appropriate distance from the rear of the vehi cle. Comply with all safety guidelines and regu lations. Change the wheel only on a level, firm surface which is not slippery. The vehicle or the jack could slip to the side if you attempt to raise the vehicle on a soft or slippery surface such as snow, ice, tiles, etc. Position the jack on a firm support surface. Do not use a wooden block or similar object as a support base for the jack, as this would pre vent it from extending to its full support height and reduce its load-carrying capacity. To avoid serious or fatal injury: never lie under the vehicle, and never start the engine while it is supported by the jack.

What you will need To avoid rattling noises later on, note the posi tions of the tools before removing them, then return them to their initial positions after com pleting work. The tools are located in the mount under the floor panel flap.

Seite 302

Mobility Replacing components

302 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

1 Vehicle jack 2 Vehicle jack crank 3 Lug bolts wrench

Removing compact wheel The compact wheel is located in the cargo area under the floor panel.

1. Remove the tool mount. 2. Release the wing nut 1. 3. Remove the washer 2 laterally. 4. Remove the compact wheel.

Preparing wheel change 1. Observe the safety precautions above. 2. Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.

Jacking up vehicle 1. Position the vehicle jack at the jacking

point closest to the wheel so that the entire surface of the jack base rests on the ground perpendicularly beneath the jack ing point.

The vehicle jack is designed for changing wheels only.

The vehicle jack is designed for changing wheels only. Do not attempt to raise an other vehicle model with it or to raise any load of any kind. To do so could cause ac cidents and personal injury.

2. Guide the jack head into the rectangular recess of the jacking point when cranking up, refer to illustration detail.

3. Jack the vehicle up until the wheel you are changing is raised from the ground.

Mounting a wheel 1. Unscrew the lug bolts and remove the

wheel. 2. Remove accumulations of mud or dirt from

the mounting surfaces of the wheel and hub. Also clean the lug bolts.

3. Position the new wheel or compact wheel. Secure the wheel by screwing at least two lug bolts into opposite bolt holes. When you mount wheels other than Genu ine BMW light-alloy wheels, different lug bolts may also be required.

Seite 303

Replacing components Mobility

303 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

4. Screw in the remaining lug bolts. Tighten all the bolts securely in a diagonal pattern.

5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack from beneath the vehicle.

After mounting 1. Tighten the lug bolts in a diagonal pattern.

Checking that the lug bolts are tight To ensure safety, always have the lug

bolts checked with a calibrated torque wrench as soon as possible to ensure that they are tightened to the specified torque. Otherwise, incorrectly tightened lug bolts are a hidden safety risk. The tightening tor que equals 101 lb ft/140 Nm.

2. Stow the defective wheel in the cargo area. The defective wheel cannot be stored un der the floor panel flap due to its size.

3. Check and correct the tire inflation pres sure at the earliest opportunity.

4. Initialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 97, or reset the Tire Pressure Moni tor, refer to page 99.

5. Replace the damaged tire as soon as pos sible and have the new wheel/tire bal anced.

Driving with compact wheel Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Drive conservatively and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Otherwise, changes in the driving characteristics could result, for example reduced track stability on braking, ex tended braking distance, and altered self- steering characteristics in the limit range. In conjunction with winter tires, these character istics are more pronounced.

Only mount one compact wheel Only one compact wheel may be

mounted. Restore the wheels and tires to their original size as quickly as possible. Failure to do so is a safety risk.

Vehicle battery Maintenance The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec trolyte will last for the life of the battery. Your service center will be glad to advise you on questions regarding the battery.

Battery replacement Use approved vehicle batteries Only use vehicle batteries that have been

approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer; otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and systems or functions may not be fully availa ble.

After a battery replacement, have the battery registered on the vehicle by your service cen ter to ensure that all comfort functions are fully available.

Charging the battery

Note Do not connect the charger to the socket Do not connect the battery charger to

the socket installed in the vehicle at the factory as this could damage the battery.

General information Ensure that the battery is sufficiently charged to achieve the full battery life. It may be necessary to charge the battery in the following cases: When the vehicle is frequently used to

drive short distances.

Seite 304

Mobility Replacing components

304 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

When the vehicle has not been driven for more than one month.

Starting aid terminals Only charge using the starting aid terminals, refer to page 309, in the engine compartment while the engine is switched off.

Power failure After a temporary power loss, some equipment needs to be reinitialized. Individual settings need to be reprogrammed: Seat and mirror memory: store the posi

tions again, refer to page 57. Time: update, refer to page 87. Date: update, refer to page 87. Radio station: save again, refer to

page 192. Navigation system: wait for the navigation

system to be operational. Glass sunroof/panoramic glass sunroof: it

may only be possible to raise the roof. Have the system initialized by the service center.

Digital compass: recalibrate, refer to page 141.

Active steering: the system automatically initializes for a short time as you drive. Dur ing this time, the system is deactivated, re fer to page 110.

xDrive: the system automatically initializes as you drive. During this time, indicator lamps light up. If the lamps do not disap pear during the current trip, have the sys tem checked.

Disposing of old batteries Have old batteries disposed of by your service center or bring them to a recy cling center.

Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport.

Fuses Replacing fuses Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and

do not replace a defective fuse with a substi tute of another color or amperage rating; this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re sulting in a fire in the vehicle.

In interior The fuses are located in the front passenger footwell on the underside of the instrument cluster.

1. Unscrew screws, refer to arrows, of foot well trim panel.

2. Lay the trim panel in the footwell. 3. Release the screw, arrow 1, and fold the

fuse carrier down, arrow 2.

4. Replace the fuse concerned. 5. Installation is carried out in the reverse or

der of removal. Ensure correct and secure attachment of the footwell trim panel in the process.

Seite 305

Replacing components Mobility

305 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

In cargo area

Open the right-hand side panel in the cargo area.

Seite 306

Mobility Replacing components

306 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Breakdown assistance Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Hazard warning flashers

The button for the hazard warning system is located on the center console.

Emergency Request Requirements Equipment version with full preparation

package mobile phone. An Emergency Request can be made, even if no mobile phones are paired with the ve hicle.

BMW Assist is activated. Radio readiness is switched on. The BMW Assist system is logged in to a

wireless communications network sup ported by BMW Assist.

The Assist system is operable.

Only press the SOS button in an emergency. Emergency Request not guaranteed For technical reasons, the Emergency

Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavor able conditions.

Service contract After your contract with BMW Assist has

expired, the BMW Assist system can be deactivated by the service center without you having to visit a workshop. After deactivation, an Emergency Request is no longer possible.

Under certain circumstances, the system can be reactivated by a service center after you sign a new contract.

Initiating an Emergency Request 1. Press the cover briefly to open it.

2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the button lights up.

The LED lights up: an Emergency Request was initiated. If the circumstances allow this, remain in the vehicle until the connection has been established.

The LED flashes if the connection to the BMW Assist Response Center has been established.

Seite 307

Breakdown assistance Mobility

307 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Once the BMW Response Center has re ceived your Emergency Request, the BMW Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you. Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain circum stances. For this purpose, data that are used to de termine the necessary rescue measures, such as the current position of the vehicle if it can be established, are transmitted to the BMW Response Center.

If the LED is flashing but the BMW Re sponse Center cannot be heard on the hands-free system, the hands-free system may be malfunctioning. However, the BMW Response Center may still be able to hear you.

Initiating an Emergency Request automatically Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re quest is automatically initiated immediately af ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti fication is not affected by pressing the SOS button.

Roadside Assistance Service availability Roadside Assistance can be reached around the clock in many countries. You can obtain as sistance there in the event of a vehicle break down.

Roadside Assistance The Roadside Assistance, refer to page 262, phone number can be viewed on the iDrive or a connection to Roadside Assistance can be es tablished directly.

Warning triangle The warning triangle is located in the cargo area.

First aid kit The first aid kit is located in a storage compart ment on the right side in the cargo area. Some of the articles contained in the first aid pouch have a limited service life. Check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any items promptly.

Jump-starting Notes If the battery is discharged, an engine can be started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca bles with fully insulated clamp handles. To prevent personal injury or damage to both vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce dure.

Do not touch live parts To avoid the risk of potentially fatal in

jury, always avoid all contact with electrical components while the engine is running.

Preparation 1. Check whether the battery of the other ve

hicle has a voltage of 12 volts and approxi mately the same capacitance in Ah. This information can be found on the battery.

2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi cle.

3. Switch off any electronic systems/power consumers in both vehicles.

Seite 308

Mobility Breakdown assistance

308 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Bodywork contact between vehicles There must not be any contact between

the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise there is a danger of shorting.

Starting aid terminals Connecting order Connect the jumper cables in the correct

order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury from sparking.

The so-called starting aid terminal in the en gine compartment acts as the battery's posi tive terminal. Fold open the cover. To do so, pull the tab.

The body ground or a special nut acts as the negative terminal.

Connecting jumper cables 1. Fold open the cover of the BMW starting-

aid terminal. To do so, pull the tab. 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive

jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting

aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis tance.

3. Attach the other end of the cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.

4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle providing as sistance.

5. Attach the other end of the cable to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.

Starting the engine Never use spray fluids to start the engine.

1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an in creased idle speed. If the vehicle being started has a diesel en gine: let the engine of the assisting vehicle run for approx. 10 minutes.

2. Start the engine of the vehicle being started in the usual way. If the first starting attempt is not success ful, wait a few minutes before making an other attempt in order to allow the dis charged battery to recharge.

3. Let both engines run for several minutes. 4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re

verse order. Check the battery and recharge if necessary.

Tow-starting and towing Observe applicable laws and regulations Observe applicable laws and regulations

for tow-starting and towing.

Seite 309

Breakdown assistance Mobility

309 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

No additional passengers Do not transport any passengers other

than the driver in a vehicle that is being towed.

Transporting your vehicle

Note Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed. Therefore, contact a service center in the event of a breakdown.

Do not have the vehicle towed Have your vehicle transported on a load

ing platform only; otherwise, damage may oc cur.

Tow truck

Do not lift the vehicle Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or

body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may result.

Use the tow fitting screwed in at the front for maneuvering the vehicle only.

Towing other vehicles

General information Light towing vehicle Your vehicle must not be lighter than the

vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be possible to control vehicle response.

Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow

fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may cause damage.

Switch on the hazard warning system, de pending on local regulations.

If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win dow.

Towing methods when towing other vehicles

Tow bar The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe the following: Clearance and maneuvering capability will

be sharply limited during cornering. The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it

is attached offset.

Tow rope When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut. To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on the vehicle components when towing, al ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps.

Attaching the tow rope correctly Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit

ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is secured on other parts of the vehicle.

Tow fitting The screw-in tow fitting should always be car ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW. It is stored with the tool kit under the cargo floor cover in the cargo area, refer to page 295.

Seite 310

Mobility Breakdown assistance

310 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Tow fitting, information on use Use only the tow fitting provided with

the vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the tow fitting for towing on paved

roads only. Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,

do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the vehicle can occur.

Screw thread Left/right cover in the bumper: press on the ar row symbol on the cover.

BMW X5: front

BMW X6: front

Rear

Tow-starting

Note Do not tow-start your vehicle. Due to the automatic transmission, the engine cannot be started by tow-starting. Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem edied.

Seite 311

Breakdown assistance Mobility

311 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Care Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Car washes Notes

Steam jets or high-pressure washers When using steam jets or high-pressure

washers, hold them a sufficient distance away and use a maximum temperature of 140 /60 . Holding them too close or using excessively high pressures or temperatures can cause damage or preliminary damage that may then lead to long-term damage. Follow the operating instructions for the high- pressure washer.

Cleaning sensors/cameras with high- pressure washers

When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the exterior sensors and cameras, for Park Distance Control or the backup camera, for instance, for extended periods of time and only from a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.

Regularly remove foreign bodies, such as leaves, from the area below the windshield when the hood is open. Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in winter. Intense soiling and road salt can damage the vehicle.

Washing in automatic car washes Give preference to cloth car washes or those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage.

Notes Note the following: Make sure that the wheels and tires are not

damaged by the transport mechanisms. Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they

may be damaged, depending on the width of the vehicle.

Deactivate rain sensor, refer to page 74, to prevent unintentional wiper action.

BMW X5: deactivate the rear window wiper and protect it from damage. Ask the car wash operator about any necessary pro tective measures.

Remove additional attachments, for in stance a spoiler or telephone antenna, if there is a risk that these may be damaged.

Guide rails in car washes Avoid car washes with guide rails higher

than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body could be damaged.

Before driving into a car wash The vehicle is able to roll if the following steps are taken.

1. Insert the remote control into the ignition lock, even with Comfort Access.

2. Engage transmission position N. 3. Release the parking brake. 4. Deactivating Automatic Hold, refer to

page 70. 5. Switch the engine off. 6. Leave the remote control in the ignition

lock so that the vehicle can roll.

Seite 312

Mobility Care

312 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Transmission position P will be engaged: Automatically after approx. 30 minutes. When the remote control is removed from

the ignition lock.

Mixed tires Note the vehicle width Before driving into a car wash, make sure

that the vehicle width is not too large for the car wash, as otherwise the vehicle and the car wash could be damaged.

Headlamps Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or

caustic cleansers. Soak areas that have been soiled e.g. due

to insects, with shampoo and wash off with water.

Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice scraper.

After washing the vehicle After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can occur. Fully remove any residue from the windows to prevent obstruction of view from streaking, wiping noises, and wiper wear.

Vehicle care Car care products BMW recommends using cleaning and care products from BMW, since these have been tested and approved.

Car care and cleaning products Follow the instructions on the container.

When cleaning the interior, open the doors or windows.

Only use products intended for cleaning vehi cles. Cleansers can contain substances that are dangerous and harmful to your health.

Vehicle paint Regular care contributes to driving safety and value retention. Environmental influences in areas with high air pollution or natural contami nants, such as tree resin or pollen, can have an impact on the vehicle paint. Tailor the fre quency and extent of your car care to these in fluences. Immediately remove aggressive substances, such as spilled fuel, oil, grease, or bird drop pings, to prevent damage to or discoloration of the paintwork.

Leather care Remove dust from the leather often, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner. Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear and premature degradation of the leather surface. To guard against discoloration, such as from clothing, provide leather care roughly every two months. Clean light-colored leather more frequently as dust and dirt are more noticeable. Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and grease will gradually break down the protective layer of the leather surface. Suitable care products are available from the service center.

Upholstery material care Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner. If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suita ble interior cleaner.

Seite 313

Care Mobility

313 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Clean the upholstery down to the seams using large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the material vigorously.

Damage from Velcro fasteners Open Velcro fasteners on pants or

other articles of clothing can damage the seat covers. Ensure that any Velcro fasteners are closed.

Caring for special components

Light-alloy wheels When cleaning the wheels on the vehicle, only use a neutral wheel rim cleaner with a pH value of 5 to 9. Do not use abrasive cleaners or a steam jet hotter than 140 /60 ; otherwise, damage may result. Adhere to the manufac turer instructions. Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaners may destroy the protective coating of neighboring components such as the brake disc.

Chrome surfaces Carefully clean components such as the radia tor grille or door handles with an ample supply of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic ularly when they have been exposed to road salt.

Aluminum running boards A rust film on the aluminum running boards can be removed with a special cleaning agent.

Rubber components Aside from water, treat only with rubber cleansers. When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing car care products in order to avoid damage or reduced noise damping.

Fine wood parts Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft cloth.

Plastic components These include: Imitation leather surfaces. Headliner. Lamp lenses. Instrument cluster cover. Matte black spray-coated components. Painted parts in the interior. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Moisten the cloth lightly with water if neces sary. Do not soak the headliner.

Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents

Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead to surface damage.

Safety belts Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety.

No chemical cleaning Do not clean chemically; this can destroy

the webbing.

Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety belts clipped into their buckles. Do not allow the reels to retract the safety belts until they are dry.

Seite 314

Mobility Care

314 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Carpets and floor mats No objects in the area around the pedals Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other

objects out of the area of motion of the pedals; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects. Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas tened again when they are returned after being removed, such as for cleaning.

Floor mats can be removed from the passen ger compartment for cleaning. When returning the floor mats, secure them again to prevent slipping. If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the direction of travel only.

Sensors/cameras To clean sensors or cameras, use a cloth mois tened with a small amount of glass cleaner.

Displays/screens Clean the displays with an anti-static micro fiber cloth.

Cleaning displays Do not use chemical or household

cleansers. Keep all fluids and moisture away from the unit. Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa ces or electrical components. Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage can result.

Long-term vehicle storage Your service center can advise you on what to consider when storing the vehicle for longer than three months.

Seite 315

Care Mobility

315 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Reference This chapter contains technical data, short

commands for the voice activation system, and an index that will quickly take you to the

information you need.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Technical data Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Dimensions BMW X5

1 Vehicle width, with exterior mirrors: 86.5 inches/2,197 mm

2 Vehicle height: 69.9 inches/1,776 mm

3 Vehicle width, without exterior mirrors: 76.1 inches/1,933 mm

4 Wheelbase: 115.5 inches/2,933 mm

Seite 318

Reference Technical data

318 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

5 Vehicle length: 191.2 inches/4,857 mm 6 Tailgate opening height: 83.9 inches/

2,132 mm

Smallest turning circle dia.: 42.0 ft/12.8 m With mixed tires the vehicle width may exceed the specified dimension.

BMW X6

1 Vehicle width, with exterior mirrors: 86.4 inches/2,195 mm

2 Vehicle height: 66.5 inches/1,690 mm 3 Vehicle width, without exterior mirrors:

78.1 inches/1,983 mm

4 Wheelbase: 115.5 inches/2,933 mm 5 Vehicle length: 192.0 inches/4,877 mm 6 Tailgate opening height: 90.0 inches/

2,287 mm

Seite 319

Technical data Reference

319 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Smallest turning circle dia.: 42.0 ft/12.8 m Height with roof rack: 66.9 in/1,699 mm

With mixed tires the vehicle width may exceed the specified dimension.

Weights

BMW X5 X5 xDrive35i X5 xDrive50i X5 xDrive35d

Approved gross vehicle weight

lbs/kg 6,371/2,890 6,669/3,025 6,581/2,985

without 3rd row seats lbs/kg 6,052/2,745 6,327/2,870 6,261/2,840

Load lbs/kg 1,290/585 1,290/585 1,290/585

without 3rd row seats lbs/kg 1,102/500 1,102/500 1,102/500

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,800/1,270 3,020/1,370 2,976/1,350

without 3rd row seats lbs/kg 2,800/1,270 3,020/1,370 2,976/1,350

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,792/1,720 3,858/1,750 3,858/1,750

without 3rd row seats lbs/kg 3,439/1,560 3,549/1,610 3,483/1,580

Approved roof load ca pacity

lbs/kg 220/100 220/100 220/100

Cargo area capacity cu ft/ liter

35.8-75.2/620-1, 750

35.8-75.2/620 1,750

35.8-75.2/620-1, 750

Never exceed either the approved axle loads or the gross vehicle weight.

BMW X6 X6 xDrive35i X6 xDrive50i

Approved gross vehicle weight

lbs/kg 6,008/2,725 6,250/2,835

Load lbs/kg 937/425 937/425

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,800/1,270 3,020/1,370

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,263/1,480 3,351/1,520

Approved roof load ca pacity

lbs/kg 220/100 220/100

Cargo area capacity cu ft/ liter

25.6-59.7/570 1,450

25.6-59.7/570-1, 450

Seite 320

Reference Technical data

320 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Never exceed either the approved axle loads or the gross vehicle weight.

Capacities

BMW X5 Notes

Fuel tank US gal/liters Approx. 22.4/85 Fuel specifications, refer to page 270

Including reserve of

X5 xDrive35i, X5 xDrive35d US gal/liters Approx. 2.1/8

X5 xDrive50i US gal/liters approx. 2.6/10

Window washer system With headlamp washer sys tem

US qt/liters approx. 6.9/6.5 Details, refer to page 75

BMW X6 Notes

Fuel tank US gal/liters Approx. 22.4/85 Fuel specifications, refer to page 270

Including reserve of

X6 xDrive35i US gal/liters Approx. 2.1/8

X6 xDrive50i US gal/liters approx. 3.2/12

Window washer system With headlamp washer sys tem

US qt/liters approx. 6.9/6.5 Details, refer to page 75

Seite 321

Technical data Reference

321 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Short commands for voice activation system Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

General information Instructions for voice activation system, refer to page 25.

To have the available spoken instructions read out loud: Voice commands The following short commands apply to vehi cles equipped with a voice activation system. They have no function in vehicles in which only the mobile phone is operated using the voice.

Adjusting Vehicle

Function Command

Opens the main menu. Main menu

Open the options. Options

Open the settings. Settings

Settings on the Control Display. Control display

Open the time and date. Time and date

Open the language and units. Language and units

Open the speed limit. Speed

Open the light. Lighting

Open the door lock. Door locks

Seite 322

Reference Short commands for voice activation system

322 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Equipment

Function Command

Open the air conditioning settings. Climate

Open the Head-up Display. head up display

Enable the rear. Allow rear control

Vehicle information Computer

Function Command

Open the computer. Onboard info

Open the trip computer. Trip computer

Vehicle

Function Command

Open the vehicle information. Vehicle info

Open the vehicle status. Vehicle status

Navigation General information

Function Command

Navigation menu. Navigation

Open the destination entry. Enter address

Enter the address. Enter address

Enter the town/city. City

Enter the country. State

Enter the postal code. Postal Code

Open destination guidance. Guidance

Seite 323

Short commands for voice activation system Reference

323 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Function Command

Start destination guidance. Start guidance

Terminate destination guidance. Stop guidance

Open the home address. Home address

Open the route criteria. Route preference

Open the route. Route information

Switch on the spoken instruction. Switch on voice instructions

Repeat the spoken instruction. Repeat voice instructions

Switch off the spoken instruction. Switch off voice instructions

Display the address book. Address book

Display the most recent destinations. Last destinations

Open the traffic bulletins. Traffic Info

Special destinations. Points of interest

Map

Function Command

Display the map. Map

Map facing north. Map facing north

Map facing the direction of travel. Map in direction of travel

Perspective map. Map perspective view

Automatic scaling of the map. Map with automatic scaling

Scale...feet. Map scale ... feet

Scale...meters. Map scale ... meters e.g., map scale 100 meters

Scale...kilometers. Map scale ... kilometers e.g., map scale 5 kilometers

Scale...miles. Map scale ... miles e.g., map scale 5 miles

Seite 324

Reference Short commands for voice activation system

324 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Split screen settings

Function Command

Split screen. Switch on splitscreen

Switch off the split screen. Turn off split screen

Adjust the split screen. Split screen content

Split screen, map facing north. Split screen map facing north

Split screen, current position. Split screen current position

Split screen, facing the direction of travel. Split screen map in direction of travel

Split screen, perspective. Split screen perspective

Split screen, expanded intersection zoom. Splitscreen Exit ramp view

Split screen scale...feet. Split screen scale ... feet e.g., split screen scale 100 feet

Split screen scale...meters. Split screen scale ... meters e.g., split screen scale 100 meters

Split screen scale...kilometers. Split screen scale ... kilometers e.g., split screen scale 5 kilometers

Split screen scale...miles. Split screen scale ... miles e.g., split screen scale 5 miles

Split screen, highlight the traffic situation. Split screen, Traffic conditions

Split screen, computer. Split screen on board info

Split screen, trip computer. Splitscreen trip computer

Split screen, scale automatically. Split screen automatic scaling

Destination guidance with intermediate destinations

Function Command

Enter a new destination. Enter address

Trip list. Stored trips

Seite 325

Short commands for voice activation system Reference

325 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Radio FM

Function Command

Open a frequency. Frequency ... megahertz e.g., 93.5 megahertz or frequency 93.5

Open the radio. Radio

Open the FM stations. F M

Open the manual search. Manual

Select a frequency range. Select frequency

Open a station. Select station

AM

Function Command

Open a frequency. Frequency ... Kilohertz e.g., fre quency 753 or 753 kilohertz

Open the AM stations. A M

Open the manual search. Manual

Satellite radio

Function Command

Open the satellite radio. Satellite radio

Switch on the satellite radio. Satellite radio on

Select a satellite radio channel. Select satellite radio e.g., satellite radio channel 2

Stored stations

Function Command

Open the stored stations. Presets

Choose a stored station. Select preset

Select a stored station. Preset ... e.g., stored station 2

Seite 326

Reference Short commands for voice activation system

326 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

CD/multimedia CD/DVD drive

Function Command

Select a track. Track ... e.g., track 5 or C D track ... e. g., CD track 5

Play back a CD. C D on

Select a CD. Select C D

Select a CD and track. C D ... track ... e.g., CD 3 track 5

Open the CD and Multimedia menu. C D and multimedia

CD and DVD. C D

Select a DVD. D V D ... e.g., DVD 3

Display the entertainment details on a split screen. Entertainment details

Music collection

Function Command

Search for music, open a menu. Music search

Open the current playback. Current playback

Open the music collection. Music collection

Play back the music collection. Music collection on

Play back the most frequently played tracks. Top fifty

External devices

Function Command

Open the external devices. External devices

Open the Bluetooth devices. Bluetooth

Seite 327

Short commands for voice activation system Reference

327 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Tone

Function Command

Open the tone settings. Tone

Telephone

Function Command

Dial a phone number. Dial number

Open the Telephone menu. Telephone

Display the phone book. Phonebook

Redialing. Redial

Display received calls. Received calls

List of messages. Messages

Open the Bluetooth devices. Bluetooth

Office

Function Command

Open the Office menu. Office

Display Office Today. Current office

Display the contacts. Contacts

Display the messages. Messages

Display the calendar. Calendar

Display the tasks. Tasks

Display the reminders. Reminders

Seite 328

Reference Short commands for voice activation system

328 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Contacts

Function Command

Select a name. Choose name

My contacts. My contacts

Open the contacts. Contacts

New contact. New contact

ConnectedDrive or BMW Assist

Function Command

Open BMW Assist. B M W Assist

Open ConnectedDrive. Connected Drive

Open BMW Online. B M W Online

Seite 329

Short commands for voice activation system Reference

329 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Everything from A to Z Index 0-9 3rd row seats 51

A ABS, Antilock Brake Sys

tem 105 ACC Active Cruise Con

trol 111 Access to 3rd row seats 51 Accident, refer to Emergency

Request, initiating 307 Acoustic signal, refer to

Check Control 85 Activated-charcoal filter 135 Active Cruise Control

ACC 111 Active cruise control, indica

tor lamp 115 Active Cruise Control, radar

sensor 115 Active Cruise Control, select

ing the distance 113 Active Cruise Control, warn

ing lamps 115 Active seat 54 Active seat ventilation 53 Active steering 110 Adaptive brake lights, refer to

Brake force display 104 Adaptive Drive 109 Adaptive fixing system 150 Adaptive Light Control 91 Additional telephone 236 Additives, coolant 292 Additives, engine oil 291 After washing vehicle 313 Airbags 95 Airbags, indicator/warning

light 97

Air circulation, refer to Recir culated air mode 133

Air distribution, auto matic 131, 136

Air distribution, manual 133 Air drying, refer to Cooling

function 133 Air flow rate 132 Air flow rate, blower, refer to

Air volume 136 Airing, refer to Ventila

tion 134 Air pressure, refer to Tire in

flation pressure 275 Air vents 130 Air vents, refer to Ventila

tion 134 Alarm system 42 Alarm system Avoiding unintentional

alarms 43 Ending an alarm 43 Interior motion sensor 43 Tilt alarm sensor 43 All around the headliner 17 All-season tires, refer to Win

ter tires 286 All-wheel drive, refer to

xDrive 107 Alternating-code hand-held

transmitter 140 AM/FM station 192 Announcement, navigation,

refer to Spoken instruc tions 181

Antifreeze, coolant 292 Antifreeze, washer fluid 75 Antilock Brake System,

ABS 105

Anti-slip control, refer to Dy namic Stability Control DSC 105

Anti-theft protection 32 Appointments 254 Approved axle loads, refer to

Weights 320 Approved engine oils 291 Approved gross vehicle

weight, refer to Weights 320

Armrest, refer to Center arm rest 148

Arrival time, refer to Com puter 82

Ashtray 143 Ashtray, front 143 Ashtray, rear 143 Assistance, Roadside Assis

tance 308 Assistance with driving off,

refer to Drive-off assis tant 109

Assistance with starting en gine, refer to Jump-start ing 308

Audio CD with rear DVD sys tem 226

Audio device, external 148 Audio playback 201 Audio playback, Blue

tooth 215 Automatic, air distribu

tion 131, 136 Automatic air distribu

tion 136 Automatic, air flow rate 131 Automatic car wash 312 Automatic climate con

trol 130

Seite 330

Reference Everything from A to Z

330 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Automatic climate control, automatic air distribu tion 131, 136

Automatic climate control, in rear 135

Automatic climate control in rear, activating on Control Display 136

Automatic climate control in rear, air supply 136

Automatic climate control in rear, deactivating on Control Display 136

Automatic climate control in rear, switching off 136

Automatic climate control, switching off 134, 136

Automatic climate control, ventilation in rear 135

Automatic climate control, with 2-zone control 131

Automatic climate control, with 4-zone control 135

Automatic, cruise control 118 Automatic Cruise Con

trol 111 Automatic Curb Monitor 58 Automatic headlamp con

trol 90, 91 Automatic Hold 70 Automatic Hold, activating 70 Automatic Hold, deactivat

ing 70 Automatic Hold, parking 71 Automatic recirculated air

control 133 Automatic Soft Closing,

doors 35 Automatic Soft Closing, tail

gate 36 Automatic tailgate opera

tion 37, 38 Automatic transmission with

Steptronic 75 Automatic transmission with Steptronic Kickdown 75

AUTO program with auto matic climate con trol 131, 136

AUX-IN port 148, 212 Average fuel consumption 82 Average fuel consumption,

setting the units 88 Average speed 81 Average speed, refer to Com

puter 81 Axle loads, refer to

Weights 320

B Backrest curvature, refer to

Lumbar support 50 Backrest width 50 Back seats, adjusting the

head restraints 57 Backup camera 122 Backup camera, cleaning 124 Backup camera, obstacle

marking 124 Backup camera, pathway

lines 123 Backup camera, turning

lines 123 Balance 190 Band-aids, refer to First aid

kit 308 Bass 190 Battery Remote control 30 Battery change, remote con

trol for rear DVD sys tem 222

Battery disposal 305 Battery, refer to Vehicle bat

tery 304 Battery replacement, remote

control for vehicle 42 Before entering the car

wash 312 Belts, refer to Safety belts 54 Belt tensioners, refer to

Safety belts 54

Beverage holder, refer to Cu pholder 149

Black and white map dis play 184

Blower, refer to Air flow rate 132

Bluetooth audio 215 Bluetooth connection, acti

vating/deactivating 237 BMW Advanced Diesel 271 BMW Apps 265 BMW EfficientDynamics, re

fer to Saving fuel 164 BMW Homepage 6 BMW Internet page 6 BMW maintenance sys

tem 293 BMW Online 262 Bottle holder, refer to Cu

pholder 149 Brake assistant 105 Brake discs, breaking in 156 Brake fluid, refer to Service

requirements 83 Brake force display 104 Brake force distribution, elec

tronic 105 Brake lamps, brake force dis

play 104 Brake lights, adaptive 104 Brake pads, breaking in 156 Brakes, BMW maintenance

system 293 Brakes, parking brake 69 Brakes, service require

ments 83 Brake system, BMW mainte

nance system 293 Braking, notes 157 Breakdown assistance 308 Breakdown, transporting the

vehicle 310 Breaking in 156 Brightness, on the Control

Display 88

Seite 331

Everything from A to Z Reference

331 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Bulb replacement, refer to Lamp and bulb replace ment 295

Button for starting the engine, refer to Start/Stop but ton 67

C Calendar 254 Calibration, driver's seat 55 California Proposition 65

Warning 7 Camera, care 315 Camera, refer to Backup cam

era 122 Camera, Side View 127 Camera, Top View 126 Can holder, refer to Cu

pholder 149 Car battery, refer to Vehicle

battery 304 Car care products 313 Care 312 Care, displays 315 Care, vehicle 313 Cargo 160 Cargo area Comfort Access 41 Cargo area, capacities 320 Cargo area, enlarging 146 Cargo area lamp, refer to Inte

rior lamps 94 Cargo area lid, refer to Tail

gate 36, 38 Cargo area, opening/closing,

refer to Lower tailgate 38 Cargo area, opening/closing,

refer to Tailgate 36, 38 Cargo area, opening from the

inside 36 Cargo area, opening from the

outside 36 Cargo area, refer to Cargo

area 145

Cargo cover, refer to Luggage compartment roller cover 145

Cargo, securing with ski bag, refer to Securing cargo 152

Cargo straps, securing cargo 162

Car key, refer to Integrated key/remote control 30

Carpet, care 315 Car phone, installation loca

tion, refer to Center arm rest 148

Car phone, refer to Tele phone 236

Car vacuum cleaner, connect ing, refer to Connecting electrical devices 143

Car wash 312 Catalytic converter, refer to

Hot exhaust system 157 CBC, refer to Cornering Brake

Control 105 CBS Condition Based Serv

ice 293 CD/DVD 200 CD/DVD changer 204 CD/DVD in rear 221 CD/DVD notes 206 CD, refer to Playing audio

tracks, rear DVD sys tem 226

CDs, storing 207 Cell phone 236 Cell phone, installation loca

tion, refer to Center arm rest 148

Center armrest, front 148 Center armrest, rear 148 Center brake lamp 298, 301 Center console, refer to

Around the center con sole 16

Central locking Comfort Access 40 From the inside 35 Setting the unlocking char

acteristics 32 Central locking system From the outside 32 Principle 32 Central screen, refer to Con

trol Display 19 Changes, technical, refer to

Safety 6 Changing wheels/tires 285 Chassis number, refer to En

gine compartment 288 Check Control 85 Children, transporting 61 Child restraint fixing system

LATCH 62 Child restraint fixing sys

tems 61 Child restraint fixing systems,

mounting 61 Child safety locks 66 Child seat, mounting 61 Child seats, refer to Trans

porting children safely 61 Chrome parts, care 314 Cigarette lighter, connecting

electrical devices 143 Cigarette lighter, refer to

Lighter 143 Cigarette lighter socket 143 Circulation of air, refer to Re

circulated air mode 133 Cleaning, displays 315 Cleaning your BMW, refer to

Care 312 Clock 79 Clock, 12h/24h mode 87 Closing From the inside 35 From the outside 32 Clothes hooks 149 Cockpit 12 Cold start, refer to Starting

the engine 68

Seite 332

Reference Everything from A to Z

332 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Combination instrument, refer to Instrument cluster 14

Combination switch, refer to Turn signal/high beams/ headlamp flasher 72

Combination switch, refer to Washer/wiper system 73

Comfort Access Battery replacement 42 Comfort area, refer to Around

the center console 16 Compact wheel, inflation

pressure 275, 276 Compartment for remote

control, refer to Ignition lock 67

Compartments, refer to Stor age compart ments 147, 148

Compass, digital 141 Computer 81 Computer, displaying infor

mation 81 Computer, displays on the

Control Display 82 Concierge service 261 Condensation on windows,

removing 132 Condensation under the vehi

cle 158 Condition Based Service

CBS 293 Confirmation signals for lock

ing/unlocking the vehicle 33 Connecting, mobile phone,

refer to Pairing the mobile phone 237

Consumption, refer to Aver age fuel consumption 82

Contacts 250, 258 Control Display 19 Control Display, care 315 Control Display, setting the

brightness 88 Controller, refer to Con

trols 18 Controls and displays 12

Controls, rear DVD sys tem 220

Control systems, driving sta bility 105

Convenient operation Glass sunroof 33 Window 33 Coolant 292 Coolant, checking the

level 292 Coolant temperature 80 Cooling function, switching

on and off 133 Cooling, maximum 133 Cooling system, refer to Cool

ant 292 Cornering Brake Control

CBC 105 Corrosion on brake discs 158 Courtesy lamps, refer to Inte

rior lamps 94 Cradle for telephone or mo

bile phone, refer to Snap-in adapter 247

Cruise control 118 Cruise control Malfunction 119 Cruise control, active 111 Cupholder 149 Curb weight, refer to

Weights 320 Current fuel consumption 80 Current location, storing 172 Curve lights, refer to Adaptive

Light Control 91

D Dashboard lighting, refer to

Instrument lighting 94 Dashboard, refer to Cock

pit 12 Data, technical 318 Date 79 Date, display format 88 Date, retrieving 79 Date, setting 87

Daytime running lights 91 Defroster, rear window 132 Defrosting windows 132 Defrost setting, refer to De

frosting windows 132 Destination entry via the ad

dress book 172 Destination guidance 179 Destination guidance with in

termediate destinations 177 Destination input, naviga

tion 170 Diesel exhaust fluid, at low

temperatures 272 Diesel exhaust fluid, at mini

mum 272 Diesel exhaust fluid, having

refilled 272 Diesel exhaust fluid, refilling

yourself 272 Diesel particulate filter 157 Digital clock 79 Digital compass 141 Digital radio 193 Dimming mirrors 59 Directional indicators, refer to

Turn signals 72 Display in front wind

shield 127 Display lighting, refer to In

strument lighting 94 Displays and controls 12 Displays, care 315 Displays, cleaning 315 Displays, refer to Instrument

cluster 14 Disposal, coolant 292 Disposal, vehicle battery 305 Distance control, refer to Ac

tive Cruise Control 111 Distance, selecting, with Ac

tive Cruise Control 113 Distance warning, refer to

Park Distance Control PDC 120

Seite 333

Everything from A to Z Reference

333 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Divided screen view, split screen 22

Door key, refer to Remote control with integrated key 30

Door lock 34 Doors, manual operation 34 Doors, unlocking and locking Confirmation signals 33 From the inside 35 From the outside 32 DOT Quality Grades 283 Downhill control 108 Draft-free ventilation 134 Drive-off assistant 109 Driver's seat, calibrating 55 Driving away on inclines, refer

to Drive-off assistant 109 Driving notes, breaking

in 156 Driving notes, general 156 Driving on poor roads 158 Driving stability control sys

tems 105 Driving through water 157 Driving tips, refer to Driving

notes 156 Dry air, refer to Cooling func

tion 133 DSC Dynamic Stability Con

trol 105 DTC Dynamic Traction Con

trol 106 DTMF suffix dialing 242 DVD/CD 200 DVDs, storing 207 DVD system in rear 220 DVD, video 202 Dynamic destination guid

ance 186 Dynamic Performance Con

trol 107 Dynamic Stability Control

DSC 105 Dynamic Traction Control

DTC 106

E Easy entry/exit 60 EfficientDynamics, refer to

Saving fuel 164 Electrical malfunction Door lock 34 Driver's door 34 Fuel filler flap 268 Electrical malfunction of up

per tailgate 36 Electrical malfunction, park

ing brake 71 Electric seat adjustment 50 Electric steering wheel ad

justment 60 Electronic brake-force distri

bution 105 Electronic engine oil level

check 290 Electronic Stability Program

ESP, refer to Dynamic Sta bility Control DSC 105

Emergency operation Door lock, refer to Manual

operation 34 Emergency operation, fuel

filler flap, unlocking man ually 268

Emergency Request 307 Emergency service, refer to

Roadside Assistance 308 Energy-conscious driving, re

fer to Current fuel consump tion 80

Energy, saving, refer to Sav ing fuel 164

Engine, breaking in 156 Engine compartment 288 Engine coolant, refer to Cool

ant 292 Engine oil, adding 291 Engine oil, additives, refer to

Approved engine oils 291 Engine oil, alternative oil

types 292

Engine oil, BMW maintenance system 293

Engine oil change intervals, refer to Service require ments 83

Engine oil, checking the level 290

Engine oil, filling ca pacity 321

Engine oil temperature 80 Engine oil types, alterna

tive 291 Engine oil types, ap

proved 291 Engine, overheating, refer to

Coolant temperature 80 Engine start, assistance 308 Engine, starting 68 Engine, starting Comfort Access 40 Engine, starting, Start/Stop

button 67 Engine, stopping, Start/Stop

button 67 Engine, switching off 69 Environmentally friendly driv

ing, refer to Current fuel consumption 80

Equalizer 190 Equipment, interior 139 ESP Electronic Stability Pro

gram, refer to Dynamic Sta bility Control DSC 105

Exchanging wheels/tires 285 Exhaust system 157 Exterior mirrors 58 Exterior mirrors, adjusting 58 Exterior mirrors, automatic

dimming 59 Exterior mirrors, automatic

heating 59 Exterior mirrors, folding in and

out 59 External audio device 148 External devices 212 External temperature dis

play 79

Seite 334

Reference Everything from A to Z

334 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

External temperature display, changing the units of meas ure, changing the units of measure on the Control Dis play 88

External temperature warn ing 79

Externel temperature dis play 79

Eyes for securing cargo 162

F Fader 190 Failure messages, refer to

Check Control 85 False alarm Avoiding unintentional

alarms 43 Ending an alarm 43 Fastening safety belts, refer

to Safety belts 54 Fault messages, refer to

Check Control 85 Filling capacities 321 Filter, refer to Microfilter/acti

vated-charcoal filter 135 Fine wood, care 314 First aid kit 308 Fitting for towing 310 Fixing system, adaptive 150 Flashing when locking/

unlocking 33 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 97 Flat Tire Monitor FTM, snow

chains 287 Flat tire, run-flat tires 286 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni

tor TPM 99 Flat tire, warning

lamp 98, 100 Flat tire, wheel change 302 Flooding, refer to Driving

through water 157 Floor carpet, care 315 Floor mats, care 315 FM/AM station 192

Fog on windows, remov ing 132

Foldable rear seat back rest 146

Foot brake 157 Footwell lamps, refer to Inte

rior lamps 94 For your own safety 6 Four-wheel drive, refer to

xDrive 107 Front airbags 95 Front fog lamps 93 Front fog lamps, bulb replace

ment 297, 300 Front fog lamps, indicator

lamp 93 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 97 Fuel 270 Fuel Refer to Average fuel con

sumption 82 Fuel, additives 270 Fuel, average consump

tion 82 Fuel cap 268 Fuel cap, closing 268 Fuel consumption display Average fuel consump

tion 82 Fuel consumption display,

current fuel consump tion 80

Fuel-efficient driving, refer to Current fuel consump tion 80

Fuel filler flap, closing 268 Fuel filler flap, opening 268 Fuel filler flap, unlocking in

case of an electrical mal function 268

Fuel gauge 81 Fuel, saving 164 Fuel tank capacity, refer to

Filling capacities 321 Fuel tank contents, refer to

Filling capacities 321

Fuel tank, refer to Filling ca pacities 321

Fuse 305

G Garage door opener, refer to

Universal Garage Door Opener 139

Gasoline 270 Gasoline gauge, refer to Fuel

gauge 81 Gasoline quality 270 Gas station recommenda

tion 181 Gear change, automatic

transmission with Step tronic 77

Gear change, via shift pad dles 77

General driving notes 156 Glass sunroof, closing 47 Glass sunroof, electric Convenient operation 33 Remote control 33 Glass sunroof, initializing 48 Glass sunroof, opening 47 Glass sunroof, pinch protec

tion 47 Glass sunroof, power fail

ure 48 Glass sunroof, refer to Panor

amic glass sunroof 45 Glass sunroof, tilting 47 Glove compartment 147 Glove compartment, light

ing 147 GPS navigation, refer to Navi

gation system 168 Gross vehicle weight, refer to

Weights 320

H Handbrake, refer to Parking

brake 69

Seite 335

Everything from A to Z Reference

335 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Hand-held transmitter, alter nating code 140

Hands-free microphone 16 Hazard warning sys

tem 16, 307 HDC Hill Descent Con

trol 108 HD Radio 193 Head airbags 95 Headlamp control, auto

matic 90, 91 Headlamp courtesy delay fea

ture 91 Headlamp flasher 72, 92 Headlamp flasher, indicator

lamp 15 Headlamps 90 Headlamps, care 313 Headlamps, cleaning 74 Headlamps, cleaning, washer

fluid 75 Headliner 17 Headphones, connecting,

rear DVD system 221 Head restraints 55 Head-up Display 127 Head-up Display, care 315 Heatable rear window 132 Heating 130 Heating Seats 52 Heating, interior 130 Heating, mirrors 59 Heating, residual heat 134 Heating with the engine

switched off, refer to Resid ual heat 134

Heavy cargo, refer to Stowing cargo 161

Height, refer to Dimen sions 318

High-beam Assistant 92 High beams 92 High beams/low beams, auto

matic, refer to High-beam Assistant 92

High beams, indicator lamp 15

High-pressure washers 312 Hill Descent Control

HDC 108 Hill drive-off assistant, refer to

Drive-off assistant 109 Hills 158 Holder for beverages 149 Holder for remote control, re

fer to Ignition lock 67 Homepage 6 Hood 289 Hood, opening 289 Horn 12 Hot exhaust system 157 Hotline 263 House number, entering for

navigation 171 Hydraulic brake assis

tant 105 Hydroplaning 157

I Ice warning, refer to External

temperature warning 79 Icy roads, refer to External

temperature warning 79 Identification marks, tires 283 iDrive 18 iDrive, changing settings 87 iDrive, changing the lan

guage 88 iDrive, changing the units of

measure and display for mat 88

iDrive, setting the bright ness 88

iDrive, setting the date 87 iDrive, setting the time 87 Ignition 68 Ignition key position 1, refer

to Radio ready state 67 Ignition key position 2, refer

to Ignition on 68

Ignition key, refer to Remote control with integrated key 30

Ignition lock 67 Ignition, switched off 68 Ignition, switched on 68 Images, displaying, rear DVD

system 228 Indication of a flat tire 98, 100 Indicator and warning

lamps 15 Inflation pressure monitor, re

fer to Flat Tire Monitor 97 Inflation pressure, refer to

Tire inflation pressure 275 Information on the navigation

data 168 Initialization after power fail

ure 305 Initializing Compass, refer to Calibrat

ing 142 Panoramic glass sunroof 46 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor

FTM 98 Initializing, glass sunroof 48 Initializing, refer to Setting the

date 87 Initializing, refer to Setting the

time 87 Initializing, Tire Pressure

Monitor TPM 100 Installation location, tele

phone 148 Instrument cluster 14 Instrument lighting 94 Instrument panel, refer to In

strument cluster 14 Instruments, refer to Cock

pit 12 Integrated key 30 Interactive map 175 Interior equipment 139 Interior lamps 94 Interior lamps Remote control 33 Interior mirror 59

Seite 336

Reference Everything from A to Z

336 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Interior rearview mirror, auto matic dimming 59

Interior rearview mirror, com pass 141

Interior temperature, setting, automatic climate con trol 130

Intermediate destina tions 177

Internet page 6 Intersection, entering for navi

gation 171 iPod/iPhone 212

J Jacking points for the vehicle

jack 302 Jack, refer to Vehicle

jack 302 Joystick, refer to Selector

lever 76 Jump-starting 308

K Keyless Go, refer to Comfort

Access 40 Keyless opening and closing,

refer to Comfort Access 40 Key Memory, refer to Per

sonal Profile 30 Key, refer to Integrated key/

remote control 30 Kickdown Automatic transmission with

Steptronic 75 Knocking control 270

L Label, run-flat tire 286 Lamp and bulb replacement,

lamp replacement 295 Lamps 90 Lamps, automatic headlamp

control 90, 91

Lamps, High-beam Assis tant 92

Lamps, parking lamps/low beams 90

Lamps, replacing, refer to Lamp and bulb replace ment 295

Lane departure warning 102 Lane margin, warning 102 Language, changing on Con

trol Display 88 Lap-and-shoulder belt, refer

to Safety belts 54 Lashing eyes, securing

cargo 162 LATCH child restraint fixing

system 62 Leather, care 313 LEDs, light-emitting di

odes 296 Length, refer to Dimen

sions 318 Letters and numbers, enter

ing 23 License plate lamps, replac

ing bulbs 298, 301 Light-alloy wheels, care 314 Light-emitting diodes,

LEDs 296 Lighter 143 Lighting Instruments 94 Lighting, vehicle, refer to

Lamps 90 Light switch 90 Limit, refer to Speed limit 86 Load 160 Loading 160 Lock buttons, doors, refer to

Locking 35 Locking From the inside 35 From the outside 33 Setting the confirmation

signals 33 Without remote control, re

fer to Comfort Access 40

Locking the vehicle From the inside 35 From the outside 32 Locks, doors, and win

dows 66 Longlife oils, alternative oil

types 292 Longlife oils, refer to Ap

proved engine oils 291 Low beams 90 Low beams Automatic 91 Low beams, automatic 90 Low beams, automatic, refer

to High-beam Assistant 92 Lower back support, refer to

Lumbar support 50 Lower tailgate 38 Low-sulfur diesel 270 Luggage compartment roller

cover 145 Luggage rack, refer to Roof-

mounted luggage rack 162 Lumbar support 50

M Main inspection, refer to

Service requirements 83 Maintenance 293 Maintenance, refer to Service

booklet Maintenance, refer to Service

requirements 83 Maintenance require

ments 293 Maintenance system

BMW 293 Malfunction Door lock 34 Fuel filler flap 268 Malfunction of upper tail

gate 36 Malfunction, parking

brake 71 Malfunction warnings, refer to

Check Control 85

Seite 337

Everything from A to Z Reference

337 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Manual air distribution 133 Manual mode, automatic

transmission with Step tronic 77

Manual operation Door lock 34 Driver's door 34 Manual operation, fuel filler

flap 268 Manual operation of upper

tailgate 36 Manual operation, Side

View 127 Manual operation, Top

View 125 Map, destination entry 175 Map display in black and

white 184 Map in split screen 183 Map view 181 Marking on approved

tires 286 Master key, refer to Remote

control with integrated key 30

Maximum cooling 133 Maximum speed, winter

tires 286 Medical kit, refer to First aid

kit 308 Memory, refer to Seat and

mirror memory 57 Menus, operating, iDrive 18 Menus, refer to iDrive operat

ing concept 19 Message list, traffic bulle

tins 183 Messages 252 Microfilter 135 Minimum tread, tires 284 Mirror Mirror memory, refer to Seat

and mirror memory 57 Mirrors 58 Mirrors Automatic Curb Monitor 58 Mirrors, folding in and out 59

Mirrors, heating 59 Mirrors, interior mirror 59 Mobile communication devi

ces in the vehicle 157 Mobile phone, installation lo

cation, refer to Center arm rest 148

Mobile phone, refer to Tele phone 236

Modifications, technical, refer to Safety 6

Monitor, refer to Control Dis play 19

Mounting of child restraint fix ing systems 61

MP3 player 212 Multimedia 200 Music collection 207 Music search 208 Music, storing 207

N Navigation 168 Navigation data 168 Navigation data, updat

ing 168 Navigation system Destination entry by

voice 176 Neck restraints, refer to Head

restraints 55 Nets, refer to Storage com

partments 148 Neutral cleaner, care 314 New wheels and tires 285 Notes 6, 255 Nozzles of automatic climate

control 130 Nozzles, refer to Ventila

tion 134

O OBD Onboard Diagnos

tics 294

OBD socket, refer to Socket for OBD Onboard Diagno sis 294

Octane number, refer to Fuel quality 270

Octane rating, refer to Gaso line quality 270

Odometer 80 Office 249 Oil additives 291 Oil consumption 290 Oil level 290 Oil, refer to Engine oil 290 Oil types, alternative 291 Oil types, approved 291 Old batteries, disposal 305 Onboard Diagnostics

OBD 294 Onboard monitor, refer to

Control Display 19 Onboard vehicle tool kit 295 Opening and closing Comfort Access 40 From the inside 35 From the outside 32 Using the door lock 34 Using the remote control 32 Opening height, adjust

ing 37, 38 Operating concept, iDrive 18 Outside-air mode, automatic

climate control 133 Outside air, refer to Recircu

lated air mode 133 Overheating of engine, refer

to Coolant temperature 80

P Paint, vehicle 313 Pairing, mobile phone 237 Panic mode 33

Seite 338

Reference Everything from A to Z

338 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Panoramic glass sunroof Convenient operation 33 Initializing 46 Opening, closing 45 Pinch protection 46 Power failure 46 Remote control 33 Tilting 45 Park Distance Control

PDC 120 Parked-car ventilation 137 Parked vehicle, condensa

tion 158 Parking aid, refer to Park Dis

tance Control PDC 120 Parking assistant, refer to

Park Distance Control PDC 120

Parking brake 69 Parking brake, Automatic

Hold 70 Parking brake, releasing man

ually 70, 71 Parking brake, setting man

ually 69 Parking lamps 90 Parking lamps/low beams 90 Parking with Automatic

Hold 71 Particulate filter, refer to Die

sel particulate filter 157 Passenger airbags, deactivat

ing 96 Passenger side mirror, tilt

ing 58 PDC Park Distance Con

trol 120 Personal information 249 Personal Profile 30 Pinch protection Panoramic glass sunroof 46 Windows 44 Pinch protection, glass sun

roof 47 Plastic, care 314 Playing videos, rear DVD sys

tem 223

Pollen, refer to Microfilter/ activated-charcoal filter 135

Poor road operation 158 Position, storing 172 Postal code, entering in navi

gation 171 Power windows Safety switch 44 Power windows, opening and

closing 44 Power windows, refer to Win

dows 43 Preheating, refer to Diesel en

gine 68 Prescribed engine oils, refer

to Approved engine oils 291 Pressure, tires 275 Pressure warning, tires 97 Profile depth, refer to Mini

mum tread depth 284 Profile, tires 284 Programmable memory but

tons, iDrive 23 Protection function, refer to

Pinch protection 47 Protection function, refer to Pinch protection Panoramic glass sunroof 46 Protective function, refer to Pinch protection Windows 44 Push-and-turn switch, refer to

Controls 18

R Radiator fluid, refer to Cool

ant 292 Radio-operated key, refer to

Remote control with integrated key 30

Radio ready state 67 Radio ready state, switched

off 68 Radio ready state, switched

on 67

Radio setting, refer to Radio ready state 67

Rain sensor 74 Random 201 Random playback 201 Range 81 RDS 193 Reading lamps 94 Reading out loud 256 Rear entertainment, refer to

DVD system in rear 220 Rear lamps, refer to Tail

lamps 297, 300 Rear seat backrest, folda

ble 146 Rear seats, adjusting 51 Rear seats, adjusting the

head restraints 57 Rear seats, heating 52 Rear socket 144 Rear ventilation 135 Rear ventilation, 3rd row

seats 135 Rear ventilation, automatic

climate control in rear 135 Rearview mirror, refer to Mir

rors 58 Rear window defroster 132 Rear window, washing 74 Rear window wiper 74 Recirculated air mode 133 Recommended tire

brands 286 Redialing 243 Refueling 268 Remaining distance to desti

nation, refer to Com puter 82

Remaining range for service, refer to Service require ments 83

Remaining range, refer to Range 81

Reminders 256

Seite 339

Everything from A to Z Reference

339 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Remote control Battery replacement 42 Comfort Access 40 Garage door opener 139 Malfunction 34, 41 Tailgate 33 Universal 139 Remote control, rear DVD

system 221 Remote control, removing

from the ignition lock 67 Remote control, service

data 293 Remote inquiry 242 Replacement fuse 305 Replacement remote con

trol 30 Replacing wheels/tires 285 Reporting safety defects 8 Reserve warning, refer to Fuel

gauge 81 Reservoir for washer fluid, re

fer to Washer fluid reser voir 75

Resetting, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 100

Residual heat 134 Restraining systems Refer to Safety belts 54 Restraint systems for chil

dren 61 Retaining straps, securing

cargo 162 Retreaded tires 286 Rim cleaner, care 314 Road, avoiding 179 Road detour 179 Roadside Assistance 262 Roadside parking lamps 92 Roller sunblinds 45 RON gasoline quality 270 RON, refer to Fuel qual

ity 270 Roof load capacity 320 Roof-mounted luggage

rack 162 Rope, refer to Towing 310

Route 180 Route criteria, route 179 Route, displaying 180 Route section, bypass

ing 180 RSC Runflat System Compo

nent, refer to Run-flat tires 286

Rubber components, care 314

Run-flat tires 286 Run-flat tires, tire inflation

pressure 275 Running lights, refer to Park

ing lamps/low beams 90

S Safe braking 157 Safety 6 Safety belts 54 Safety belts Damage 55 Safety belts, care 314 Safety belts, indicator/warn

ing lamp 55 Safety belts, reminder 55 Safety switch for rear win

dows 44 Safety systems Safety belts 54 Safety systems, airbags 95 Safety tires, refer to Run-flat

tires 286 Satellite radio 194 Saving fuel 164 Scale, changing during navi

gation 182 Screen, folding open/closed,

rear DVD system 220 Screen, refer to Control Dis

play 19 Search, refer to BMW On

line 262 Seat adjustment, electric 50 Seat adjustment, manual 49 Seat and mirror memory 57

Seat belts Refer to Safety belts 54 Seat heating 52, 53 Seat heating, rear 52 Seats Adjusting electrically 50 Heating 52 Memory, refer to Seat and

mirror memory 57 Sitting safely 49 Storing the setting, refer to

Seat and mirror memory 57 Ventilation, refer to Active

seat ventilation and seat heating 53

Seats, adjusting 49 Seats, backrest width 50 Seats in the rear 51 Seats, shoulder support 50 2nd row seats 51 Selector lever, automatic

transmission with Step tronic 76

Selector lever lock, releas ing 76

Self-leveling suspension 110 Sensors, care 315 Service and warranty 7 Service data in the remote

control 293 Service interval display, refer

to Condition Based Service CBS 293

Service interval display, refer to Service requirements 83

Service requirements 83 Service requirements, CBS

Condition Based Serv ice 293

Service, Roadside Assis tance 308

Settings, clock, 12h/24h mode 87

Settings, configuring, refer to Personal Profile 30

Settings, DVD 203

Seite 340

Reference Everything from A to Z

340 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Settings on the Control Dis play, changing 87

Shifting, automatic transmis sion with Steptronic 77

Shift paddles 77 Short commands, voice acti

vation 322 Side airbags 95 Side View 126 Side windows, refer to Win

dows 43 Size, refer to Dimensions 318 Ski bag 151 Slide/tilt glass roof, refer to

Glass sunroof 46 Slide/tilt glass roof, refer to

Panoramic glass sunroof 45 Slot for remote control 67 Smokers' package, refer to

Ashtray 143 Snap-in adapter, mobile

phone 247 Snap-in adapter, refer to

Storage compartment of center armrest 148

Snow chains 287 Socket, OBD Onboard Diag

nosis 294 Socket, refer to Connecting

electrical devices 143 Software applications,

iPhone 265 Software part number 236 Software update 218 Soot particulate filter, refer to

Diesel particulate filter 157 SOS, refer to Emergency Re

quest, initiating 307 Sound output 192, 200 Spare fuse 305 Special destinations, naviga

tion 173 Special equipment, series

equipment 6 Speed, average 81 Speed limit 86

Speed limit, setting 86 Speedometer 14 Speed, with winter tires 286 Split screen 22 Split screen map set

tings 183 Spoken instructions, naviga

tion 181 Sport program, automatic

transmission with Step tronic 77

Spray nozzles, refer to Clean ing the windshield and head lamps 74

Spray nozzles, refer to Wind shield washer nozzles 74

Stability control systems 105 Start/Stop button 67 Start/Stop button, starting the

engine 68 Start/Stop button, switching

off the engine 69 Starting the engine 68 Start problems, refer to

Jump-starting 308 State/province, selecting for

navigation 170 Stations, stored 198 Station, storing 192 Status information, iDrive 22 Status of Owner's Manual 6 Steam jets 312 Steering wheel 60 Steering wheel, adjusting 60 Steering wheel, easy entry/

exit 60 Steering wheel lock 67 Steering with variable transla

tion, refer to Active steer ing 110

Steptronic, refer to Sport pro gram and manual mode M/ S 77

Stopping, engine 69 Storage compartment

nets 148

Storage compart ments 147, 148

Storage, tires 286 Storing the seat position, re

fer to Seat and mirror mem ory 57

Storing the vehicle 315 Street, entering for naviga

tion 171 Summer tires, refer to Wheels

and tires 275 Summer tires, tread 284 Sunblinds, roller sun

blinds 45 Surround View 122 Switches, refer to Cockpit 12 Switching off, engine 69 Switching off, vehicle 69 Switch-on times, parked-car

ventilation 137 Symbols 6

T Tachometer 80 Tailgate Comfort Access 41 Remote control 33 Tailgate, adjusting the open

ing height 37, 38 Tailgate, automatic opera

tion 38 Tail lamps 297, 300 Tank gauge, refer to Fuel

gauge 81 Tasks 255 Technical changes, refer to

Safety 6 Technical data 318 Telephone 236 Telephone, adjusting the vol

ume 240 Telephone, installation loca

tion, refer to Center arm rest 148

TeleService 261

Seite 341

Everything from A to Z Reference

341 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Temperature, adjusting in up per body region 132

Temperature, coolant, refer to Coolant temperature 80

Temperature display External temperature 79 External temperature warn

ing 79 Temperature display, setting

the units 88 Temperature, engine oil 80 Temperature, setting with au

tomatic climate con trol 132, 136

Temperature warning 79 Text messages 252 Theft alarm system, refer to

Alarm system 42 Thigh support adjustment 49 Third brake lamp, refer to

Center brake lamp 298, 301 Seats, 3rd row seats 51 Tilting the passenger side

mirror 58 Time, setting 87 Tire age 283 Tire identification marks 283 Tire inflation pressure 275 Tire inflation pressure, check

ing 275 Tire pressure monitor, refer to

Flat Tire Monitor 97 Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 99 Tire Quality Grading 283 Tires Inflation pressure 275 Tires, breaking in 156 Tires, changing 285 Tires, condition 284 Tires, damage 284 Tire size 283 Tires, minimum tread 284 Tires, retreaded tires 286 Tires, run-flat tires 286 Tires, storage 286 Tire tread 284

Toll roads, route 179 Tone 190 Tool kit, refer to Onboard ve

hicle tool kit 295 Tools, refer to Onboard vehi

cle tool kit 295 Top View 124 Tow bar 310 Tow fitting 310 Towing 309 Town/city, navigation 171 Tow rope 310 Tow-starting 309, 311 TPM Tire Pressure Moni

tor 99 Traction control 106 Traffic bulletins, naviga

tion 183 Transmission, automatic

transmission with Step tronic 75

Transmission positions, auto matic transmission with Steptronic 75

Transporting children safely 61

Treble, tone 190 Trip computer, refer to Dis

plays on the Control Dis play 82

Trip-distance counter, refer to Trip odometer 80

Triple turn signal activa tion 73

Trip odometer 80 Trips, planning 177 Trunk lid, refer to Tailgate 38 Turning circle, refer to Dimen

sions 318 Turning lamps, refer to Adap

tive Light Control 91 Turn signal, indicator

lamp 14 Turn signals 72 Turn signals, triple turn signal

activation 73

U Uniform Tire Quality Grading/

UTQG 283 Unintentional alarms, avoid

ing 43 Units, average fuel consump

tion 88 Units, temperature 88 Universal Garage Door

Opener 139 Universal remote control 139 Unlocking From the outside 32 Setting the unlocking char

acteristics 32 Tailgate 41 Without remote control, re

fer to Comfort Access 40 Unlocking, from the inside 35 Unlocking, hood 289 Updates made after the edito

rial deadline 6 Update, software 218 Upholstery care 313 Upper tailgate 36 Upper tailgate, automatic op

eration 37 Upper tailgate, closing 36 Upper tailgate, emergency

operation, refer to Opening manually 36

Upper tailgate, opening from the inside 36

Upper tailgate, opening from the outside 36

Upper tailgate, opening man ually 36

USB audio interface 212 USB interface 147

V Vacuum cleaner, connecting,

refer to Connecting electri cal devices 143

Seite 342

Reference Everything from A to Z

342 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

Vehicle Identification number 236 Identification number, refer

to Engine compartment 288 Vehicle battery, chang

ing 304 Vehicle, breaking in 156 Vehicle care 313 Vehicle care, refer to

Care 312 Vehicle equipment 6 Vehicle jack 302 Vehicle paint 313 Vehicle storage 315 Vehicle, switching off 69 Vehicle wash 312 Ventilation 134 Ventilation, 3rd row

seats 135 Ventilation, automatic climate

control in rear 137 Ventilation, draft-free 134 Ventilation, in rear 135 Ventilation, refer to Parked-

car ventilation 137 Vents of automatic climate

control 130 Version of the navigation

data 168 Video playback 202 Voice activation Navigation 176 Voice activation, mobile

phone 245 Voice activation, short com

mands 322 Voice activation system 25 Volume, setting 190

W Warning and indicator

lamps 15 Warning messages, refer to

Check Control 85 Warning signal volumes 191 Warning triangle 308

Washer/wiper system 73 Washer/wiper system, rain

sensor 74 Washer/wiper system, washer

fluid 75 Washer/wiper system, wind

shield washer nozzles 74 Washer fluid 75 Washer fluid reservoir 75 Washing, vehicle 312 Waste tray, refer to Ash

tray 143 Water on roads, refer to Driv

ing through water 157 Weights 320 Welcome lamps 90 Wheelbase, refer to Dimen

sions 318 Wheel change 302 Wheels and tires 275 Wheels, changing 285 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor

FTM 97 Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni

tor TPM 99 Width, refer to Dimen

sions 318 Window, convenient opera

tion 33 Windows Safety switch 44 Windows, defrosting and de

fogging, automatic climate control 132

Windows, pinch protec tion 44

Windshield, cleaning 74 Windshield, defrosting, refer

to Defrosting windows 132 Windshield wash 73 Windshield washer fluid 75 Windshield wash, rear win

dow 74 Windshield wash, reservoir for

washer fluid 75 Windshield wash, washer

fluid 75

Windshield wash, washer nozzles 74

Windshield wiper blades, changing 295

Windshield wiper, refer to Washer/wiper system 73

Winter diesel 271 Winter storage, care 315 Winter tires, setting the speed

limit 86 Winter tires, suitable

tires 286 Winter tires, tread 284 Wiper blades, changing 295 Wiper fluid 75 Wood, care 314 Word match concept, naviga

tion 24 Working in the engine com

partment 289 Wrench/screwdriver, refer to

Onboard vehicle tool kit 295

X xDrive 107 Xenon headlamps 296, 299

Y Your individual vehicle Settings, refer to Personal

Profile 30

Seite 343

Everything from A to Z Reference

343 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 918 395 - III/13

More about BMW

bmwusa.com The Ultimate Driving

Machine

01 4

0 2

91 8 <

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the X5 Series BMW works, you can view and download the BMW X5 xDrive35d X5 Series 2013 Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for BMW X5 Series as well as other BMW manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a BMW X5 Series. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the BMW X5 xDrive35d X5 Series 2013 Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This BMW X5 xDrive35d X5 Series 2013 Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download BMW X5 xDrive35d X5 Series 2013 Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print BMW X5 xDrive35d X5 Series 2013 Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the BMW X5 xDrive35d X5 Series 2013 Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.